Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 12th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 12th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

Question 1.
What is electrochemistry ?
Answer:
Electrochemistry : It is the branch of physical chemistry which involves the study of the inter-relation between chemical changes and electrical energy and also concerned with the electrical properties of electrolytic solutions such as resistance and conductance.

Question 2.
What is electric conduction?
Answer:
The transfer of electric charge or electrons from one point to another is called electric conduction which results in an electric current.

Question 3.
What are the electric conductors?
Answer:
The substances that allow the flow of electricity or electric charge transfer through them are called the electric conductors.

Question 4.
What is a flow of electricity or a transfer of electric charge?
Answer:
The flow of electricity or a transfer of electric charge through a conductor involves the transfer of electrons from one point to the other point. This takes place under the influence of applied electric potential.

Question 5.
What are the types of electric conductors? On what basis are they classified ?
Answer:
The electric conductors are classified according to the mechanism of the transfer of electrons or charge. There are two types of conductors as follows :

(i) Electrons (or metallic) conductors : The electric conductors through which the conduction of electricity takes place by a direct flow of electrons under the influence of applied potential are called electronic conductors.

In this case, there is no transfer of matter like atoms or ions. For example, solid and molten metals such as Al, Cu, etc.

(ii) Electrolytic conductors : The conductors in which the conduction of electricity takes place by the migration of positive ions (cations) and negative ions (anions) of the electrolyte are called electrolytic conductors. In this, the conduction involves the transfer of matter and it is accompanied with chemical changes. For example, solutions of electrolytes (strong and weak), molten salts.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

Question 6.
Distinguish between electronic and electrolytic conductors.
Answer:
Electronic conductors:

  1. The flow of electricity takes place by direct flow of electrons through the conductor.
  2. The conduction does not involve the transfer of a matter.
  3. No chemical change is involved during conduction.
  4. The resistance of the conductor increases and conductivity decreases with the increase in temperature.
  5. The conductance of metallic conductors is very high.
  6. Examples are solid or molten metals, such as Al, Cu, etc.

Electrolytic conductors:

  1. The electron transfer takes place by the migration of ions (cations and anions) of the electrolyte.
  2. The conduction involves the transfer of a matter.
  3. Chemical changes are always involved during the passage of an electric current.
  4. The resistance decreases and the conductivity increases with the increase in temperature.
  5. The conductance of the electrolytes is comparatively low.
  6. Examples are aqueous solutions of acids, bases or salts.

Question 7.
What information is provided by measurement of conductivities of solutions?
Answer:

  • The conducting and nonconducting properties of solutions can be identified by the measurement of their conductivities.
  • The substances like sucrose and urea which do not dissociate in aqueous solutions have same conductivity as that of water. Hence they are nonelectrolytes.
  • The substances like KCl, CH3COOH, NaOH, etc. dissociate in their aqueous solutions and their conductivities are higher than water. Hence they are electrolytes.
  • On the basis of high or low electrical conductivity, the electrolytes can be classified as strong and weak electrolytes. The solutions of strong electrolytes have high conductivities while solutions of weak electrolytes have lower conductivities.

Question 8.
What is Ohm’s law?
Answer:
Ohm’s law : According to Ohm’s law, the electrical resistance R of a conductor is equal to the electric potential difference, V divided by the electric current, I.
R = \(\frac{V}{I}\) ohm

Question 9.
What are SI units of
(a) electrical resistance
(b) potential and
(c) electric current?
Answer:
(a) The SI unit of electrical resistance is Ohm denoted by Ω (omega).
(b) The SI unit of potential is volt denoted by V.
(c) The SI unit of electric current is ampere denoted by A.

Question 10.
How is electrical conductance of a solution denoted ? What are its units ?
Answer:
The electrical conductance of a solution is denoted by G and it is the reciprocal of resistance, R.
G = \(\frac{1}{R}\)
The unit of G is siemens denoted by S or Ω-1.
Hence we can write, S = Ω-1 = AV-1 = CV-1S-1 where A is ampere and C is coulomb.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

Question 11.
What is electrical conductance? What are its units ?
Answer:
The reciprocal of the electrical resistance of a solution is called the conductance. It is represented by G.
∴ Conductance (G) = \(\frac{1}{\text { Resistance }}=\frac{1}{\mathrm{R}}\)
The conductance has units of reciprocal of ohm (Ω-1, ohm-1 or mho). In SI units, conductance has units as Siemens, (S). (1 S = 1 Ω-1 = 1 ohm-1 = 1 mho = AV-1 = CV-1 S, where C represents electric charge in coulomb, and A represents current strength)

Question 12.
What is specific conductance or conductivity?
Answer:
The reciprocal of specific resistance or resistivity is called specific conductance or conductivity.
If ρ is the resistivity then,
conductivity = \(\frac{1}{\text { resistivity }}=\frac{1}{\rho}\)
Conductivity is denoted by κ (kappa), where κ = \(\frac{1}{\rho}\)
It is the conductance of a conductor that is 1 m in length and 1 m2 in cross section area in SI units. (In C.G.S. units, it is the resistance of a conductor that is 1 cm in length and 1 cm2 in cross section area.) It is the conductance of a conductor of volume 1 m3 (or in C.G.S. units, the volume of 1 cm3).

Question 13.
What are the units of specific conductance or conductivity?
Answer:
If ρ is a resistivity and κ is conductivity or specific conductance, then
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 1
(where S is Siemens)
(In C.G.S. system, the units of κ are Ω-1 cm-1 or S cm-1 which are commonly used.)

Question 14.
Define molar conductivity. What is the significance of it ?
Answer:
Molar conductivity: It is defined as a conductance of a volume of the solution containing ions from one mole of an electrolyte when placed between two parallel plate electrodes 1 cm apart and of large area, sufficient to accommodate the whole solution between them, at constant temperature. It is denoted by ∧m.

Thus, the significance of molar conductivity is the conductance due to ions from one mole of an electrolyte.

Question 15.
Obtain a relation between conductivity (κ) and molar conductivity (∧m).
Answer:
Conductivity or specific conductance (κ) is the conductance of 1 cm3 of the solution in C.G.S. units, while molar conductivity is the conductance of a solution containing one mole of an electrolyte. Consider C molar solution, i.e., C moles of an electrolyte present in 1 litre or 1000 cm3 of the solution.
∴ C moles of an electrolyte are present in 1000 cm3 solution.
∴ 1 mole of an electrolyte is present in \(\frac{1000}{\mathrm{C}}\) cm
solution.
Now,
∴ Conductance of 1 cm3 of this solution is κ,
∴ Conductance of \(\frac{1000}{\mathrm{C}}\) cm3 of the solution is \(\frac{\kappa \times 1000}{C}\)
This represents molar conductivity, ∧m.
∴ ∧m = \(\frac{\kappa \times 1000}{C}\) cm2 mol-1 (in C.G.S units)
[In case of SI units :
Consider a solution in which C moles of an electrolyte are present in 1 m3 of solution.
Conductivity κ is the conductance of 1 m3 of solution.
∵ C moles of an electrolyte are present in 1 m3 solution.
∴ 1 mol of an electrolyte is present in \(\frac{1}{C}\) solution.
∵ Conductance of 1 m3 of this solution is κ.
∴ Conductance of \(\frac{1}{C}\) m3 of the solution is \(\frac{\kappa}{\mathrm{C}}\)
This represents molar conductivity, ∧m.
∴ ∧m = \(\frac{\kappa}{\mathrm{C}}\)Ω-1 m2 mol-1 (In SI units).]

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

Question 16.
What are the units of molar conductivity, ∧m?
Answer:
In SI units: Conductivity κ is expressed in Ω-1m-1 (or S m-1) and concentration of the solution is expressed in mol m-3.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 2
In C.G.S. units : Conductivity is expressed in Ω-1 cm-1 (or S cm-1) and concentration of the solution is expressed in mol L-1 or moles in 1000 cm3 of the solution.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 3

Question 17.
Explain the variation of molar conductivity with concentration for strong and weak electrolytes.
OR
How is the molar conductivity of strong electrolytes at zero concentration determined by graphical method? Why is this method not useful for weak electrolytes?
Answer:
(i) As the dilution of an electrolytic solution increases, the dissociation of the electrolyte increases, hence the total number of ions increases, therefore, the molar conductivity increases.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 4
Fig. 5.5 : Variation of molar conductivity with \(\sqrt{\mathbf{c}}\)
(ii) The increase in molar conductivity with increase in dilution or decrease in concentration is different for strong and weak electrolytes.
(iii) On dilution, the molar conductivity of strong electrolytes increases rapidly and approaches to a maximum limiting value at infinite dilution or zero concentration and represented as ∧ ∞ or ∧0 or ∧0m. In case of weak electrolytes which dissociate less as compared to strong electrolytes, the molar conductivity is low and increases slowly in high concentration region, but increases rapidly at low concentration or high dilution. This is because the extent of dissociation increases with dilution rapidly.
(v) ∧0 values for strong electrolytes can be obtained by extrapolating the linear graph to zero concentration (or infinite dilution). However ∧0 for the weak electrolytes cannot be obtained by this method, since the graph increases exponentially at very high dilution and does not intersect ∧m axis at zero concentration.

Question 18.
Why has the molar conductance of an electrolyte the maximum value at infinite dilution ?
Answer:

  • As the dilution of an electrolytic solution increases or concentration decreases, the dissociation of an electrolyte increases.
  • At infinite dilution, the dissociation of an electrolyte is complete (100% dissociation). Hence all the ions from one mole of an electrolyte are available to carry electricity.

Therefore the molar conductance at infinite dilute (∧0) for a given electrolyte has the highest or limiting value. It is always constant for the given electrolyte at constant temperature.

Question 19.
State Kohlrausch’s law.
OR
State and explain Kohlrausch’s law of independent migration of ions.
Answer:
(A) Statement of Kohlrausch’s law : This states that at infinite dilution of the solution, each ion of an electrolyte migrates independently of its co-ions and contributes independently to the total molar conductivity of the electrolyte, irrespective of the nature of other ions present in the solution.

(B) Explanation : Both the ions, cation and anion of the electrolyte make a definite contribution to the molar conductivity of the electrolyte at infinite dilution or zero concentration (∧0).
If \(\lambda_{+}^{0}\) and \(\lambda_{-}^{0}\) are the molar ionic conductivities of cation and anion respectively at infinite dilution, then
0 = \(\lambda_{+}^{0}\) + \(\lambda_{-}^{0}\)
This is known as Kohlrausch’s law of independent migration of ions.
For an electrolyte, Bx Ay giving x number of cations and y number of anions,
0 = x\(\lambda_{+}^{0}\) + y\(\lambda_{-}^{0}\)

(C) Applications of Kohlrausch’s law :
(1) With this law, the molar conductivity of a strong electrolyte at zero concentration can be determined. For example,
\(\wedge_{0(\mathrm{KCl})}=\lambda_{\mathrm{K}^{+}}^{0}-\lambda_{\mathrm{Cl}^{-}}^{0}\)
(2) ∧0 values of weak electrolyte with those of strong electrolytes can be obtained. For example,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 5

Question 20.
State Kohlrausch’s law and write mathematical expression of molar conductivity of the given solution at infinite dilution.
Answer:
Statement of Kohlrausch’s law : This states that at infinite dilution of the solution, each ion of an electrolyte migrates independently of its co-ions and contributes independently to the total molar conductivity of the electrolyte, irrespective of the nature of other ions present in the solution.

This law of independent migration of ions is represented as
0 = \(\lambda_{+}^{0}\) + \(\lambda_{-}^{0}\).
where ∧0 is the molar conductivity of the electrolyte at infinite dilution or zero concentration while \(\lambda_{+}^{0}\) and \(\lambda_{-}^{0}\) are the molar ionic conductivities of cation and anion respectively at infinite dilution.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

Question 21.
Explain the determination of molar conductivity of a weak electrolyte at infinite dilution or zero concentration using Kohlrausch’s law.
Answer:
Molar conductivity of a weak electrolyte at infinite dilution or zero concentration cannot be measured experimentally.
Consider the molar conductivity (∧0) of a weak acid, CH3COOH at zero concentration. By Kohlrausch s law, ∧0CH3COOH = λ0CH3COOH + λ0 H+ where λ0 CH3COO and λ0 H+ are the molar ionic conductivities of CH3COO and H+ ions respectively.

If ∧0CH3COONa, ∧0HCl and ∧0NaCl are the molar conductivities of CH3COONa, HCl and NaCl respectively at zero concentration, then by
Kohlrausch’s law,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 6
Hence, from ∧0 values of strong electrolytes, ∧0 of a weak electrolyte CH3COOH, at infinite dilution can be calculated.

Question 22.
How is the degree of dissociation related to the molar conductance of the electrolytic solution ?
Answer:
(i) At zero concentration or at infinite dilution, the molar conductivity has a maximum value denoted by ∧0.
(ii) This is due to complete dissociation of the weak electrolyte making all the ions available from one mole of the electrolyte to carry electricity at zero concentration.
(iii) If α is the degree of dissociation, then
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 7
This suggests that at zero concentration or infinite dilution, the electrolyte is completely (100%) dissociated.

Question 23.
Write the relation between molar conductivity and molar ionic conductivities for the following electrolytes :
(a) KBr, (b) Na2SO4, (c) AlCl3.
Answer:
(a) If ∧0 is molar conductivity of an electrolyte at infinite dilution and \(\lambda_{+}^{0}\) and \(\lambda_{-}^{0}\) are molar ionic conductivities then,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 8

Question 24.
How is molar conductivity of an electrolytic solution measured ?
Answer:
The resistance of an electrolytic solution is measured by using a conductivity cell and Wheatstone bridge.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 9
Fig. 5.6 : Measurement of conductance

The measurement of molar conductivity of a solution involves two steps as follows :
Step I : Determination of cell constant of the conductivity cell :
KCl solution (0.01 M) whose conductivity is accurately known (κ = 0.00141 Ω-1 cm-1) is taken in a beaker and the conductivity cell is dipped. The two electrodes of the cell are connected to one arm while the variable known resistance (R) is placed in another arm of Wheatstone bridge.

A current detector D’ which is a head phone or a magic eye is used. J is the sliding jockey (contact) that slides on the arm AB which is a wire of uniform cross section. A source of A.C. power (alternating power) is used to avoid electrolysis of the solution.

By sliding the jockey on wire AB, a balance point (null point) is obtained at C. Let AC and BC be the lengths of wire.
If Rsolution is the resistance of KCl solution and Rx is the known resistance then by Wheatstone’s bridge principle,
\(\frac{R_{\text {solution }}}{\mathrm{BC}}=\frac{R_{x}}{\mathrm{AC}}\)
∴ Rsolution = \(\mathrm{BC} \times \frac{R_{x}}{\mathrm{AC}}\)
Then the cell constant ‘b’ of the conductivity cell is obtained by, b = κKCl × Rsolution.

Step II : Determination of conductivity of the given solution :
KCl solution is replaced by the given electrolytic solution and its resistance (Rs) is measured by Wheatstone bridge method by similar manner by obtaining a null point at D.
The conductivity (κ) of the given solution is, cell constant b
κ = \(\frac{\text { cell constant }}{R_{\mathrm{s}}}=\frac{b}{R_{\mathrm{s}}}\)

Step III: Calculation of molar conductivity :
The molar conductivity (∧m) is given by,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 10
Since the concentration of the solution is known, ∧m can be calculated.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

Solved Examples 5.3

Question 25.
Solve the following :

(1) The resistance of a solution is 2.5 × 103 ohm. Find the conductance of the solution.
Solution :
Given : Resistance of solution = R = 2.5 × 103
Conductance of solution = G = ?
G = \(\frac{1}{R}\)
= \(\frac{1}{2.5 \times 10^{3}}\) ohm-1 (Ω-1 or S)
= 4 × 10-3-1 (or S)
Ans. Conductance = G = 4 × 10-3-1

(2) A conductivity cell has two electrodes 20 mm apart and of cross section area 1.8 cm2. Find the cell constant.
Solution :
Given: Distance between two electrodes = l
= 20 mm
= 2 cm
Cross section area = a = 1.8 cm
Cell constant = b = ?
b = \(\frac{l}{a}=\frac{2}{1.8}\) = 1.111 cm-1
Ans. Cell constant = 1.111 cm-1

(3) The conductivity of 0.02 M AgNO3 at 25 °C is 2.428 × 10-3-1 cm-1. What is its molar conductivity ?
Solution :
Given : Concentration of solution = C = 0.02 M AgNO3
Temperature = T = 273 + 25 = 298 K
Conductivity = κ = 2.428 × 10-3-1 cm-1 (or S cm-1)
Molar conductivity = ∧m = ?
m = \(\frac{\kappa \times 1000}{C}\)
= \(\frac{2.428 \times 10^{-3} \times 1000}{0.02}\)
= 121.4 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1 (or 121.4 S cm2 mol-1)
Ans. Molar conductivity = ∧m
= 121.4 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1

(4) 0.05 M NaOH solution offered a resistance of 31.6 in a conductivity cell at 298 K. If the cell constant of the cell is 0.367 cm-1, calculate the molar conductivity of NaOH solution.
Solution :
Given : Concentration = C = 0.05 M NaOH
Resistance = R = 31.6 Ω
Cell constant = b = 0.367 cm-1
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 11
Ans. Molar conductivity = ∧m = 232.2 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

(5) A conductivity cell filled with 0.1 M KCl gives at 25 °C a resistance of 85.5 ohms. The conductivity of 0.1 M KCl at 25° is 0.01286 ohm-1 cm-1. The same cell filled with 0.005 M HCl gives a resistance of 529 ohms. What is the molar conductivity of HCl solution at 25 °C ?
Solution :
Given : Resistance of KCl solution = RKCl = 85.5 Ω
Conductivity of KCl solution = κKCl
= 0.01286 ohm-1 cm-1
Concentration = C = 0.005 M HCl
Resistance of HCl solution = Rsoln = 529 ohms
Molar conductivity of HCl = ∧m(HCl) = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 12
Ans. Molar conductivity of HCl solution = ∧m(HCl)
= 416 ohm-1 cm2 mol-1

(6) The molar conductivity of 0.05 M BaCl2 solution at 25 °C is 223 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1. What is its conductivity?
Solution :
Given : Molar conductivity = ∧m
= 223 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1
Concentration = C = 0.05 M BaCl2
Conductivity = κ = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 13
Ans. Conductivity = κ = 0.01115 Ω-1 cm-1

(7) Conductivity of a solution is 6.23 × 10-5-1 cm-1 and its resistance is 13710 Ω. If the electrodes are 0.7 cm apart, calculate the cross-sectional area of electrode.
Solution :
Given : κ = 6.23 × 10-5-1 cm-1
R = 13710 Ω
l = 0.7 cm
a = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 14
Ans. Cross sectional area of electrode = 0.8195 cm2

(8) A conductivity cell filled with 0.01 M KCl gives at 25 °C the resistance of 604 ohms. The conductivity of KCl at 25 °C is 0.00141 Ω-1 cm-1. The same cell filled with 0.001 M AgNO3 gives a resistance of 6529 ohms. Calculate the molar conductivity of 0.001 M AgNO3 solution at 25 °C.
Solution :
Given : Resistance of KCl solution = RKCl
= 604 ohm (Ω)
Conductivity of KCl solution = κKCl
= 0.00141 Ω-1 cm-1
Concentration = C = 0.001 M AgNO3
Resistance of solution = Rsol = 6529 ohm (Ω)
Molar conductivity = ∧m = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 15
cell constant b
= 130.4 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1
Ans. Molar conductivity of AgNO3 solution = ∧m
= 130.4 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1

(9) Resistance and conductivity of a cell containing 0.001 M KCl solution at 298 K are 1500 Ω and 1.46 × 10-4 S.cm-1 respectively. What is cell constant.
Solution :
Given : Resistance of KCl solution = 1500 Ω, conductivity of KCl solution = κ = 1.46 × 10-4 S.cm-1, Cell constant = b = ?
Cell constant = Conductivity (k) × Resistance
= 1.46 × 10-4 × 1500
= 0.219 cm-1
Ans. Cell constant = 0.219 cm-1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

(10) A conductivity cell filled with 0.02 M H2SO4 gives at 25 °C resistance of 122 ohms. If the molar conductivity of 0.02 H2SO4 is 618 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1, what is the cell constant?
Solution :
Given : Concentration = C = 0.02 M H2SO4
Resistance of H2SO4 solution = Rsoln = 122 Ω
Molar conductivity = ∧m = 618 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1
Cell constant = b = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 16
Ans. Cell constant = b = 1.51 cm-1

(11) A conductivity cell filled with 0.02 M AgNO3 gives at 25 °C resistance of 947 ohms. If the cell constant is 2.3 cm-1, what is the molar conductivity of 0.02 M AgNO3 at 25 °C?
Solution :
Given : Concentration = C = 0.02 M AgNO3
Resistance of solution = Rsoln = 947 Ω
Cell constant = b = 2.3 cm-1
Molar conductivity = ∧m = ?
Conductivity of soln = κ
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 17
Ans. Molar conductivity = ∧m
= 121.5 Ω-1 m2 mol-1

(12) Resistance of conductivity cell filled with 0.1 M KCl solution is 100 ohms. If the resistance of the same cell when filled with 0.02 M KCl solution is 520 ohms, calculate the conductivity and molar conductivity of 0.02 M KCl solution. [Given : Conductivity of 0.1 M KCl solution is 1.29 Sm-1.]
Solution:
Given : Resistance of 0.1 M KCl solution = R1 = 100 Ω
Resistance of 0.02 M KCl solution = R2 = 520 Ω
Conductivity of 0.02 M KCl solution = κ2 = ?
Molar conductivity of 0.02 M KCl solution = ∧m = ?
Conductivity of 0.1 M KCl solution = κ1
= 1.29 S m-1
Cell constant = b = κ1 × R1 = 1.29 × 100
= 129 m-1
= 1.29 cm-1
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 18

(13) The molar conductivities at zero concentration (or at infinite dilution) of CH3COONa, HCl and NaCl in Ω-1 cm2 mol-1 are 90.8,426.2 and 126.4 respectively. Calculate the molar conductivity of CH3COOH at infinite dilution.
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 19
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 20

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

(14) The molar conductivities at zero concentrations of NH4Cl, NaOH and NaCl are respectively 149.7Ω-1 cm2 mol-1, 248.1 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1 and 126.5 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1. What is the molar conductivity of NH4OH at zero concentration ?
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 21

(15) What is the molar conductivity of AgI at zero concentration if the ∧0 values of NaI, AgNO3 and NaNO3 are respectively 126.9 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1, 133.4 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1 and 121.5 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1 ?
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 22
Adding equations (i) and (ii) and subtracting equation (iii) we get equation I.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 23

(16) Molar conductivity of KCl at infinite dilution is 150.3 S cm2 mol-1. If the molar conductivity of K+ is 73.4, calculate that of Cl.
Solution :
Given : Molar conductivity at infinite dilution
= ∧(KCl) = 150.3 S cm2 mol-1
Molar conductivity of K+
= \(\lambda_{\mathrm{K}^{+}}^{0}\) = 73.4 S cm2 mol-1
Molar conductivity of Cl = \(\lambda_{\mathrm{Cl}^{-}}^{0}\) = ?
By Kohlrausch’s law,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 24

(17) Molar conductivities at infinite dilution of Mg2+ and Br are 105.8 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1 and 78.2 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1 respectively. Calculate molar conductivity at zero concentration of MgBr2.
Solution :
Given : \(\lambda_{\mathrm{Mg}^{2+}}^{0}\) = 105.8 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1
\(\lambda_{\mathrm{Br}^{-}}^{0}\) = 78.2 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1
\(\wedge_{0\left(\mathrm{MgBr}_{2}\right)}\) = ?
By Kohlrausch’s law,
\(\wedge_{0\left(\mathrm{MgBr}_{2}\right)}\) = \(\lambda_{\mathrm{Mg}^{2+}}^{0}\) + 2\(\lambda_{\mathrm{Br}^{-}}^{0}\)
= 105.8 + 2 × 78.2 = 105.8 + 156.4
= 262.2 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1
Ans. Molar conductivity of MgBr2 at zero concentration = \(\wedge_{0\left(\mathrm{MgBr}_{2}\right)}\) = 262.2 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

(18) The molar conductivity of 0.1 M CH3COOH at 25 °C is 15.9 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1. If the molar conductivities of CH3COO and H+ ions in Ω-1 cm2 mol-1 at zero concentration are 40.8 and 349.6 respectively, calculate degree of dissociation of 0.1 M CH3COOH.
Solution :
Given : Concentration = C = 0.1 M CH3COOH
Molar conductivity = ∧m = 15.9 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1
\(\lambda_{\mathrm{CH}_{3} \mathrm{COO}^{-}}^{0}\) = 40.8 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1;
\(\lambda_{\mathrm{H}^{+}}^{0}\) = 349.6 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1
Degree of dissociation = α = ?
By Kohlrausch’s law,
\(\wedge_{0\left(\mathrm{CH}_{3} \mathrm{COOH}\right)}=\lambda_{\mathrm{CH}_{3} \mathrm{COO}^{-}}^{0}+\lambda_{\mathrm{H}^{+}}^{0}\)
= 40.8 + 349.6
= 390.4 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1
α = ∧m/∧0
= \(\frac{15.9}{390.4}\) = 0.0407
Ans. The degree of dissociation of CH3COOH = 0.0407

(19) The dissociation constant of a weak monoacidic base is 1.2 × 10-5 at 25 °C. The molar conductivity of the base at zero concentration is 354.8 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1 at 25°C. Calculate the percentage dissociation and molar conductivity of the weak base at 0.1 M concentration.
Solution :
Given : Dissociation constant of the base = Kb = 1.2 × 10-5
Concentration = C = 0.1 M
0 = 354.8 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1
Percentage dissociation = ?
m = ?
Ka = \(\frac{\mathrm{C} \alpha^{2}}{1-\alpha}\); For a week electrolyte, α is small,
∴ Ka = cα2;
∴ α = \(\sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{K}_{\mathrm{a}}}{\mathrm{C}}}=\left(\frac{1.2 \times 10^{-5}}{0.1}\right)^{\frac{1}{2}}\) = 1.0954 × 10-2
∴ Percentage dissociation = α × 100
= 1.0954 × 10-2 × 100 = 1.0954%
Now, α = \(\frac{\wedge_{\mathrm{m}}}{\wedge_{0}}\)
∴ ∧m = α × ∧0 = 1.954 × 10-2 × 354.8
= 6.932 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1
Ans. Percentage dissociation = 1.0954
Molar conductivity = ∧m
= 6.932 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1

Question 26.
What is an electrochemical cell? What does it consist of?
Answer:
Electrochemical cell : It consists of two electronic conductors such as metal plates dipping into an electrolytic or ionic conductor which is an aqueous electrolytic solution or a pure liquid of a molten electrolyte.

Question 27.
What are electrochemical reactions ?
Answer:

  1. Electrochemical reactions : The chemical reactions occurring in electrochemical cells which involve transfer of electrons from one species to other are called electrochemical reactions. They are redox reactions.
  2. These reactions are made of two half reactions namely oxidation at one electrode (anode) and reduction at another electrode (cathode) of the electrochemical cell.
  3. The net reaction is the sum of the above two half reactions.

Question 28.
Define electrode.
Answer:
Electrode : The arrangement consisting of a metal rod dipping in an aqueous solution or molten electrolyte containing ions and conduct electric current due to oxidation or reduction half reactions occurring on its surface is called an electrode.

The electrodes which take part in the reactions are called active electrodes while those which do not take part in the reactions are called inert electrodes.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

Question 29.
Define : (a) Anode (b) Cathode.
Answer:
(a) Anode : An electrode of an electrochemical cell, at which oxidation half reaction occurs due to the loss of electrons from some species is called an anode.
(b) Cathode : An electrode of an electrochemical cell at which reduction half reaction occurs due to gain of electrons by some species is called a cathode.

Question 30.
What are the types of electrochemical cells ?
Answer:
There are two types of electrochemical cells as follows :

  1. Electrolytic cells
  2. Voltaic or galvanic cells.

Question 31.
Define : (1) Electrolytic cell (2) Voltaic or galvanic cell.
Answer:
(1) Electrolytic cell : An electrochemical cell in which a non-spontaneous chemical reaction is forced to occur by passing direct electric current into the solution from the external source and where electrical energy is converted into chemical energy is called an electrolytic cell. E.g. voltameter, electrolytic cell for deposition of a metal.

(2) Voltaic or galvanic cell : An electrochemical cell in which a spontaneous chemical reaction occurs producing electricity and where a chemical energy is converted into an electrical energy is called voltaic cell or galvanic cell. E.g. Daniell cell, dry cell, lead storage battery, fuel cells, etc.

Question 32.
Define electrolysis.
Answer:
Electrolysis : The process of a non-spontaneous chemical decomposition of an electrolyte by the passage of an electric current through its aqueous solution or fused mass and in which electrical energy is converted into chemical energy is called electrolysis. E.g. Electrolysis of fused NaCl.

Question 33.
Describe electrolysis of aqueous NaCl.
Answer:
(1) Construction of an electrolytic cell : It consists of a vessel containing aqueous solution of NaCl. Two inert electrodes (graphite electrodes) are dipped in it and connected to an external source of electricity like battery. The electrode connected to the negative terminal is a cathode and that connected to a positive terminal is an anode.

(2) Working of the cell :
(A) NaCl(aq) and H2O(l) dissociate as follows :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 25
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 26

(3) Reactions in electrolytic cell :
(i) Reduction half reaction at cathode : There are Na+ and H+ ions but since H+ are more reducible than Na+, they undergo reduction liberating hydrogen and Na+ are left in the solution.
2H2O(l) + 2e → H2(g) + \(2 \mathrm{OH}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}\) (reduction)
E0 = -0.83 V
(ii) Oxidation half reaction at anode : At anode there are Cl and OH. But Cl ions are preferably oxidised due to less decomposition potential.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 27
Net cell reaction : Since two electrons are gained at cathode and two electrons are released at anode for each redox step, the electrical neutrality is maintained. Hence we can write,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 28
Since Na+ and OH are left in the solution, they form NaOH(aq).

(4) Results of electrolysis :

  • H2 gas is liberated at cathode.
  • Cl2 gas is liberated at anode.
  • NaOH is formed in the solution and it reacts basic.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

Question 34.
Define and explain the following electrical units : (1) Coulomb (2) Ampere (3) Volt (4) Joule (5) Ohm.
Answer:
(1) Coulomb : It is a quantity of electricity obtained when one ampere current flows for one second.
It is the unit of quantity of electricity.
Q = I × t Coulomb (C)
where Q is the charge or quantity of electricity in coulombs.

(2) Ampere : It is a strength of an electric current obtained when one coulomb of electricity is passed through a circuit for one second.
∴ I = Q/t

(3) Volt : It is the potential difference between two points of an electric conductor required to send a current of one amphere through a resistance of one ohm.
∴ V = I × R
where V is the potential difference in volts and R is the resistance of a conductor in ohms.

(4) Joule : It is the electrical work or energy produced when one coulomb of electricity is passed through a
potential difference of one volt.
∴ Electrical work = Q × V J
where Q is electrical charge in coulombs and V is the potential difference.

(5) Ohm : It is the resistance of an electrical conductor across which when potential difference of 1 volt is applied, a current of one ampere is obtained. It has units, Ω or per siemens.

Question 35.
Explain quantitative aspects of electrolysis.
Answer:
(1) Calculation of quantity of electricity : If an electric current of strength I A is passed through the cell for t seconds, then quantity of electricity (Q) obtained is given by,
Q = I × t C (Coulomb)

(2) Calculation of moles of electrons passed : The charge carried by one mole of electrons is referred to as one faraday (F). If total charge passed is Q C, then moles of electrons passed = \(\frac{Q(\mathrm{C})}{F\left(\mathrm{C} / \mathrm{mol} \mathrm{e}^{-}\right)}\)

(3) Calculation of moles of product formed : Consider one mole of ions, \(\mathbf{M}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{n^{+}}\) which will require n moles of electrons for reduction.
\(\mathbf{M}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{n^{+}}\) + ne → M (Reduction half reaction)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 29

(4) Calculation of mass of product : Mass, W of product formed is given by,
W = moles of product × molar mass of product (M)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 30
When two electrolytic cells containing different electrolytes are connected in series so that same quantity of electricity is passed through them, then the masses W1 and W2 of products produced are given by,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 31

Question 36.
Define Faraday.
Answer:
Faraday : It is defined as the quantity of the electric charge carried by one mole of electrons.
It has value, 1F = 96500 C/mol

Question 37.
Obtain a charge on one electron from Faraday’s value.
Answer:

  • One Faraday is the electric charge on one mole of electrons (6.022 × 1023 electrons).
  • 1 Faraday = 96500 (per mol of electrons).
  • Hence the charge on one electron is, change on one electron = \(\frac{96500}{6.022 \times 10^{23}}\)
    = 1.602 × 10-9 C.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

Solved Examples 5.4-5.5

Question 38.
Solve the following :

(1) An electric current of 100 mA is passed through an electrolyte for 2 hours, 20 minutes and 20 seconds. Find the quantity of electricity passed.
Solution :
Given : Electric current = I = 100 mA
= 100 × 10-3 A
= 0.1 A
Time = t = 2 hrs + 20 min + 20 s
= 2 × 60 × 60 + 20 × 60 + 20
= 8420 s
The quantity of electricity = Q = ?
Q = I × t
= 0.1 × 8420
= 842 C
Ans. Quantity of electricity passed, Q = 842 C

(2) An electric current of 500 mA is passed for 1 hour and 30 minutes. Calculate the
(i) Quantity of electricity (or charge)
(ii) Number of Faradays of electricity
(iii) Number of electrons passed (Charge on 1 electron = 1.602 × 10-19 C)
Solution :
Given : Electric current = I = 500 mA
= 500 × 10-3 A = 0.5 A
Time = t = 1 hr + 30 min
= 1 × 60 × 60 + 30 × 60
= 5400 s
(i) The quantity of electricity = Q = ?
(ii) Number of Faradays of electricity = ?
(iii) Number of electrons passed = ?

(i) Q = I × t = 0.5(A) × 5400(s) = 2700 C
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 32
(iii) 1F is the electric charge on 6.022 × 1023 electrons.
∴ 0.028F is the charge on,
0.028 × 6.022 × 1023 = 1.686 × 1022 electrons
∴ Number of electrons passed = 1.686 × 1022
Ans. (i) The quantity of electricity = Q = 2700 C
(ii) Number of Faradays of electricity = 0.028 F
(iii) Number of electrons passed = 1.686 × 1022

(3) How much electricity in terms of Faraday is required to produce :
(a) 20 g of Ca from molten CaCl2
(b) 40 g of Al from molten Al2O3
(Given : Molar mass of Calcium and Aluminium are 40 g mol-1 and 27 g mol-1 respectively.)
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 33

(4) For the following conversions,
calculate
(i) number of moles of electrons
(ii) number of Faradays
(iii) Amount of electricity :
(A) 0.1 mol conversion of Zn2+ to Zn.
(B) 0.08 mol conversion of \(\mathbf{M n O}_{4}^{2-}\) to Mn2+
(C) 1.1 mol conversion of \(\mathrm{Cr}_{2} \mathbf{O}_{7}^{2-}\) to Cr3+.
Solution :
(i) Number of moles of electrons = ?
(ii) Number of Faradays = ?
(iii) Amount of electricity = Q = ?
(A) Number of moles of Zn2+ =0.1 mol
Zn2+ + 2e → Zn
(i) ∵ 1 mol Zn2+ requires 2 mol electrons
0.1 mol Zn2+ will require
∴ 0.1 × 2 = 0.2 mol electrons
(ii) ∵ 1 mol electrons = 1 Faraday
∴ 0.2 mol electrons = 0.2 × 1
= 0.2 Faradays
(iii) ∵ 1 Faraday = 96500 C
∴ 0.2 Faraday = 96500 × 0.2 = 48250 C
Amount of electricity required =48250C

(B) Number of moles of \(\mathrm{MnO}_{4}^{-}\) = 0.08 mol
\(\mathrm{MnO}_{4}^{-}+5 \mathrm{e}^{-} \longrightarrow \mathrm{Mn}^{2+}\)
(i) ∵ 1 mol \(\mathrm{MnO}_{4}^{-}\) requires 5 mol electrons
∴ 0.08 mol \(\mathrm{MnO}_{4}^{-}\) will require
5 × 0.08 = 0.4 mol electrons
(ii) Number of Faradays = 0.4 × 1 = 0.4
(iii) Amount of electricity = Q = 0.4 × 96500
= 38600 C

(C) Number of moles of \(\mathrm{Cr}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{7}^{2-}\) = 1.1 mol
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 34
(i) ∵ 1 mol \(\mathrm{Cr}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{7}^{2-}\) requires 6 mol electrons
∴ 1.1 mol \(\mathrm{Cr}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{7}^{2-}\) will require
6 × 1.1 = 6.6 mol electrons
(ii) Number of Faradays = 1 × 6.6 = 6.6
(iii) Amount of electricity = 6.6 × 96500
= 6.369 × 105 C
Ans.
(A) (i) Number of moles of electrons = 0.2 mol
(ii) Number of Faradays = 0.2
(iii) Amount of electricity = 48250 C

(B) (i) Number of moles of electrons = 0.4 mol
(ii) Number of Faradays = 0.4
(iii) Amount of electricity = 38600 C

(C) (i) Number of moles of electrons = 6.6 mol
(ii) Number of Faradays = 6.6
(iii) Amount of electricity = 6.369 × 105 C

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

(5) What mass of aluminium is produced at the cathode during the passage of 4 ampere current through Al2(SO4)3 solution for 100 minutes? Molar mass of aluminium is 27 g mol-1.
Solution :
Given : I = 4 A; t = 100 × 60 = 600 s
F = 96500 C mol-1, M = 27 g mol-1, WAl = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 35

(6) How long will it take to produce 2.415 g Ag metal from its salt solution by passing a current of 3 amperes? How many moles of electrons are required ? Molar mass of Ag is 107.9 gmol-1.
Solution :
Given : Electric current = I = 3A
Mass of Ag produced = 2.415 g
Molar mass of Ag = Atomic mass of Ag
= 107.9 gmol-1
Time = t = ? Number of moles of electrons = ?
Reduction half reaction at cathode :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 36
From the reaction,
∵ 1 mole of Ag requires 1 mole of electrons
∴ 0.02238 mole of Ag will require,
0.02238 mol electrons
∵ 1 mole of electrons carries a charge of 96500 C,
∴ 0.02238 mole of electrons will carry a charge, 0.02238 × 96500 = 2160 C
∴ Quantity of electricity passed = Q = 2160 C
Let I be the current strength and t be time of electrolysis. Then,
∵ Q = I × t
∴ t = \(\frac{Q}{I}=\frac{2160}{3}\) = 720 s = \(\frac{720}{60}\) min = 12 min.
Ans. Time of electrolysis = 12 min
Moles of electrons = 0.02238 mol

(7) What current strength in ampere will be required to produce 2.369 × 10-3 kg of Cu from CuSO4 solution in one hour? How many moles of electrons are required? Molar mass of copper is 63.5 gmol-1.
Solution :
Given : Mass of Cu produced = 2.369 × 10-3 kg
= 2.369 g
Time = t = 1 hr = 1 × 60 × 60 = 3600 s
Molar mass of Cu = 63.5 g mol-1
Strength of current = I = ?
1 Faraday = 96500 C = 1 mol electrons
1 mol Cu = Molar mass of Cu = 63.5 g
Reduction half reaction :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 37
Moles of Cu deposited = \(\frac{2.369}{63.5}\) = 0.0373 mol Cu
From the reaction,
∵ 1 mol of Cu requires 2 mol electrons
∴ 0.0373 mol Cu will require 2 × 0.0373
= 0.0746 mol electrons
Now,
∵ 1 mol electrons = 96500 C
∴ 0.0746 mol electrons = 96500 × 0.0746 = 7199 C
∴ Quantity of electricity required = Q = 7199 C
∴ Q = I × t
∴ Current, I = \(\frac{Q}{t}=\frac{7199}{3600}\) = 2A
Ans. Current strength = I = 2A
Moles of electrons required = 0.0746 mol

(8) A current of 6 amperes is passed through AlCl3 solution for 15 minutes using Pt electrodes, when 0.504 g Al is produced. What is the molar mass of Al ?
Solution :
Given : Electric current = I = 6 A
Time = t = 15 min = 15 × 60 s = 900 s
Mass of Al produced = 0.504 g
Molar mass of Al = ?
Reduction half reaction,
\(\mathrm{Al}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{3+}+3 \mathrm{e}^{-} \longrightarrow \mathrm{Al}_{(\mathrm{aq})}\)
Quantity of electricity passed = Q = I × t
= 6 × 900 = 5400 C
Number of moles of electrons = \(\frac{Q}{F}=\frac{5400}{96500}\)
= 0.05596 mol
From half reaction,
∵ 3 moles of electrons deposit 1 mole Al
∴ 0.05596 moles of electrons will deposit,
\(\frac{0.05596}{3}\) = 0.01865 mol Al
Now,
∵ 0.01865 mole Al weighs 0.504 g
∴ 1 mole Al will weigh, \(\frac{0.504}{0.01865}\) = 27 g
Hence molar mass of Al is 27 g mol-1
Ans. Molar mass of Al = 27 g mo-1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

(9) How many moles of electrons are required for the reduction of (i) 3 moles of Zn2+ to Zn,
(ii) 1 mol of Cr3+ to Cr ?
How many Faradays of electricity will be required in each case ?
Solution :
(i) Given : For reduction of 3 mol Zn2+ to Zn;
Number of moles of electrons required = ?
Reduction half reaction,
Zn2+ + 2e → Zn
∵ 1 mole of Zn2+ requires 2 moles of electrons
∴ 3 moles of Zn2+ will require,
∵ 3 × 2 = 6 moles of electrons
∴ 1 mole of electrons = 1 F 6 moles of electrons = 6 F

(ii) Given : Reduction of 1 mol of Cr3+ to Cr :
Reduction half reaction,
Cr3+ + 3e → Cr
Hence 1 mole of Cr3+ will require 3 moles of electrons
∵ 1 mole of electrons = 1
∴ 3 moles of electrons = 3 F
Ans. (i) 6 mol electrons and 6 Faradays.
(ii) 3 mol electrons and 3 Faradays.

(10) In an electrolysis of AgNO3 solution, 0.7 g of Ag is deposited after a certain period of time. Calculate the quantity of electricity required in coulomb. (Molar mass of Ag is 107.9 g mol-1.)
Solution :
Given : Mass of Ag deposited = 0.7 g
Molar mass of Ag = 107.9 g mol-1
Quantity of electricity = Q = ?
Reduction half reaction is,
Ag+ + e → Ag
1 mole of Ag = 107.9 g Ag requires 1 mole of electrons
∴ 0.7 g Ag will require, \(\frac{0.7}{107.9}\) = 6.49 × 10-3 mole of electrons
∵ 1 mole of electrons carry 96500 C charge
∴ 6.49 × 10-3 mole of electrons will carry, 96500 × 6.49 × 10-3 = 626 C
Ans. Quantity of electricity required = 626 C,

(11) Calculate the amounts of Na and Chlorine gas produced during the electrolysis of fused NaCl by the passage of 1 ampere current for 25 minutes. Molar masses of Na and Chlorine gas are 23 g mol-1 and 71 g mol-1 respectively.
Solution :
Given : Electric current = I = 1 ampere
Time = t = 25 minutes = 25 × 60 s = 1500 s
Molar mass of Na = 23 g mol-1
Molar mass of Cl2 = 71 g mol-1
Mass of Na produced = ?, Mass of Cl2 produced = ?
Reactions during electrolysis :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 38
Quantity of electricity = Q = I × t = 1 × 1500
= 1500 C
Number of moles of electrons passed
= \(\frac{Q}{F}=\frac{1500}{96500}\) = 0.01554
From half reaction (i),
∵ 2 moles of electrons deposit 2 moles of Na
∴ 0.01554 moles of electrons will deposit, \(\frac{0.01554 \times 2}{2}\) = 0.01554 mol Na
Mass of Na = Moles of Na × Molar mass of Na
= 0.01554 × 23 = 0.3572 g Na
From half reaction (ii)
∵ 2 moles of electrons produce 1 mole Cl2
∴ 0.01554 moles of electrons will produce,
\(\frac{0.01554 \times 1}{2}\) = 7.77 × 10-3 × 71
∴ Mass of Cl2 gas = Moles of Cl2 × Molar mass
= 7.77 × 10-3 × 71
= 0.5518 g
Ans. Mass of Na deposited = 0.3572 g
Mass of Cl2 liberated = 0.5518 g

(12) Calculate the mass of Mg and the volume of Chlorine gas at NTP produced during the electrolysis of molten MgCl2 by the passage of 2 amperes of current for 1 hour. Molar masses of Mg and Cl2 are 24 g mol-1 and 71 g mol-1 respectively.
Solution :
Given : Electric current = I = 2A
Time = t = 1 hr = 1 × 60 × 60 s = 3600 s
Molar mass of Mg = 23 g mol-1
Molar mass of Cl2 = 71 g mol-1
Mass of Mg produced = ?
Volume of Cl2 at NTP produced = ?
Reactions during electrolysis :
(i) Mg2+ + 2e → Mg (Reduction half reaction)
(ii) 2Cl → Cl2(g) + 2e (Oxidation half reaction)
Quantity of electricity passed = Q = I × t
= 2 × 3600 = 7200 C
∵ 1 Faraday = 1 mol electrons
∴ Number of moles of electrons passed
= \(\frac{Q}{F}=\frac{7200}{96500}\) = 0.07461 mol
From half reaction (i),
∵ 2 moles of electrons deposit 1 mole of Mg
∴ 0.07461 moles of electrons will deposit, \(\frac{0.07461 \times 1}{2}\) = 0.037305 mol Mg
Mass of Mg = Moles of Mg × Molar mass of Mg
= 0.037305 × 24 = 0.8953 g Mg
From half reaction (ii),
∵ 2 moles of electrons produce 1 mol Cl2 gas
∴ 0.07461 moles of electrons will produce,
\(\frac{0.07461}{2}\) = 0.037305 mol Cl2
∵ 1 mole of Cl2 occupies 22.4 dm at NTP
∴ 0.037305 mole of Cl2 will occupy,
22.4 × 0.037305 = 0.8356 dm3
∴ Volume of Cl2 gas produced
= 0.8356 dm3
= 0.8356 × 103 cm3
= 835.6 cm3
Ans. Mass of Mg produced = 0.8953 g
Volume of Cl2(g) at NTP produced = 835.6 cm3

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

(13) How many Faradays would be required to plate out one mole of free metal from the following cations?
(a) Mg2+ (b) Cr3+ (c) Pb2+ (d) Cu+
Solution :
(a) Reduction half reaction :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 39
∵ 1 mol electrons = 1 Faraday
Since to deposite 1 mol Mg, two moles of electrons are required,
∴ To plate one mole Mg, 2 Faradays of electricity will be required.

(b) Reduction half reaction :
\(\mathrm{Cr}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{3+}+3 \mathrm{e}^{-} \longrightarrow \mathrm{Cr}_{(\mathrm{s})}\)
∴ 1 mol Cr will require 3 mol electrons, hence 3 Faradays of electricity are required.

(c) Reduction half reaction :
\(\mathrm{Pb}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}+2 \mathrm{e}^{-} \longrightarrow \mathrm{Pb}_{(\mathrm{s})}\)
∴ 1 mol Pb will require 2 mol electrons, hence 2 Faradays are required.

(d) Reduction half reaction :
\(\mathrm{Cu}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+}+\mathrm{e}^{-} \longrightarrow \mathrm{Cu}_{(\mathrm{s})}\)
∴ 1 mol Cu will require 1 mol electrons hence one Faraday of electricity is required.

(14) In a certain electrolysis experiment, 0.561 g of Zn is deposited in one cell containing ZnSO4 solution. Calculate the mass of Cu deposited in another cell containing CuSO4 solution in series with ZnSO4 cell. Molar masses of Zn and Cu are 65.4 g mol-1 and 63.5 g mol-1 respectively.
Solution :
Given : Mass of Zn deposited = WZn = 0.561 g
Molar mass of Zn = 65.4 g mol-1
Molar mass of Cu = 63.5 g mol-1
Mass of Cu deposited = ?
Number of moles of Zn deposited
= \(\frac{\text { Mass of Zn deposited }}{\text { Molar mass of } \mathrm{Zn}}=\frac{0.561}{65.4}\)
= 8.578 × 10-3 mol Zn
Reactions of electronics:
(i) Zn++ + 2e → Zn (Half reaction in ZnSO4 cell)
(ii) Cu++ + 2e → Cu (Half reaction in CuSO4 cell)
Mole ratio of Zn
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 40
∴ Mass of Cu produced
= moles of Cu × molar mass of Cu
= 8.578 × 10-3 × 63.5
= 0.5447 g Cu
Ans. Mass of Cu deposited = 0.5447 g

(15) Two electrolytic cells, one containing AlCl3 solution and the other containing ZnSO4 solution are connected in series. The same quantity of electricity is passed through the cells. Calculate the amount of Zn deposited in ZnSO4 cell if 1.2 g of Al are deposited in AlCl3 cell. The molar masses of Al and Zn are 27 g mol-1 and 65.4 g mol-1 respectively.
Solution :
Given : Mass of Al deposited = 1.2 g
Molar mass of Al = 27 g mol-1
Molar mass of Zn = 65.4 g mol-1
Mass of zinc deposited = ωZn = ?
Reduction reactions in electrolysis :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 41
Number of moles of Al deposited = \(\frac{1.2}{27}\)
= 0.04444 mol.
From reaction (i),
∵ 1 mol Al requires 3 mol electrons
∴ 0.04444 mol Al requires 3 × 0.04444
= 0.1333 mol electrons
Hence 0.1333 moles of electrons are passed through both the cells in the series.
From reaction (ii),
∵ 2 moles of electrons deposit 1 mol Zn
∴ 0.1333 moles of electrons will deposit, \(\frac{0.1333}{2}\) = 0.06665 mol Zn
Mass of Zn deposited = 0.06665 × 65.4 = 4.36 g
Ans. Mass of Zn deposited = 4.36 g

(16) How much quantity of electricity in coulomb is required to deposit 1.346 × 10-3 kg of Ag in 3.5 minutes from AgNO3 solution ?
(Given : Molar mass of Ag is 108 × 10-3 kg mol-1)
Solution :
Given : Mass of Ag deposited = 1.346 × 10-3 kg
Molar mass of Ag = 108 × 10-3 kg mol-1
Time = t = 3.5 × 60 s
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 42
∵ 108 × 10-3 kg Ag requires 1 Faraday
1.346 × 10-3 kg Ag will require,
\(\frac{1.346 \times 10^{-3}}{108 \times 10^{-3}}\) = 0.01246 F
∵ If F = 96500 C
∴ 0.01246 F = 96500 × 0.01246 = 1202 C
Ans. Amount of electricity required = 1202 C

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

(17) How many electrons will have a total charge of 1 Coulomb ?
Solution :
Given : Charge = 1 Coulomb
Number of electrons = ?
1 Faraday = 96500 C per mol electrons
∵ 96500 C electric charge is present on 1 mol electrons
∴ 1C charge is present on \(\frac{1}{96500}\) mol electrons
∴ Number of electrons = \(\frac{1}{96500}\) × 6.022 × 1023
= 6.24 × 1018 electrons
Ans. 1 Coulomb charge is present on 6.24 × 1018 electrons.

(18) A constant electric current flows for 4 hours through two electrolytic cells connected in series. One contains AgNO3solution and second contains CuCl2 solution. During this time, 4 grams of Ag are deposited in the first cell.
(a) How many grams of Cu are deposited in the second cell?
(b) What is the current flowing in amperes? (Atomic mass : Cu = 63.5 gmol-1; Ag = 107.9 gmol-1)
Solution :
Given : Mass of Ag deposited = 4 g
Molar mass of Cu = 63.5 g mol-1
Molar mass of Ag = 107.9 g mol-1
Time = t = 4 hrs = 4 × 60 × 60 = 14400 s
Mass of Cu deposited = WCu = ?
Current = I = ?
(a) Number of moles of Ag deposited
\(=\frac{\text { Mass of } \mathrm{Ag}}{\text { Molar mass of } \mathrm{Ag}}=\frac{4}{107.9}\)
= 0.03707 mol of Ag
Reactions of electrolysis :
(i) Ag+ + e → Ag (Half reaction in AgNO3 cell)
(ii) Cu2+ + 2e → Cu (Half reaction in CuCl2 cell)
Mole ratio of Ag
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 43
∴ Mass of Cu produced = 0.01854 × 63.5 = 1.177 g

(b) From the reaction,
∵ 1 mol Ag+ requires 1 mol electrons
∴ 0.03707 mol Ag will require 0.03707 mol electrons
∵ 1 mol electrons = 1 Faraday
∴ 0.03707 mol electrons = 0.03707 Faraday
∵ 1 Faraday = 96500 C
∴ 0.03707 Faraday
= 0.03707 × 96500 = 3577 C
∴ Quantity of electricity = Q = 3577 C.
Q = I × t
∴ I = \(\frac{\mathrm{Q}}{t}=\frac{3577}{14400}\) = 0.25 A
Ans. (a) Mass of Cu deposited = 1.177 g
(b) Current passed = 0.25 A

(19) The passage of 0.95 A current for 40 minutes deposited 0.7493 g Cu from CuSO4 solution. Calculate the molar mass of Cu.
Solution :
Given : Electric current = I = 0.95 A
Time = f = 40 min = 40 × 60 = 2400 s
Mass of Cu deposited = 0.7493 g
Molar mass of Cu = ?
Reduction half reaction,
\(\mathrm{Cu}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}+2 \mathrm{e}^{-} \longrightarrow \mathrm{Cu}_{(\mathrm{s})}\)
Quantity of electricity = Q = I × t
= 0.95 × 2400
= 2280 C
Number of moles of electrons = \(\frac{2280}{96500}\)
= 0.02362 mol
∵ 2 mol electrons deposit 1 mol Cu
∴ 0.02362 mol electrons will deposit,
\(\frac{0.02362}{2}\) = 0.01181 mol Cu
Now,
0.01181 mol Cu weighs 0.7493 g
∴ 1 mol of Cu weigh, \(\frac{0.7493 \times 1}{0.01181}\) = 63.44 g
Hence molar mass of Cu 63.44 g mol-1
Ans. Molar mass of Cu = 63.44 g mol-1

(20) A quantity of 0.3 g of Cu was deposited from CuSO4 solution by passing 4A through the solution for 3.8 min. Calculate the value of Faraday constant. (Atomic mass of Cu = 63.5 g mol-1)
Solution :
Given : Mass of Cu deposited = 0.3 g
Electric current = I = 4A
Time = t = 3.8 min = 3.8 × 60 = 228 s
Value of Faraday = ?
Quantity of electricity passed = Q = I × t
= 4 × 228 = 912 C
Reduction half reaction,
\(\mathrm{Cu}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}+2 \mathrm{e}^{-} \longrightarrow \mathrm{Cu}_{(\mathrm{s})}\)
Number of moles of Cu deposited 0.3
= \(\frac{0.3}{63.5}\) = 0.004724 mol
From reduction half reaction,
1 mol Cu ≡ 2 mol electrons
∴ 0.004724 mol Cu = 2 × 0.004724
= 0.009448 mol electrons
Now
∵ 0.009448 mol electrons = 912 C
∴ 1 mol electrons = \(\frac{912}{0.009448}\) = 96528 C
∵ 1 Faraday charge is equal to charge on 1 mol electrons
∴ 1 Faraday = 96528 C
Ans. 1 Faraday = 96528 C

(21) In the electrolysis of water, one of the half reactions is
2H+(aq) + 2e → H2(g)
Calculate the volume of H2 gas collected at 25 °C and 1 atm pressure by passing 2A for 1h through the solution. R = 0.08205 L atm K-1 mol-1.
Solution :
Given : Reduction half reaction :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 44
Temperature = T = 273 + 25 = 298 K
Pressure = P = 1 atm
Electric current = I = 2A
Time = t = 1 hr = 1 × 60 × 60 = 3600 s
R = 0.08205 L atm K-1 mol-1
Volume of H2 = VH2 = ?
Quantity of electricity passed = Q = I × t
= 2 × 3600 = 7200 C
Number of moles of electrons = \(\frac{Q}{F}\)
\(\frac{7200}{96500}\) = 0.0746 mol
From the reaction,
∵ 2 mol electrons produces 1 mol H2 gas
∴ 0.0746 mol electrons will produce \(\frac{0.0746}{2}\)
= 0.0373 mol H2.
pVH2 = nRT
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 45
= 0.912 L
Ans. Volume H2 gas = 0.912 L

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

(22) Calculate the current strength and number of moles of electrons required to produce 2.369 × 10-3 kg of Cu from CuSO4 solution in one hour. (Molar mass of Cu is 63.5 g/mol)
Solution :
Given : Mass of Cu deposited = 2.369 × 10-3 kg;
t = 1 hr = 3600 s
Molar mass of Cu = 63.5 g mol-1
I = ?; Number of moles of electrons = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 46
∵ For 63.5 × 10-3 kg Cu Q = 2 × 96500 C
∴ For 2.369 × 10-3 kg Cu
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 47
Ans. I = 2A; Number of moles of electrons = 0.07461

Question 39.
Define : Galvanic cell or voltaic cell.
Answer:
Galvanic or voltaic cell : An electrochemical cell which is used to produce electrical energy by a spontaneous chemical reaction inside it is called an electrochemical cell. In this chemical energy is converted into electrical energy.
Example : Daniell cell.

Question 40.
Define : Half cell or Electrode.
Answer:
Half cell or Electrode : It is a metal electrode dipped in the electrolytic solution and capable of establishing oxidation reduction equilibrium with one of the ions of electrolyte solution and develop electrode potential. E.g. Zn in ZnSO4 solution.

Question 41.
What are the functions of a salt bridge ?
Answer:
The functions of a salt bridge are :

  1. It maintains the electrical contact between the two electrode solutions of the half cells.
  2. It prevents the mixing of electrode solutions.
  3. It maintains the electrical neutrality in both the solutions of two half cells by a flow of ions.
  4. It eliminates the liquid junction potential.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

Question 42.
What are the conventions used to write galvanic cell or cell diagram (cell formula) ?
Answer:
A galvanic cell or voltaic cell is represented by a short notation or diagram which includes electrodes, aqueous solutions of ions and other species that may or may not involve in the cell reaction.
The following conventions are used to represent the cell or write the cell notation :
(1) The metal electrodes or the inert electrodes like platinum are placed at the ends of the cell formula.
(2) The galvanic cell consists of two half cells or electrodes. The electrode on the extreme left hand side is anode where oxidation takes place and it carries negative (-) charge while extreme right hand electrode is cathode where reduction takes place and it carries positive (+) charge.
(3) The gases or insoluble substances are placed in the interior positions adjacent to the metal electrode.
(4) A single vertical line is written between two phases like solid electrode and aqueous solution containing ions.
(5) A double vertical line is drawn between two solutions of two electrodes which indicates a salt bridge connecting them electrically.
(6) The concentration of solutions or ions or pressures of gases are written in brackets along with the substances in the cell.
(7) Different ions in the same solution are separated by a comma.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 48
(8) Examples of electrochemical cells :
(i) Daniel cell is represented as,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 49

Question 43.
How to write cell reaction for a galvanic cell ?
Answer:
(1) A galvanic cell consists of two half cells or electrodes.
(2) Write oxidation half reaction for left hand electrode which is an anode and reduction half reaction for right hand electrode which is a cathode.
(3) Balance the number of electrons in the oxidation and reduction reactions.
(4) By adding both the reactions, overall cell reaction is obtained.
(5) For example, consider following cell :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 50

Question 44.
Why is anode in a galvanic cell considered to be negative?
Answer:

  1. According to IUPAC conventions, the electrode of a galvanic cell where de-electronation or oxidation takes place releasing electrons is called anode. Zn(s) → \(\mathrm{Zn}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}\) + 2e
  2. The electrons released due to oxidation reaction are accumulated on the metal electrode surface charging it negatively.

Hence anode in the galvanic cell is considered to be negative.

Question 45.
Why is cathode in a galvanic cell considered to be positive electrode?
Answer:
(1) According to IUPAC conventions, the electrode of the galvanic cell where electronation or reduction takes place is called cathode. In this, the electrons from the metal electrode are removed by cations required for their reduction.
\(\mathrm{Cu}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}\) + 2e → Cu(s)

(2) Since the electrons are lost, the metal electrode acquires a positive charge.
Hence cathode in the galvanic cell is considered to be positive.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

Question 46.
Give the cell reactions in the case of the following cells :
(1)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 51
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 52

(2)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 53
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 54

(3) Pt, H2(g) | H+(aq) || Cl(aq) | Cl2(g), Pt
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 55

(4) Ni(s)|Ni2+ (1 M) || Al3+ (1 M) | Al(s)
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 56

Question 47.
Represent the half cells or electrodes for the following reactions :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 57
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 58

Question 48.
Formulate a cell from the following electrode reactions :
(a) Cl2(g) + 2e → 2Cl(aq)
(b) 2I(aq) → I2(s) + 2e
Answer:
(a) Cl2(g) + 2e → 2Cl(aq) (Reduction half reaction)
(b) 2I(aq) → I2(s) + 2e (Oxidation half reaction)
The galvanic cell is,
Pt |I2(s)|I(aq) (1 M) | Cl(aq) (1 M) | Cl2(g, PCl2)|Pt

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

Question 49.
Formulate a cell for each of the following reactions :
(a) \(\mathrm{Sn}_{\text {(aq) }}^{2+}\) + 2AgCl(s) → \(\mathrm{Sn}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{4+}\) + 2Ag(s) + \(2 \mathrm{Cl}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}\)
(b) Mg(s) + Br2(l) → \(\mathrm{Mg}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}+2 \mathrm{Br}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}\)
Answer:
(a) \(\mathrm{Sn}_{\text {(aq) }}^{2+}\) + 2AgCl(s) → \(\mathrm{Sn}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{4+}\) + 2Ag(s) + \(2 \mathrm{Cl}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}\)
The overall reaction takes place into two steps :
(i) \(\mathrm{Sn}_{\text {(aq) }}^{2+}\) → Sn4+ + 2e (Oxidation half reaction)
(ii) 2AgCl(s) + 2e → 2Ag(s) + \(2 \mathrm{Cl}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}\) (Reduction half reaction)
Hence the cell is,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 59

(b) Mg(s) + Br2(l) → \(\mathrm{Mg}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}+2 \mathrm{Br}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}\)
The overall reaction takes place into two steps :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 60

Question 50.
What is electrode potential?
Answer:
(1) Electrode potential : It is defined as the difference of electrical potential established due to electrode half reaction between metal electrode and the solution around it at equilibrium at constant temperature.

(2) Explanation : When a metal is immersed into a solution containing its ions there arises oxidation (or reduction) reaction involving a release of electrons (or gain of electrons). This gives rise to the formation of an electrical double layer, consisting of a charged metal surface and an ionic layer. The potential across this double layer i.e., between metal and the solution is an electrode potential.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 61
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 62

Question 51.
Define :
(1) Oxidation potential,
(2) Reduction potential.
Answer:
(1) Oxidation potential : It is defined as the difference of electrical potential between metal electrode and the solution around it at equilibrium developed due to oxidation reaction at anode and at constant temperature.

(2) Reduction potential : It is defined as the difference of electrical potential between metal electrode and the solution around it at equilibrium developed due to reduction reaction at cathode and at constant temperature.

Question 52.
What is a standard state of a substance ?
Answer:
The standard state of a substance is that state in which the substance has unit activity or concentration at 25 °C. i.e., For solution having concentration 1 molar, gas at 1 atm, pure liquids or solids are said to be in their standard states.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

Question 53.
Define the following terms :
(1) Standard electrode potential
(2) Standard oxidation potential
(3) Standard reduction potential.
Answer:
(1) Standard electrode potential : It is defined as the difference of electrical potential between metal electrode and the solution around it equilibrium when all the substances involved in the electrode reaction are in their standard states of unit activity or concentration at constant temperature.

(2) Standard oxidation potential : It is defined as the difference of electrical potential between metal electrode and the solution around it at equilibrium due to oxidation reaction, when all the substances involved in the oxidation reaction are in their standard states of unit activity or concentration at constant temperature.

(3) Standard reduction potential : It is defined as the difference of electrical potential between metal electrode and the solution around it at equilibrium due to reduction reaction, when all the substances involved in the reduction reaction are in their standard states of unit activity or concentration at constant temperature.

Question 54.
What is the standard potential of an electrode according to IUPAC convention?
Answer:
Standard reduction potential : According to IUPAC convention, the standard potential of an electrode due to reduction reaction at 298 K is taken as the standard reduction potential. In this active mass of the substance has unit value.

Question 55.
What is cell potential or emf of a cell ?
Answer:
Cell potential or emf of a cell : It is defined as the potential difference between two electrodes, responsible for an external flow of electrons from the left hand electrode at higher potential (anode), to the right hand electrode at lower potential (cathode), when connected to form an electrochemical or galvanic cell.

Since there is oxidation reaction at left hand electrode (LHE) or anode and reduction reaction at right hand electrode (RHE) or cathode, emf of the galvanic, Ecell, is given by
Ecell = (Eoxi)anode + (Ered)cathode
Since by IUPAC conventions, generally reduction potentials are used, hence, for the given cell,
(∵ Eoxi = -Ered)
∴ Ecell = (Ered)cathode – (Ered)anode
Similarly, standard emf of the cell, E0cell is given by
E0cell = (E0red)cathode – (E0red)anode

Question 56.
Explain dependence of cell potential on concentration.
OR
Explain Nernst equation for cell potential.
Answer:
Consider following general reaction taking place in the galvanic cell.
aA + bB → cC + dD
The cell voltage is given by,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 63
where,
T → temperature
R → Gas constant
F → Faraday
n → Number of electrons in the redox cell reaction.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 64
This is Nernst equation for cell potential. It is used to calculate cell potential and electrode potentials.

Question 57.
State (or write) Nernst equation for the electrode potential and explain the terms involved.
Answer:
The Nernst equation for the single electrode reduction potential for a given ionic concentration in the solution in the case, \(M_{(a q)}^{n+}\) + ne → M(s) is given by
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 65

\(\mathrm{E}_{\mathrm{M}^{\mathrm{n}+} / \mathrm{M}}\) is the single electrode potential,
\(E_{\mathrm{M}^{n+} / \mathrm{M}}^{0}\) is the standard reduction electrode potential,
R is the gas constant = 8.314 JK-1 mol-1
T is the absolute temperature,
n is the number of electrons involved in the reaction,
F is Faraday (96500 C)
[Mn+] is the molar concentration of ions.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

Question 58.
Obtain Nernst equation for the following cell :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 66
Answer:
Electrode reactions and a cell reaction for the given cell are,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 67
Here, n = 2
By Nernst equation, the cell potential is given by,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 68

Question 59.
Obtain Nernst equation for the electrode potential for the electrode, \(\mathrm{Zn}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+} \mid \mathrm{Zn}_{(\mathrm{s})}\).
Answer:
For the electrode, \(\mathrm{Zn}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+} \mid \mathrm{Zn}_{(\mathrm{s})}\),
the reduction reaction is,
\(\mathrm{Zn}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}+2 \mathrm{e}^{-} \longrightarrow \mathrm{Zn}_{(\mathrm{s})}\) ∴ n = 2
By Nernst equation, the reduction electrode potential is given by,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 69
where E0zn2+/zn is the standard electrode potential of zinc electrode.

Question 60.
Obtain a relation between cell potential and Gibbs energy for the cell reaction.
Answer:
Consider a galvanic cell which involves n number of electrons in the overall cell reaction. Since one mole of electrons involve the electric charge equal to one Faraday (F) which is equal to 96500 C, the total charge involved in the reaction is,
Electric charge = n × F
If Ecell is the cell potential, then Electrical work = n × F × Ecell
According to thermodynamics, electric work is equal to decrease in Gibbs energy, -ΔG, we can write,
Electric work = n × F × Ecell = -ΔG
∴ ΔG = -nFEcell
Under standard conditions, we can write
∴ ΔG0 = -nF\(E_{\text {cell }}^{0}\)
where \(E_{\text {cell }}^{0}\) is the standard cell potential and ΔG0 is the standard Gibbs free energy change.

Question 61.
Write Nernst Equation for the following reactions :
(a) Cr(s) + 3Fe3+(aq) → Cr3+(aq) + 3Fe2+(aq)
(b) Al3+(aq) + 3e → Al(s)
Answer:
(a) Cr(s) + 3Fe3+(aq) → Cr3+(aq) + 3Fe2+(aq)
The cell formulation is,
Cr(s)|Cr3+(aq) || Fe3+(aq), Fe2+(aq)| Pt
Hence cell potential is,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 70

Question 62.
A single electrode potential can’t be measured but the cell potential can be measured. Explain.
Answer:
(1)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 71
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 72
According to Nemst theory, electrode potential is the potential difference between the metal and ionic layer around it at equilibrium, i.e. the potential across the electric double layer.

(2) For measuring the single electrode potential, one part of the double layer, that is metallic layer can be connected to the potentiometer but not the ionic layer. Hence, single electrode potential can’t be measured experimentally.

(3) When an electrochemical cell is developed by combining two half cells or electrodes, they can be connected to the potentiometer and the potential difference or cell potential can be measured.
Ecell = E2 – E1
where E1 and E2 are reduction potentials of two electrodes.

(4) If one of the electrode potentials is known or arbitrarily assumed and Ecell is measured by potentiometer, then potential of another electrode can be obtained. Therefore it is necessary to choose a reference electrode with arbitrarily fixed potential and measure the potentials of other electrodes.

(5) Therefore Standard Hydrogen Electrode (SHE) is selected assuming arbitrary potential 0.0 volt. Hence potentials of all other electrodes are referred to as hydrogen scale potentials.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

Question 63.
Describe the construction and working of the standard hydrogen electrode (S.H.E.). Give its advantages and disadvantages.
OR
What is the standard hydrogen electrode
OR
Primary reference electrode? Write the construction and working of it.
Answer:
A single electrode potential cannot be measured, but the cell potential can be measured experimentally. Hence, it is necessary to have a reference electrode. S.H.E. is a primary reference electrode.
(1) Construction :
(1) The standard hydrogen electrode (S.H.E.) consists of a glass tube at the end of which a piece of platinised platinum foil is attached as shown in Fig. 5.14. Around this plate there is an outer jacket of glass which has a side inlet through which pure and dry hydrogen gas is bubbled at one atmosphere pressure. The inner tube is filled with a little mercury and a copper wire is dipped into it. This provides an electrical contact with the platinum foil. The outer jacket ends into a broad opening.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 73
(2) The whole assembly is kept immersed in a solution containing hydrogen ions (H+) of unit activity.
(3) This electrode is arbitrarily assigned zero potential.
(4) The platinised platinum foil is used to provide an electrical contact for the electrode. This permits rapid establishment of the equilibrium between the hydrogen gas adsorbed by the metal and the hydrogen ions in solution.

(2) Representation of S.H.E. :
H+ (1 M) | H2 (g, 1 atm) | Pt

(3) Working :
Reduction : H+(aq) + e ⇌ \(\frac {1}{2}\)H2(g) E0 = 0.00 V
H2 gas in contact with H+(aq) ions attains an equilibrium establishing a potential.

(4) Applications of SHE : A reversible galvanic cell with the experimental (indicator) electrode, Zn2+ (1M) | Zn(s) and SHE can be developed as follows :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 74
Thus the potential can be directly obtained.

(5) Disadvantages (Drawbacks or Difficulties) :

  • It is difficult to construct and handle SHE.
  • Pure and dry H2 gas cannot be obtained.
  • Pressure of H2 gas cannot be maintained exactly at 1 atmosphere.
  • The active mass or concentration of H+ from HCl cannot be maintained exactly unity.

Question 64.
How is the potential of hydrogen electrode obtained?
Answer:
Hydrogen gas electrode is represented as,
H+(aq) | H2 (g, PH2) | Pt
Electrode reduction reaction is,
2H+(aq) + 2e → H2(g)
By Nernst equation, the reduction potential is,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 75

If H2 gas is passed at 1 atm, then PH2 = 1 atm
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 76

Question 65.
Draw the diagram for the determination of standard electrode potential with SHE.
Answer:
Consider the following cell :
Zn | Zn2+(aq) || HCl | H2(g, 1atm) | Pt
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 77

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

Question 66.
A voltaic cell consisting of Fe2+(aq)|Fe(s) and Bi3+(aq) | Bi(s) electrodes is constructed. When the circuit is closed, mass of Fe electrode decreases and that of Bi electrode increases.
(a) Write cell formula, (b) Which electrode is cathode and which electrode is anode ? (c) Write electrode reactions and overall cell reaction.
Answer:
(a) Since the mass of Fe electrode decreases, it undergoes oxidation and it is an anode or an oxidation electrode while as the mass of Bi electrode increases, there is a reduction of Bi3+ to Bi and it is cathode or a reduction electrode. Hence the cell formula is,
\(\mathrm{Fe}_{(\mathrm{s})}\left|\mathrm{Fe}_{\mathrm{(aq})}^{2+}(1 \mathrm{M}) \| \mathrm{Bi}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{3+}(1 \mathrm{M})\right| \mathrm{Bi}\)

(b) The left hand electrode is an anode and right hand electrode is a cathode.

(c) Reactions :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 78

Solved Examples 5.7 – 5.9

Question 67.
Solve the following :

(1) Write the reaction and calculate the potential of the half cell,
\(\mathbf{Z n}_{(\mathbf{a q})}^{2+}\) (0.2M) | Zn. (E0Zn2+/Zn = – 0.76 V).
Solution :
Given : E0Zn2+/Zn = -0.76 V
Concentration of Zn2+ = [Zn2+] = 0.2 M
EZn2+/Zn = ?
Reduction reaction for the half cell,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 79
= – 0.76 + 0.0296 (-0.6990)
= -0.76 – 0.02069
= -0.78069 V
Ans. E0Zn2+/Zn = -0.78069 V

(2) Write a reaction and calculate the potential of the electrode, \(\mathrm{Cl}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}\) (0.05 M) | Cl2 (g, 1 atm) | Pt E0Cl2/Cl = 1.36 V.
Solution :
Given : Reduction reaction :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 80
= 1.36 – 0.0592 (- 2 + 0.6990)
= 1.36 – 0.0592 (-1.3010)
= 1.36 + 0.077
= 1.437 V
Ans. Potential of the electrode = 1.437 V

(3) Calculate the potential of the electrode,
pH = 4.5 | H2 (g, 1 atm) |Pt.
Solution :
Given : pH = 4.5
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 81
∴ EH+/H2 = -0.0592 pH
= -0.0592 × 4.5
= -0.2664 V
Ans. EH+/H2 = -0.2664 V

(4) If the standard cell potential of Daniell cell is 1.1 V, calculate standard free energy change for the cell reaction.
Solution :
Given : Daniell cell :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 82
= – 2 × 96500 × 1.1
= -212300 J
= -212.3 kJ
Ans. Standard free energy change = ΔG0
= -212.3 kJ

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

(5) Write balanced equations for the half reactions and calculate the reduction potentials at 25 °C for the following half cells :
(a) Cl (1.2 M) | Cl2(g, 3.6 atm) E0 = 1.36 V
(b) Fe2+ (2 M) | Fe(s) E0 = – 0.44 V
Solution :
(a) Given : Half cell,
\(\mathrm{Cl}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}\) (1.2 M) | Cl2(g, 3.6 atm)|Pt
E0Cl2/Cl = 1.36 V
The reduction reaction:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 83
= 1.36 – 0.0296 (-0.3979)
= 1.36 + 0.01178
= 1.37178
≅ 1.372 V

(b) Given: Half cell, \(\mathrm{Fe}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}\) (2M) |Fe(s)
E0 Fe2+/Fe = -0.44 V
The reduction reaction:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 84
= – 0.44 – 0.0296 × (- 0.3010)
= -0.44 + 0.00891
= -0.43109 V
Ans. (a) Half reaction : Cl2(g) + 2e → \(2 \mathrm{Cl}_{\text {(aq) }}^{-}\)
ECell = 1.372 V
(b) \(\mathrm{Fe}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}\) + 2e → Fe(s)
ECell = -0.43109 V.

(6) Using Nernst equation, calculate the potentials for the following half reactions :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 85
Solution :
(a) Given :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 86
= 0.535 – 0.0296 [ – 4 + 0.9542]
= 0.535 – 0.0296 [-3.0458]
= 0.535 + 0.0902
= 0.6252 V
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 87
Ans. (a) Potential of the half cell = 0.6252 V
(b) Potential of the half cell = 0.7118 V.

(7) Write the cell reaction and calculate the standard potential of the cell,
Ni(s) | Ni2+(1 M) || Cl(1M) | Cl2 (g, 1 atm) | Pt
E0Cl2 = 1.36 V and E0Ni = – 0.25 V.
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 88
= 1.36 – (-0.25)
= 1.36+ 0.25 = 1.61V
Ans. Cell reaction : Ni(s) + Cl2(g) → \(\mathrm{Ni}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}+2 \mathrm{Cl}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}\)
E0Cell = 1.61 V

(8) Write the cell reaction and calculate cell potential and standard free energy change for a cell reaction in the following cell :
\(\mathbf{A l}_{(\mathrm{s})}\left|\mathbf{A l}_{(\mathbf{a q})}^{3+}(1 \mathbf{M}) \| \mathbf{C d}_{(\mathbf{a q})}^{2+}(1 \mathrm{M})\right| \mathbf{C} d\)
E0Al3+/Al = -1-66 V and E0cd2+/cd = -0.403 V
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 89
Since concentrations of ions are 1 M each, it is a standard cell, hence the cell potential is E0Cell.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 90
Standard free energy change ΔG0 is given by,
ΔG0= – nFE0Cell
= -6 × 96500 × 1.257
= – 727800 J
= -727.8 kJ
Ans. Cell reaction :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 91

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

(9) Write the cell reaction and calculate cell potential and the standard free energy change for the cell reaction in the following cell :
Pt | H2 (g, 1 atm) | \(\mathbf{H}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+}\)(1M) || \(\mathrm{Cu}_{\text {(aq) }}^{2+}\) (1M) | Cu(s).
Mention anode and cathode and direction of flow of electrons in the external circuit. (E0Cu2+/Cu = 0.337 V)
Solution :
Given : E0Cu2+/Cu = 0.337 V;
E0H+/H2 = E0SHE = 0.0V
Pt | H2(g, 1 atm) | \(\mathbf{H}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+}\) (1M) || \(\mathrm{Cu}_{\text {(aq) }}^{2+}\) (1M) | Cu(s)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 92
Anode : Hydrogen gas electrode (LHE)
Cathode : Copper electrode (RHE)
E0Cell = E0Cu2+/Cu – E0H+/H2
= 0.337 – (0.0)
= 0.337 V
ΔG0 = – nFE0 = -2 × 96500 × 0.337
= – 65040J
= – 65.04 kJ
Electrons in the external circuit will flow from (LHE) hydrogen gas electrode to (RHE) copper electrode.
Ans. Cell reaction : H2(g) + \(\mathrm{Cu}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}\) → 2 \(\mathrm{H}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+}\) + Cu(s)
Cell potential = E0Cell = 0.337 V
ΔG0 = -65.04 kJ

(10) Calculate the reduction potential of the electrode, Zn2+ (0.02 M) | Zn(s). E0Zn++/Zn = – 0.76 V.
Solution :
Given :E0red = E0Zn++/Zn = -0.76 V;
Concentration of \(\mathrm{Zn}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}\) = [Zn2+] = 0.02 M
The reduction reaction for the electrode,
\(\mathrm{Zn}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}\) +2e → Zn(s); ∴ n = 2
The reduction potential is given by,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 93
= – 0.76 + 0.0296 (- 1.6990)
= -0.76 – 0.0296 × 1.6990
= -0.76 – 0.0503
= -0.8103 V
Ans. Ered = EZn2+/Zn = -0.8103 V

(11) Calculate the potential of the following cell at 25 °C :
Zn | Zn2+(0.6 M) ||H+(1.2 M) | H2 (g, 1 atm) | Pt
E°Zn2+/Zn = -0.763 V
Solution :
Given : E0Zn2+/Zn = -0.763 V;
Concentrations : [Zn2+] = 0.6 M; [H+] = 1.2 M
[H2]g = 1 atm
Cell potential = Ecell = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 94
= 0.763 – 0.0296 × (- 0.3801)
= 0.763 + 0.01125
= 0.77425 V
Ans. Cell potential = E0cell = 0.77425 V

(12) The following redox reaction occurs in a galvanic cell.
2Al(s) + 3Fe2+(1 M) → 2Al3+(1 M)+ 3Fe(s)
(a) Write the cell notation.
(b) Identify anode and cathode
(c) Calculate E0cell if E0anode = – 1.66 V and E0cathode = – 0 44 V
(d) Calculate ΔG0 for the reaction.
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 95
(a) In the cell reaction, Al is oxidised from zero to 3+ while Fe3+ is reduced from 3+ to zero. Hence the cell notation is,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 96

(b) Anode : Al electrode at LHE
Cathode : Fe electrode at RHE

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 97

(d) The standard free energy change ΔG0 is given by,
ΔG0 = – nFE0cell
= – 6 × 96500 × 1.22
= – 70640 J
= – 706.4 kJ
Ans. (a) Cell notation :
\(\mathrm{Al}_{(\mathrm{s})}\left|\mathrm{Al}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{3+}(1 \mathrm{M}) \| \mathrm{Fe}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}(1 \mathrm{M})\right| \mathrm{Fe}_{(\mathrm{s})}\)
(b) Anode : Al; Cathode : Fe
(c) E0cell = 1.22 V
(d) ΔG0 = – 706.4 kJ

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

(13) Construct a cell consisting of \(\mathbf{N i}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}\) | Ni(s) half cell and H+ | H2(g) | Pt half cell.
(a) Write the cell reaction
(b) Calculate emf of the cell if [Ni2+] = 0.1M,
PH2 = 1 atm [H+] = 0.05 M and
E0Ni = – 0.257 V.
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 98
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 99
= 0.257 – 0.0296 × 1.6020
= 0.257 – 0.04742
= 0.20958
≅ 0.2096 V
Ans.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 100

(14) Calculate the cell potential of the following cell at 25°C,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 101
Standard reduction potentials (SRP) of Zn and Cu are -0.76 V and 0.334 V respectively.
Solution:
Given:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 102

(15) Set up the cell consisting of \(\mathbf{H}_{\text {(aq) }}^{+} \mid \mathbf{H}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}\) and \(\mathbf{P b}_{(\mathbf{a q})}^{2+}\) | Pb(s) electrodes. Calculate the emf at 25 °C of the cell if [Pb2+] = 0.1 M,
[H+] = 0.5 M and hydrogen gas is at 2 atm pressure. E0pb2+/pb = – 0.126 V.
Solution :
Given : Half cells :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 103
Concentrations : [H+] = 0.5 M; [Pb2+] = 0.1M;
[H2]g = PH2 = 2 atm; E0H+/H2 = ESHE = 0.0 V;
E0pb2+/pb = -0.126 V
Since E0pb2+/pb (reduction) < E0H+/H2 the Pb electrode is anode and hydrogen gas electrode is cathode.
The cell formulation :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 104
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 105
= 0.126 – 0.0296 (- 0.0969)
= 0.126 + 0.002868
= 0.128868
≅ 0.1289 V
Ans. Ecell = 0.1289 V

(16) Consider a galvanic cell that uses the half reactions,
2H+(aq) + 2e → H(g)
Mg2+(aq) + 2e → Mg(s)
Write balanced equation for the cell reaction. Calculate E0cell, Ecell and ΔG0 if concentrations are 1M each and PH2 = 10 atm
E0Mg2+/Mg = -2.37 V.
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 106
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 107
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 108
The standard free energy change ΔG0 is given by
ΔG0= – nFE0cell
= – 2 × 96500 × 2.37
= -457400 J
= – 457.4 kJ
Ans. E0cell = 2.37 V; Ecell = 2.3404 V;
ΔG0 = -457.4 kJ

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

(17) Calculate Ecell and ΔG for the following at 28 °C : Mg(s) + Sn2+ (0.04M) → Mg2+ (0.06M) + Sn(s)
E0cell = 2.23 V
Is the reaction spontaneous ?
Solution:
Given:
Mg(s) + Sn2+ (0.04 M) → Mg2+ (0.06 M) + Sn
[Sn2+] = 0.4 M
[Mg2+] = 0.06 M
E0cell = 2.23V
Ecell = ?
ΔG = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 109
2.23 – 0.0296 × 0.1761
= 2.23 – 0.005213
= 2.224V
ΔG = – nFE
= – 2 × 96500 × 2.224
= – 4.292 × 105 J
= -429.2 kJ
Since ΔG is negative, the electrochemical reaction is spontaneous.

(18) The standard potentials for Sn2+/Sn and Fe2+/Fe half reactions are -0.136 V and -0.440 V respectively. At what relative concentrations of Sn2+ and Fe2+ will these have the same reduction potentials?
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 110
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 111
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 112
Hence when relative concentrations of Sn2+ and Fe2+ i.e., [Sn2+]/[Fe2+] = 5.37 × 10-11, both the electrodes will have same potential.

(19) Write the cell reaction and calculate the emf of the cell at 25 °C.
Cr(s) | Cr3+(0.0065 M) || Co2+(0.012 M) | Co(s)
E0Co = – 0.280 V, E0Cr = – 0.74 V
What is ΔG for the cell reaction ?
Solution :
Given :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 113
By Nernst equation,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 114
Ecell = 0.4463 V
ΔG = -nFECell
= – 6 × 96500 × 0.4463
= – 258407 J
= – 258.4 kJ
Ans. Cell reaction :
\(2 \mathrm{Cr}_{(\mathrm{s})}+3 \mathrm{Co}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+} \rightarrow 2 \mathrm{Cr}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{3+}+3 \mathrm{Co}_{(\mathrm{s})}\)
ECell = 0.4463 V; ΔG = – 258.4 kJ.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

(20) Calculate E0Cell, ΔG0 and equilibrium constant for the reaction 2Cu+ → Cu2+ + Cu.
E0Cu+/Cu = 0.52 V and E0Cu2+,Cu+ = 0.16 V.
Solution :
Given : Cell reaction : 2Cu+(aq) → Cu2+(aq) +Cu(s)
E0Cu+/Cu = 0.52V; E0Cu2+,Cu+ = 0.16 V
1F = 96500 C
E0Cell = ? ΔG0 = ? K=?
(i) The formulation of the cell :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 115
(ii) ΔG0 = – nFE0Cell = – 1 × 96500 × 0.36
= – 34740 J
= – 34.74 kJ
(iii) Electrochemical redox reactions are considered as reversible reactions. If K is the equilibrium constant for the electrochemical redox reaction, then
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 116
Ans. E0Cell = 0.36 V; ΔG0 = – 34.74 kJ; Equilibrium constant = K= 1.2 × 106 mol-1 dm3.

(21) Calculate the equilibrium constant for the redox reaction at 25 °C.
Sr(s) + Mg2+ → Sr2+(aq) + Mg(s),
that occurs in a galvanic cell. Write the cell formula.
E0Mg = – 2.37 V and E0Sr = – 2.89 V.
Solution :
Given :
Cell reaction : Sr(s) + Mg2+ → Sr2+(aq) + Mg(s)
E0 Mg2+/Mg = -2.37 V; E0 Sr2+/Sr = -2.89 V
Equilibrium constant K = ?
The formation of the cell :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 117
Ans. Equilibrium constant = K = 3.698 × 1017

(22) The equilibrium constant for the following reaction at 25 °C is 2.9 × 109. Calculate standard voltage of the cell.
Cl2(g) + 2Br(aq) ⇌ Br2(l) + 2Cl(aq)
Solution :
Given : Cell reaction : Cl2(g) + 2Br(aq) ⇌ Br2(l) + 2Cl(aq)
Equilibrium constant = K = 2.9 × 109 atm-1
Standard voltage of the cell = E0Cell = ?
The formulation of the cell :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 118

(23) Write the cell representation and calculate equilibrium constant for the following redox reaction :
Ni(s) + 2 Ag+(aq) (1M) → Ni2+(aq) (1 M) + 2Ag(s)
at 25 °C
E0Ni = – 0.25 V and E0Ag = 0.799 V
Solution :
Given : E0Ni2+/Ni = – 0.25 V; E0Ag+/Ag = 0.799 V
Equilibrium constant = K = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 119

(24) Calculate the cell potential of the following galvanic cell :
Pt|H2 (g, 1 atm)|\(\mathbf{H}_{\text {(aq) }}^{+} \mathbf{p H}\) = 3.51||Calomel electrode
Ecal = 0.242 V at 25 °C.
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 120
= -0.0592 × pH
= -0.0592 × 3.5
= -0.2072 V
∴ Ecell = Ecal – EH+/H2
= 0.242 – (-0.2072)
= 0.242 + 0.2072
= 0.4492 V
Ans. Ecell = 0.4492 V

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

Question 68.
How are the voltaic cells classified ?
Answer:
The voltaic cells are classified as primary and secondary voltaic cells.
(1) Primary voltaic cells : These are the voltaic cells in which the electrical energy or cell potentials are developed within the cells due to oxidation and reduction reactions at the reversible electrodes.

The chemicals and electrode materials consumed during the discharging can be regenerated by passing the current in opposite direction from the external source of electricity i.e., these cells can be recharged. For example, Daniell cell. There are the examples where the primary cells can’t be recharged. E.g. Dry cell.

(2) Secondary voltaic cells :
(i) These are the voltaic cells in which the electrical energy or cell potentials are not developed within the cell but electrical energy can be stored or cell potentials can be regenerated by passing electricity from the external source of electricity. Since the electrical energy obtained is second hand, these cells are called secondary cells or accumulators or storage cells.

(ii) These cells can be recharged by passing electric current in opposite direction from the external source of higher emf. Therefore the secondary cells are reversible cells. For example, lead accumulator (lead storage battery).

Question 69.
Explain the construction and working of a dry cell (or Leclanche’s cell).
OR
Write a note on dry cell.
Answer:
(A) Principle :

  • Leclanche’s cell is a primary voltaic cell.
  • It doesn’t contain mobile liquid electrolyte but contains moist viscose aqeuous paste of the electrolytes.
  • It is an irreversible voltaic cell which can’t be recharged.

(B) Construction :
(i) It consists of a small zinc vessel which serves as an anode (negative electrode).
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 121
(ii) The zinc vessel contains a porous paper bag containing an inert graphite (C) electrode which serves as cathode, immersed in a paste of MnO2 and carbon black. This paper bag divides the dry cell into two compartments, namely anode and cathode compartments.
(iii) The rest of the cell is filled with a moist paste of NH4Cl and ZnCl2 which acts as an electrolyte for zinc anode.
(iv) The graphite rod is fitted with a metal cap and the cell is sealed to prevent the drying of moist paste by evaporation.

(C) The dry cell can be represented as,
Zn|ZnCl2(aq), NH2Cl(aq), MnO2(s)|C+.

(D) Reactions in the dry cell :
(i) Oxidation at zinc anode :
Zn(s) → \(\mathrm{Zn}_{\text {(aq) }}^{2+}\) + 2e (oxidation half reaction)
(ii) Reduction at graphite (C) cathode :
The electrons released in the oxidation reaction at anode, flow to cathode through external circuit.
Hydrogen in NH4 ion is reduced to molecular hydrogen which reduces MnO2 to Mn2O3.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 122
(iii) Zn2+ react with NH3 and form a complex.
\(\mathrm{Zn}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}+4 \mathrm{NH}_{3(\text { aq) }} \longrightarrow\left[\mathrm{Zn}\left(\mathrm{NH}_{3}\right)_{4}\right]^{2+}{ }_{(\mathrm{aq})}\)
Since Zn2+ ions are removed, the overall cell reaction can’t be reversed.

(E) Uses of dry cell :

  • Dry cell is used as a source of electric power in radios, flashlights, torches, clocks, etc.
  • Since they are available in small size and portable, they can be used conveniently.

Question 70.
Describe the construction and working of lead accumulator (lead storage cell).
OR
Draw a neat labelled diagram of the lead accumulator. Explain the reactions involved in discharging and charging this cell. Represent this cell using cell conventions.
Answer:
(A) Principle :
(1) The lead accumulator is a secondary electrochemical cell since electrical energy and emf are not developed within the cell but it is previously stored by passing an electric current. Hence it is also called lead accumulator or lead storage battery.
(2) It is reversible since the electrochemical reaction can be reversed by passing an electric current in opposite direction and consumed reactants can be regenerated.
(3) Hence battery can be charged after it is discharged.

(B) Construction : In a lead accumulator, the negative terminal (anode) is made up of lead sheets packed with spongy lead, while the positive terminal (cathode) is made up of lead grids packed with PbO2.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 123
Sulphuric acid of about 38% strength (%w/w) or specific gravity 1.28 or 4.963 molar is the electrolyte in which the lead sheets and lead grids are dipped. The positive terminal and negative terminal are alternatively arranged in the electrolyte and are separately interconnected.

(C) Representation of lead accumulator :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 124

(D) Working of a lead accumulator :
(1) Discharging : When the electric current is withdrawn from lead accumulator, the following reactions take place :
Oxidation at the – ve electrode or anode :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 125

(2) Net cell reaction :
(i) Thus, the overall cell reaction during discharging is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 126
OR
Pb(s) + PbO2(s) + 2H2SO4(aq) → 2PbSO4(s) + 2H2O(l)
The cell potential or emf of the cell depends upon the concentration of sulphuric acid. During the operation, the acid is consumed and its concentration decreases and specific gravity decreases from 1.28 to 1.17. As a result, the emf of the cell decreases. The emf of a fully charged cell is about 2.0 V.

(ii) Recharging of the cell : When the discharged battery is connected to external electric source and a higher external potential is applied the cell reaction gets reversed generating H2SO4.
Reduction at the – ve electrode or cathode :
PbSO4(s) + 2e → Pb(s) + \(\mathrm{SO}_{4(a q)}^{2-}\)
Oxidation at the + ve electrode or anode :
PbSO4(s) + 2H2(l)O → PbO2(s) + 4H+(aq) + \(\mathrm{SO}_{4(a q)}^{2-}\) + 2e
The net reaction during charging is
2PbSO4(s) + 2H2O(l) → Pb(s) + PbO2(s) + 4H+(aq) + 2\(\mathrm{SO}_{4(a q)}^{2-}\)
OR
2PbSO4(s) + 2H2O → Pb(s) + PbO2(s) + 2H2SO4(aq)
The emf of the accumulator depends only on the concentration of H2SO4.

(E) Applications :

  1. It is used as a source of d.c. electric supply.
  2. It is used in automobile in ignition circuits and lighting the head lights by connecting 6 batteries giving 12V potential.
  3. It is also used in invertors.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

Question 71.
In lead accumulator which electrode is coated with PbO2 ? Anode or cathode ?
Answer:
In lead accumulator, cathode is coated with PbO2.

Question 72.
Write net charging and discharging reactions for lead storage battery.
Answer:
For lead storage battery :
Net charging reaction :
2PbSO4(s) + 2H2O(l) → Pb(s) + PbO2(s) + 2H2SO4(aq)
Net discharging reaction :
Pb(s) + PbO2(s) + 2H2SO4(aq) → 2PbSO4(s) + 2H2O(l)

Question 73.
Write a note on Nickel-Cadmium (NICAD) cell.
Answer:
(1) Nickel-Cadminum (NICAD) cell is a secondary dry cell.
(2) It is rechargable, hence it is a reversible cell.
(3) It consists of a cadmium electrode in contact with an alkali and acts as anode while nickel (IV) oxide, NiO2 in contact with an alkali acts as cathode. The alkali used is moist paste of KOH.
(4) Reactions in the cell :
(i) Oxidation at cadmium anode :
Cd(s) + 2OH(aq) → Cd(OH)2(s) + 2e
(ii) Reduction at Ni02(s) cathode :
NiO2(s) + 2H2O(l) + 2e → Ni(OH)2(s) + 2OH(aq)
The overall cell reaction is the combination of above two reactions.
Cd(s) + NiO2(s) + 2H2O(l) → Cd(OH)2(s) + Ni(OH)2(s)
(5) Since the net cell reaction doesn’t involve any electrolytes but solids, the voltage is independent of the concentration of alkali electrolyte.
(6) The cell potential is about 1.4 V.
(7) This cell has longer life than other dry cells.

Question 74.
Write a note on mercury battery.
Answer:
(1) Mercury battery is a rechargeable secondary dry cell.
(2) It consists of zinc anode amalgamated with mercury.
(3) The cathode consists of a paste of Hg and carbon.
(4) The electrolyte is a paste of KOH and ZnO in a strong alkaline medium.
(5) Reactions:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 127
(6) The overall reaction involves only solid substances and electrolytic composition remains unchanged.
(7) Therefore mercury battery provides constant voltage (1.35 V) over a long period.
(8) It is superior to Leclanche’s cell in durability.
(9) Uses : It is used in hearing aids, electric watches, pacemakers, etc.

Question 75.
Describe the construction and working of hydrogen-oxygen (H2-O2) fuel cell.
Answer:
(A) Principle :
(i) The functioning of the fuel cell is based on the combustion reaction like,
2H2(g) + O2(g) → 2H2O(g) is exothermic redox reaction and hence it can be used to produce electricity.
(ii) The reactants of this fuel cell can be continuously supplied from outside, hence this can be used to supply electrical energy for a very long period.

(B) Construction :
(i) In fuel cell the anode and cathode are porous electrodes with suitable catalyst like finely divided platinum.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 128
(ii) The electrolyte used is hot aqueous KOH solution in which porous anode and cathode carbon rods are immersed.
(iii) H2 is continuously bubbled through anode while O2 gas is bubbled through cathode.

(C) Working (cell reactions) :
(i) Oxidation at anode : At anode, hydrogen gas is oxidised to H2O.
2H2(g) + 4OH(aq) → 4H2O(l) + 4e (oxidation half reaction)
(ii) Reduction at cathode : The electrons released at anode travel to cathode through external circuit and reduce oxygen gas to OH-.
O2(g) + 2H2O(l) + 4e → 4OH(aq) (reduction half reaction)
(iii) Net cell reaction: Addition of both the above reactions at anode and cathode gives a net cell reaction.
2H2(g) + O2(g) → 2H2O(l) (overall cell reaction)

(D) Representation of the cell :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 129
The overall cell reaction is an exothermic combustion reaction. However in this, H2 and O2 gases do not react directly but react through electrode reactions. Hence the chemical energy released in the formation of O-H bonds in H2O, is directly converted into electrical energy.

(E) Advantages :

  1. The fuel cell operates continuously as long as H2 and O2 gases are supplied to the electrodes.
  2. The cell reactions do not cause any pollution.
  3. The efficiency of this galvanic cell is the highest about 70% as compared to ordinary galvanic cells.

(F) Drawbacks of H2-O2 fuel cell :

  1. The cell requires expensive electrodes like Pt, Pd.
  2. In practice, voltage is less than 1.23 volt due to spontaneous reactions at the electrodes.
  3. H2 gas is expensive and hazardous.

(G) Applications :

  1. It was successfully used in spacecraft.
  2. It has potential applications in automobiles, power generators for domestic and industrial uses.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

Question 76.
What are the applications of the fuel cells?
Answer:

  1. Fuel cells have been used in the space programme providing electrical energy for a long duration.
  2. The fuel cells have been used in automobiles on experimental basis.
  3. In case of H2-O2 fuel cell, used in spacecraft, the water produced is used for drinking for astronauts.
  4. The fuel cells using methanol as a fuel for combustion are used in electronic products such as cell phones and laptop computers.
  5. The fuel cells have many potential applications as power generators for domestic and industrial uses.

Question 77.
In what way fuel cell differs from ordinary galvanic cells ?
Answer:

  1. Fuel cell is a modified galvanic cell in which the thermal energy of combustion reactions is directly converted into electrical energy.
  2. In the fuel cell, the reactants are not placed within the cell like ordinary galvanic cells, but they are continuously supplied to the electrodes from outside reservoir.
  3. They cannot be recharged unlike ordinary galvanic cell.

Question 78.
Define electrochemical series or electromotive series.
Answer:
Electrochemical series (Electromotive series) : It is defined as the arrangement in a series of electrodes of elements (metal or non-metal in contact with their ions) with the electrode half reactions in the decreasing order of their standard reduction potentials.

Question 79.
Explain electrochemical series or electromotive series.
Answer:
The conventions used in the construction of electrochemical series (or electromotive series) are as follows :

  • The (reduction) electrodes or half cells of the elements are written on the left hand side of the series and they are arranged in the decreasing order of their standard reduction potentials (E°red).
  • Reduction half reactions are written for each half cell in such a way that the species with higher oxidation state and electrons are on left hand side while reduced species with lower oxidation state are on right hand side.
  • The standard reduction potential of standard hydrogen electrode is 0.00 V, i.e., E0H+/H2 = 0.0 V. The electrodes and half cell reactions with positive E0red values are located above hydrogen and those with negative E0red values below hydrogen. Above hydrogen, positive E0red values increase, while below hydrogen negative E0 values increase.
  • The positive E0red values indicate the tendency for reduction and the negative E0red values indicate the tendency for oxidation.
  • The elements, whose electrodes are at the top of the series having high positive values for E0red are good oxidising agents.
  • The elements, whose electrodes are at the bottom of the series having high negative values for E0red are good reducing agents.

Question 80.
What are the applications of electrochemical series (or electromotive series) ?
Answer:
The applications of electrochemical series (or electromotive series) are as follows :
(1) Relative strength of oxidising agents in terms of E0red values : The E0red value is a measure of the tendency of the species to be reduced i.e., to accept electrons and act as an oxidising agent. The species mentioned on left hand side of the half reactions are oxidising agents.

The substances in the upper positions in the series and hence in the upper left side of the half reactions have large positive E0red values hence are stronger oxidising agents. For example, F2, Ce4+, Au3+, etc. As we move down the series, the oxidising power decreases. Hence from the position of the elements in the electrochemical series, oxidising agents can be selected.

(2) Relative strength of reducing agents in terms of E0red values : The lower E0red value means lower tendency to accept electrons but higher tendency to lose electrons. The tendency for reverse reaction or oxidation increases as E0red becomes more negative and we move towards the lower side of the series. For example, Li, K, Al, etc. are good reducing agents.

(3) Identifying the spontaneous direction of reaction : From the standard reduction potentials, E0red, the spontaneity of a redox reaction can be determined. The difference between E0red values for any two electrodes represents cell potential E0cell, constituted by them.

If E°cell is positive then the reaction is spontaneous while if E0cell is negative the reaction is non-spontaneous. For example, E0Mg2+/Mg and E0Ag+/Ag have values -2.37 V and 0.8 V respectively. Then Mg will be a better reducing agent than Ag. Therefore Mg can reduce Ag+ to Ag.

The corresponding reactions will be:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 130

Therefore above reaction in the forward direction will be spontaneous while in the reverse direction will be non-spontaneous since for it E0cell = -3.17V.

(4) Calculation of standard cell potential E0cell : From the electrochemical series, the standard cell potential, E0cell from the E0red values for the half reactions given can be calculated.
For example,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 131

Question 81.
Write any four applications of electrochemical series.
Answer:
The applications of electrochemical series are as follows :

  1. Predicting relative strength of oxidising agents.
  2. Predicting relative strength of reducting agents.
  3. Identifying the spontaneous direction of a reaction.
  4. To calculate the standard cell potential E°cell.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

Multiple Choice Questions

Question 82.
Select and write the most appropriate answer from the given alternatives for each subquestion :

1. The cell constant of a conductivity cell is given by
(a) l × a
(b) \(\frac{a}{l}\)
(c) \(\frac{1}{l \times a}\)
(d) \(\frac{l}{a}\)
Answer:
(d) \(\frac{l}{a}\)

2. A conductivity cell has two platinum electrodes of area 1.2 cm2 and 0.92 cm apart. Hence the cell constant is
(a) 1.104 cm-1
(b) 1.304 cm-1
(c) 0.906 cm-1
(d) 0.767 cm-1
Answer:
(d) 0.767 cm-1

3. The conductivity of 0.02 M KI solution is 4.37 × 10-4 Ω-1 cm-1. Hence its molar conductivity is
(a) 8.74 × 10-6 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1
(b) 21.85 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1
(c) 4.58 × 10-4 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1
(d) 136.5 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1
Answer:
(b) 21.85 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1

4. The specific conductance of 0.02 M HCl is 8.2 × 10-3 Ω-1 cm-1. Hence its molar conductivity is
(a) 164 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1
(b) 6.1 × 103Ω-1 cm2 mol-1
(c) 239.6 S cm2 mol-1
(d) 410 S cm2 mol-1
Answer:
(d) 410 S cm2 mol-1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

5. Molar conductivity of an electrolyte is given by,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 132
Answer:
(c) \(\wedge_{\mathrm{m}}=\frac{\kappa \times 1000}{\mathrm{C}}\)

6. The units of molar conductivity are
(a) Ω cm-2 mol-1
(b) Ω-1 cm2 mol-1
(c) Ω-1 cm-1 mol-1
(d) Ω cm-1 mol-2
Answer:
(b) Ω-1 cm2 mol-1

7. If conductivity is expressed in Ω-1 m-1 and concentration of the electrolytic solution in mol m-3 then, the molar conductance is given by
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 133
Answer:
(b) \(\wedge_{\mathrm{m}}=\frac{\kappa}{C}\)

8. Kohlrausch’s law is represented as
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 134
Answer:
(a) \(\wedge_{0}=\lambda_{+}^{0}+\lambda_{-}^{0}\)

9. The degree of dissociation of a weak electrolyte is given by
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 135
Answer:
(c) α = \(\frac{\wedge_{\mathrm{m}}}{\wedge_{0}}\)

10. ∧0 for CH3COOH is 390.7 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1. If ∧0 for CH3COOK, and HBr in Ω-1 cm2 mol-1 are 115 and 430.4 respectively, then ∧0 for KBr is
(a) 74.6 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1
(b) 180.6 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1
(c) 154.7 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1
(d) 706.1 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1
Answer:
(c) 154.7 Ω-1 cm2 mol-1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

11. The molar conductivity of cation and anion of salt BA are 180 and 220 mhos respectively. The molar conductivity of salt BA at infinite dilution is
(a) 90 mhos · cm2 · mol-1
(b) 110 mhos · cm2 · mol-1
(c) 200 mhos · cm2 · mol-1
(d) 400 mhos · cm2 · mol-1
Answer:
(d) 400 mhos · cm2 · mol-1

12. If ∧m and ∧0 are the molar conductivities of a weak electrolyte at concentration C and at zero concentration, then the dissociation constant Ka is given by
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 136
Answer:
(b) Ka = \(\frac{\wedge_{\mathrm{m}}^{2} \times \mathrm{C}}{\Lambda_{0}\left(\wedge_{0}-\wedge_{\mathrm{m}}\right)}\)

13. What is the ratio of volumes of H2 and O2 liberated during electrolysis of acidified water ?
(a) 1 : 2
(b) 2 : 1
(c) 1 : 8
(d) 8 : 1
Answer:
(b) 2 : 1

14. What weight of copper will be deposited by passing 2 Faradays of electricity through a cupric salt? (atomic mass = 63.5)
(a) 63.5 g
(b) 31.75 g
(c) 127 g
(d) 12.7 g
Answer:
(a) 63.5 g

15. The S.I. unit of cell constant for conductivity cell is
(a) m-1
(b) S·m-2
(c) cm-2
(d) S·dm2·mol-1
Answer:
(a) m-1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

16. The charge of how many coulomb is required to deposit 1.0 g of sodium metal (molar mass 23.0 g mol-1) from sodium ions is
(a) 2098
(b) 96500
(c) 193000
(d) 4196
Answer:
(d) 4196

17. The amount of electricity equal to 0.05 F is
(a) 48250 C
(b) 3776 C
(c) 4825 C
(d) 4285 C
Answer:
(c) 4825 C

18. The number of electrons that have a total charge of 965 coulombs is
(a) 6.022 × 1023
(b) 6.022 × 1022
(c) 6.022 × 1021
(d) 3.011 × 1023
Answer:
(c) 6.022 × 1021

19. When 0.2 Faraday of electricity is passed through an electrolytic solution, the number of electrons involved are
(a) 96500
(b) 1.603 × 10-19
(c) 1.2046 × 1023
(d) 12 × 106
Answer:
(c) 1.2046 × 1023

20. When a charge of 0.5 Faraday is passed through AlCl3 solution, the amount of aluminium deposited at the cathode is (Atomic weight of Al = 27)
(a) 4.5
(b) 18
(c) 27
(d) 2.7
Answer:
(a) 4.5

21. The quantity of electricity required to deposit 54 g of silver from silver nitrate solution is
(a) 0.5 Coulomb
(b) 0.5 Ampere
(c) 0.5 Faraday
(d) 0.5 Volt
Answer:
(c) 0.5 Faraday

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

22. Passage of 5400 C of electricity through an electrolyte deposited 5.954 × 10-3 kg of the metal with atomic mass 106.4. The charge on the metal ion is
(a) + 1
(b) + 2
(c) + 3
(d) + 4
Answer:
(a) + 1

23. On calculating the strength of current in amperes if a charge of 840 C (coulomb) passes through an electrolyte in 7 minutes, it will be
(a) 1
(b) 2
(c) 3
(d) 4
Answer:
(b) 2

24. On passing 1.5 F charge, the number of moles of aluminium deposited at cathode are [Molar mass of Al = 27 gram mol-3]
(a) 1.0
(b) 13.5
(c) 0.50
(d) 0.75
Answer:
(c) 0.50

25. Number of faradays of electricity required to liberate 12 g of hydrogen is
(a) 1
(b) 8
(c) 12
(d) 16
Answer:
(c) 12

26. Daniell cell is
(a) Secondary cell
(b) Irreversible cell
(c) primary irreversible cell
(d) primary reversible cell
Answer:
(d) primary reversible cell

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

27. In the representation of galvanic cell, the ions in the same phase are separated by a
(a) single vertical line
(b) comma
(c) double vertical lines
(d) semicolon
Answer:
(b) comma

28. In the Daniell cell, reduction occurs at the
(a) anode
(b) zinc rod
(c) negative electrode
(d) positive electrode
Answer:
(d) positive electrode

29. The standard hydrogen electrode is represented as
(a) \(\mathrm{H}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+}\)|H2(g, 1 atm) | Pt
(b) \(\mathrm{H}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+}\) 1M | H2(g, 1 atm) | Pt
(c) \(\mathrm{H}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+}\) 1M|H2(g)|Pt
(d) \(\mathrm{H}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+}\) 0.1M|H2(g, 1 atm) | Pt
Answer:
(b) \(\mathrm{H}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+}\) 1M | H2(g, 1 atm) | Pt

30. The essential condition to set a standard hydrogen electrode is
(a) 298 K
(b) pure and dry H2 gas at 1 atm
(c) solution containing H+ at unit activity
(d) all of these
Answer:
(d) all of these

31. In hydrogen-oxygen fuel cell, the carbon rods are immersed in hot aqueous solution of
(a) KCl
(b) KOH
(c) H2SO4
(d) NH4Cl
Answer:
(b) KOH

32. The emf of cell is 1.3 volt. The positive electrode has potential of 0.5 volt. The potential of negative electrode is
(a) 0.8 V
(b) -0.8 V
(c) 1.8 V
(d) – 1.8 V
Answer:
(b) -0.8 V

33. The electrode potential of a silver electrode dipped in 0.1 M AgNO3 solution at 298 K is (E0red of Ag = 0.80 volt)
(a) 0.0741 V
(b) 0.0591 V
(c) 0.741 V
(d) 0.859 V
Answer:
(c) 0.741 V

34. Which of the following species gains electrons more easily ?
(a) Na+
(b) H+
(c) Mg+
(d) Hg+
Answer:
(b) H+

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

35. In Nernst equation the constant 0.0592 at 298 K represents the value of
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 137
Answer:
(d) \(\frac{2.303 R T}{F}\)

36. The concept of electrode potential is explained on the basis of
(a) Arrhenius’ theory
(b) Ostwald’s theory
(c) Nemst’s theory
(d) Faraday’s law
Answer:
(c) Nemst’s theory

37. The standard reduction potentials of metals A and B are x and y respectively. If x > y, the standard emf of the cell containing these electrodes would be
(a) 2x – y
(b) y – x
(c) x – y
(d) x + y
Answer:
(c) x – y

38. The emf of the cell,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 138
(E0red = 0.34 V)
(a) -1.34
(b) 0.34 V
(c) -0.34 V
(d) 1.34
Answer:
(b) 0.34 V

39. The Electromotive Force of the following Cell Cu|Cu++ (1 M)||A+g (1 M)|Ag is …………….. if E0cu++ = 0.33 V and E0 Ag++/Ag = 0.79 V
(a) 0.46 V
(b) – 0.46 V
(c) 1.12 V
(d) – 112 V
Answer:
(a) 0.46 V

40. The standard cell potential of the following cell is 0.463 V Cu|Cu++ (1 M)||Ag+ (1 M)|Ag. If E0Ag = 0.8 V, what is the standard potential of Cu electrode ?
(a) 1.137 V
(b) 0.337 V
(c) 0.463 V
(d) – 0.463 V
Answer:
(b) 0.337 V

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

41. The metal which cannot displace hydrogen from dil. H2SO4 solution is
(a) Zn
(b) Al
(c) Fe
(d) Ag
Answer:
(d) Ag

42. In the Lead storage battery during discharging
(a) pH of the electrolyte increases
(b) pH decreases
(c) pH remain unchanged
(d) pH increases or decreases depends on the extent of discharging
Answer:
(a) pH of the electrolyte increases

43. During the discharging of a lead storage battery,
(a) H2SO4 is consumed
(b) PbSO4 is consumed
(c) Pb2+ ions are formed
(d) Pb is formed
Answer:
(a) H2SO4 is consumed

44. In lead accumulator, anode and cathode are
(a) (Pb + PbO2), Pb
(b) Pb, PbO2
(b) PbO2, Pb
(d) Pb, (Pb + PbO2)
Answer:
(d) Pb, (Pb + PbO2)

45. The efficiency of the hydrogen-oxygen fuel cell is about
(a) 20%
(b) 40%
(c) 70%
(d) 90%
Answer:
(c) 70%

46. The strongest oxidizing agent among the species In3+ (E0 = – 1.34 V), Au3+ (E0 = 1.4 V), Hg2+ (E0 = 0.86 V), Cr3+ (E0 = – 0.74 V) is
(a) Cr3+
(b) Au3+
(c) Hg2+
(d) In3+
Answer:
(b) Au3+

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry

47. The reaction, \(2 \mathrm{Br}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}+\mathrm{Sn}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+} \longrightarrow \mathrm{Br}_{2(\mathrm{l})}+\mathrm{Sn}_{(\mathrm{s})}\)
with the standard potentials, E0Sn = -0.114 V, E0Br2 = + 1.09 V, is
(a) spontaneous in reverse direction
(b) spontaneous in forward direction
(c) at equilibrium
(d) non-spontaneous in reverse direction
Answer:
(a) spontaneous in reverse direction

48. The cell potential of the following cell is
(E0Al3+/Al = – 1.66 V)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 Electrochemistry 139
(a) 1.66 V
(b) -1.66 V
(c) 0.5533 V
(d) 2.14 V
Answer:
(a) 1.66 V

49. The standard reduction potentials of Sn, Hg and Cr are – 1.36 V, 0.854 V and – 0.746 V respectively. The increasing order of oxidising power of the given elements is
(a) Sn < Hg < Cr
(b) Hg < Cr < Sn
(c) Sn < Cr < Hg
(d) Cr < Hg < Sn
Answer:
(c) Sn < Cr < Hg

50. If standard reduction potentials for Pb, K, Zn and Cu are -0.126 V, -2.925 V, -0.763 V and 0.337 V, the decreasing order of reducing power is
(a) Zn > Pb > K > Cu
(b) Cu > Pb > Zn > K
(c) K > Zn > Pb > Cu
(d) K > Pb > Cu > Zn
Answer:
(c) K > Zn > Pb > Cu+

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 11th Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation

Question 1.
Mention some main characteristics of gravitational force.
Answer:
Characteristics of gravitational force:

  1. Every massive object in the universe experiences gravitational force.
  2. It is the force of mutual attraction between any two objects by virtue of their masses.
  3. It is always an attractive force with infinite range.
  4. It does not depend upon the intervening medium.
  5. It is much weaker than other fundamental forces. Gravitational force is 10 times weaker than strong nuclear force.

Question 2.
State and explain Kepler’s law of orbits.
Answer:
Statement:
All planets move in elliptical orbits around the Sun with the Sun at one of the foci of the ellipse.
Explanation:

  1. The figure M shows the orbit of a around the planet P Sun.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 1
  2. Here, S and S’ are the foci of the ellipse and the Sun is situated at S.
  3. P is the closest point along the orbit from S and is called perihelion.
  4. A is the farthest point from S and is called aphelion.
  5. PA is the major axis whose length is 2a. PO and AO are the semimajor axes with lengths ‘a’ each.
    MN is the minor axis whose length is 2b. MO and ON are the semiminor axes with lengths ‘b’ each.

Maharashtra Board Solutions

Question 3.
State and prove Kepler’s law of equal areas.
Answer:
Statement:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 2
The line that joins a planet and the Sun sweeps equal areas in equal intervals of time.
Explanation:
i)Kepler observed that planets move faster when they are nearer to the Sun while they move slower when they are farther from the Sun.

ii) Suppose the Sun is at the origin. The position of planet is denoted by \(\vec{r}\) and its momentum is denoted by \(\vec{p}\) (component ⊥ \(\vec{r}\)).
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 35
vi) For central force the angular momentum is conserved. Hence, from equations (4) and (5),
\(\frac{\overrightarrow{\Delta \mathrm{A}}}{\Delta \mathrm{t}}=\frac{\overrightarrow{\mathrm{L}}}{2 \mathrm{~m}}\) = constant
This proves the law of areas.

Question 4.
What is a central force?
Answer:
A central force on an object is a force which is always directed along the line joining the position of object and a fired point usually taken to the origin of the coordinate system.

Question 5.
State and explain Kepler’s law of periods.
Answer:
Statement:
The square of the time period of revolution of a planet around the Sun is proportional to the cube of the semimajor axis of the ellipse traced by the planet.
Explanation:
If r is length of semi major axis then, this law states that.
T2 × r3 or \(\frac{\mathrm{T}^{2}}{\mathrm{r}^{3}}\) = constant

Maharashtra Board Solutions

Solved Examples

Question 6.
What would be the average duration of year if the distance between the Sun and the Earth becomes
i) thrice the present distance.
ii) twice the present distance.
Solution:
i) Consider r1 be the present distance between the Earth and Sun
We know, T1 = 365 days.
When the distance is made thrice, r2 = 3r1
According to Kepler’s law of period,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 3
i) The duration of the year would be 1897 days when distance is made thrice.
ii) The duration of the year would be 1032 days when distance is made twice.

Question 7.
What would have been the duration of the year if the distance between the Earth and the Sun were half the present distance?
Solution:
Given: r2 = \(\frac{\mathrm{r}_{1}}{2}\)
∴ \(\frac{r_{2}}{r_{1}}=\frac{1}{2}\)
To find. Time period (T2)
Formula: \(\left(\frac{T_{2}}{T_{1}}\right)^{2}=\left(\frac{r_{2}}{r_{1}}\right)^{3}\)
Calculation: We know. T1 = 365 days
From formula,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 36
= 365 × 0.3536
= 129.1
T2 = 129.1 days
The duration of the year would be 129.1 days.

Question 8.
Calculate the period of revolution of Jupiter around the Sun. The ratio of the radius of Jupiter’s orbit to that of the Earth’s orbit is 5.
(Period of revolution of the Earth is 1 year.)
Solution:
Given: \(\frac{\mathrm{r}_{\mathrm{J}}}{\mathrm{r}_{\mathrm{E}}}=\frac{5}{\mathrm{l}}\), TE = 1 year
To find: Period of revolution of Jupiter (TJ)
Formula: T2 ∝ r3
Calculation: From formula,
\(\left(\frac{T_{J}}{T_{E}}\right)^{2}=\left(\frac{r_{J}}{r_{E}}\right)^{3}\)
∴ TJ = 53/2
= 5 x \(\sqrt {5}\)
= 11.18 years.
Period of revolution of Jupiter around the Sun is 11.18 years.

Question 9.
A Saturn sear is 29.5 times the Earth’s year. How far is the Saturn from the Sun if the Earth is 1.50 × 108 km away from the Sun?
Solution:
Given: TS = 29.5 TE,
rE = 1.50 × 108 km
To find: Distance of Saturn form the Sun (rS)
Formula: T2 ∝ r3
Calculation: From formula,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 37
∴ rS = 14.32 × 108 km
Saturn is 14.32 × 108 km away from the Sun.

Maharashtra Board Solutions

Question 10.
The distances of two planets from the Sun are 1013 m and 1012 m respectively. Find the ratio of time periods of the two planets.
Solution:
Given: r1 = 1013 m, r2 = 1012 m
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 4

Question 11.
Heavy and light objects are released from same height near the Earth’s surface. What can we conclude about their acceleration?
Answer:
Heavy and light objects, when released from the same height, fall towards the Earth at the same speed., i.e., they have the same acceleration.

Question 12.
Explain how Newton concluded that gravitational force F ∝ = \(\frac{\mathrm{Mm}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\)
Answer:
Before generalising and stating universal law of gravitation, Newton first studied the motion of moon around the Earth.

  1. The known facts about the moon were,
    • the time period of revolution of moon around the Earth (T) = 27.3 days.
    • distance between the Earth and the moon (r) = 3.85 × 105 km.
    • the moon revolves around the Earth in almost circular orbit with constant angular velocity ω.
  2. Thus, the centripetal force experienced by moon (directed towards the centre of the Earth) is given by,
    F = mrω2 …………… (1)
    Where, m = mass of the moon
  3. From Newton’s laws of motion,
    F = ma
    ∴ a = rω2 ……………… (2)
  4. Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 5
  5. This is the acceleration of the moon directed towards the centre of the Earth.
  6. This acceleration is much smaller than the acceleration felt by bodies near the surface of the Earth (while falling on Earth).
  7. The value of acceleration due to Earth’s gravity at the surface is 9.8 m/s2.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 6
  8. Newton therefore concluded that the acceleration of an object towards the Earth is inversely proportional to the square of distance of object from the centre of the Earth.
    ∴ a ∝ \(\frac{1}{r^{2}}\)
    x. As, F = ma
    Therefore, the force exerted by the Earth on an object of mass m at a distance r from it is
    F ∝ \(\frac{\mathrm{m}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\)
    Similarly, an object also exerts a force on the Earth which is
    FE ∝ \(\frac{\mathrm{M}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\)
    Where M is the mass of the Earth. .
  9. According to Newton’s third law of motion, F = FE. Thus, F is also proportional to the mass of the Earth. From these observations, Newton concluded that the gravitational force between the Earth and an object of mass m is F ∝ \(\frac{\mathrm{Mm}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\)

Question 13.
Discuss the vector form of gravitational force between two masses with the help of diagram.
Answer:

  1. Consider two point masses m1 and m2 having position vectors \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}_{1}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}_{2}}\) from origin O respectively as shown in figure.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 7
  2. The position vector of mass m2 with respect to m1 is given by, \(\vec{r}_{2}-\vec{r}_{1}=\vec{r}_{21}\)
  3. Similarly, position vector of mass m1 with respect to m2 is, \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}}_{1}-\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}_{2}}=\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}_{12}}\)
  4. Let \(\left|\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}_{12}}\right|=\left|\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}_{21}}\right|\) Then, the force acting on mass m2 due to mass m1 will be given as,
    \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}_{21}}=\mathrm{G} \frac{\mathrm{m}_{1} \mathrm{~m}_{2}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\left(-\hat{\mathrm{r}}_{21}\right)\)
    where, \(\hat{\mathbf{r}}_{21}\) is the unit vector from m1 to m2.
    The force \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}_{21}}\) is directed from m2 to m1.
  5. Similarly, force experienced by m1 due to m2 is given as, \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{12}=\mathrm{G} \frac{\mathrm{m}_{1} \mathrm{~m}_{2}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\left(-\hat{\mathrm{r}}_{12}\right)\)
    ∴ \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{12}=-\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{21}\)
    [Note: As \(\hat{\mathbf{r}}_{21}\) is defined as unit vector from m1 to m2, conceptually force \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{21}\) is directed from m2 lo m1.]

Maharashtra Board Solutions

Question 14.
Why Is the law of gravitation known as universal law of gravitation?
Answer:
The law of gravitation is applicable to all material objects in the universe. Hence it is known as the universal law of gravitation.

Question 15.
Give formula for the gravitational force due to a collection of masses and represent it diagrammatically.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 8
For a collection of point masses, the force on any one of them is the vector sum of the gravitational forces exerted by all the other point masses.
For n particles, force on ith mass \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{\mathrm{i}}=\sum_{\mathrm{j}=1 \atop \mathrm{j} \neq \mathrm{i}}^{n} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{\mathrm{ij}}\)
where, \(\vec{F}_{\mathrm{ij}}\) is the force on ith particle due to jth particle.

Question 16.
Discuss qualitative idea for the gravitational force of attraction due to a hollow, thin spherical shell of uniform density on a point mass situated inside it.
Answer:

  1. Let us consider the case when the point mass A, is at the centre of the hollow thin shell.
  2. In this case as every point on the shell is equidistant from A, all points exert force of equal magnitude on A but the directions of these forces are different.
  3. Consider the forces on A due to two diametrically opposite points on the shell.
  4. The forces on A due to them will be of equal magnitude but will be in opposite directions and will cancel each other.
  5. Thus, forces due to all pairs of points diametrically opposite to each other will cancel and there will be no net force on A due to the shell.
  6. When the point object is situated elsewhere inside the shell, the situation is not symmetric. However, gravitational force varies directly with mass and inversely with square of the distance.
  7. When the point object is situated elsewhere inside the shell, the situation is not symmetric. However, gravitational force varies directly with mass and inversely with square of the distance.
  8. Thus, some part of the shell may be closer to point A, but its mass is less. Remaining part will then have larger mass but its centre of mass is away from A.
  9. In this way, mathematically it can be shown that the net gravitational force on A is still zero, so long as it is inside the shell.
  10. Hence, the gravitational force at any point inside any hollow closed object of any shape is zero.

Question 17.
Discuss qualitative idea for the gravitational force of attraction between a hollow spherical shell or solid sphere of uniform density and a point mass situated outside the shell / sphere.
Answer:

  • Gravitational force caused by different regions of shell can be resolved into components along the line joining the point mass to the centre and along a direction perpendicular to this line.
  • The components perpendicular to this line cancel each other and the resultant force remains along the line joining the point to the centre.
  • Mathematical calculations show that, this resultant force on this point equals the force that would get exerted by the shell whose entire mass is situated at its centre.

Solved Problems

Question 18.
The gravitational force between two bodies is 1 N. If distance between them is doubled, what will be the gravitational force between them?
Solution:
Let m1 and m2 be masses of the given two bodies. If they are r distance apart initially, then the force between them will be,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 9
The force between two bodies reduces to 0.25 N.

Question 19.
Calculate the force of attraction between two metal spheres each of mass 90 kg, if the distance between their centres is 40 cm. (G = 6.67 × 10-11 N m2/kg2)
Solution:
Given: m1 = 90 kg, m2 = 90 kg,
r = 40 cm = 40 × 10-2 m.
G = 6.67 × 10-11 N m2/kg2
To find: Force of attraction (F)
Formula: F = \(\frac{\mathrm{Gm}_{1} \mathrm{~m}_{2}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\)
Calculation.
From formula,
F = \(\frac{6.67 \times 10^{-11} \times 90 \times 90}{\left(40 \times 10^{-2}\right)^{2}}\)
= \(\frac{6.67 \times 8100}{1600} \times 10^{-7}\)
∴ F = 3.377 × 10-6 N
The force of attraction between the two metal spheres is 3.377 × 10-6 N.

Maharashtra Board Solutions

Question 20.
Three particles A, B, and C each having mass m are kept along a straight line with AB = BC = 1. A fourth particle D is kept on the perpendicular bisector of AC at a distance ¡ from B. Determine the gravitational force on D.
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 10
From figure,
distance of particle D, from particles A and C is.
ADCD = \(\sqrt{\mathrm{AB}^{2}+\mathrm{BD}^{2}}\)
= \(\sqrt{(l)^{2}+(l)^{2}}=l \sqrt{2}\)
Gravitational force on particle D is the vector sum of forces due to particles A, B, and C. Gravitational force due to A,
FA = \(\frac{\mathrm{Gmm}}{(l \sqrt{2})^{2}}=\frac{\mathrm{Gm}^{2}}{2 l^{2}}\) = along \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{DA}}\)
This force can he resolved into horizontal and vertical components using rectangular unit vectors as shown in figure.
From figure,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 11
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 12
Negative sign indicates net force is acting along DB.
The net force acting on particle D is \(\frac{\mathbf{G m}^{2}}{l^{2}}\left(\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}+1\right)\) directed along \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{D B}}\).

[Note: When force, in given case is resolved into its components, its horizontal component contains cos argument while vertical component contains sine argument.]

Question 21.
Three balls of masses 5 kg each are kept at points P(1, 2, 0) Q(2, 3, 0) and R(2, 2, 0). Find the gravitational force exerted on the ball at point R.
Solution:
The net force acting on ball placed at R will be vector sum of forces acting due to balls at P and Q.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 13
= 2.358 × 10-9 N
The net force acting on the ball at point R will be 2.358 × 10-9 N.

Question 22.
For what purpose Cavendish balance is used?
Answer:
Cavendish balance is used to find the magnitude of the gravitational constant G.

Question 23.
Describe the construction of Cavendish balance with the help of neat labelled diagram.
Answer:

  1. The Cavendish balance consists of a light rigid rod. It is supported at the centre by a fine vertical metallic fibre about 100 cm long.
  2. Two small spheres, s1 and s2 of lead having equal mass m and diameter about 5 cm are mounted at the ends of the rod and a small mirror M is fastened to the metallic fibre as shown in figure.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 14
  3. The mirror can be used to reflect a beam of light onto a scale and thereby measure the angel through which the wire will be twisted.
  4. Two large lead spheres L1 and L2 of equal mass M and diameter of about 20 cm are kept close to the small spheres on opposite side as shown in figure.

Question 24.
Describe the working of the experiment performed to measure the value of gravitational constant.
Answer:

  1. In the experiment performed to find the magnitude of gravitational constant (G), Cavendish balance is used.
  2. The large spheres in the balance attract the nearby smaller spheres by equal and opposite force \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}\). Hence, a torque is generated without exerting any net force on the bar.
  3. Due to the torque the bar turns and the suspension wire gets twisted till the restoring torque due to the elastic property of the wire becomes equal to the gravitational torque.
  4. If r is the initial distance of separation between the centres of the large and the neighbouring small sphere, then the magnitude of the force between them is, F = G\(\frac{\mathrm{mM}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\)
  5. If length of the rod is L, then the magnitude of the torque arising out of these forces is
    τ = FL = G\(\frac{\mathrm{mM}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\)L
  6. At equilibrium, it is equal and opposite to the restoring torque.
    ∴ G\(\frac{\mathrm{mM}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\)L = Kθ
    Where, K is the restoring torque per unit angle and θ is the angle of twist.
  7. By knowing the values of torque τ1 it and corresponding angle of twist a, the restoring torque per unit twist can be determined as K = τ1/α.
  8. Thus, in actual experiment measuring θ and knowing values of τ, m, M and r, the value of G can be calculated from equation (2).

Maharashtra Board Solutions

Question 25.
Derive the expression for the acceleration due to gravity on the surface of the Earth.
Answer:

  1. The Earth is an extended object and can be assumed to be a uniform sphere.
  2. If the mass of the Earth is M and that of any point object is m, the distance of the point object from the centre of the Earth is r then the force of attraction between them is given by,
    F = \(\text { G } \frac{M m}{r^{2}}\) …. (1)
  3. If the point object is not acted upon by any other force, it will be accelerated towards the centre of the Earth under the action of this force. Its acceleration can be calculated by using Newton’s second law,
    F = ma … (2)
  4. From equations (1) and (2),
    ma = \(\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\)
    ∴ Acceleration due to the gravity of the Earth
    \(=\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}} \times \frac{1}{\mathrm{~m}}=\frac{\mathrm{GM}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\)
    This is denoted by g.
  5. If the object is close to the surface of the Earth, r ≈ R, then,
    gEarth’s surface = \(\frac{\mathrm{GM}}{\mathrm{R}^{2}}\)

Question 26.
Explain why the Earth doesn’t appear to move even though the object of mass m (m << M) kept on the Earth exerts equal and opposite gravitational force on it.
Answer:

  1. An object of mass m (much smaller than the mass of the Earth) is attracted towards the Earth and falls on it.
  2. At the same time, the Earth is also attracted by the equal and opposite force towards the mass m.
  3. However, its acceleration towards m will be,
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 38
  4. As m << M, aEarth << g and is nearly zero. As, a result, practically only the mass m moves towards the Earth and the Earth doesn’t appear to move.

Solved Examples

Question 27.
Calculate mass of the Earth from given data, Acceleration due to gravity g = 9.81 m/s2, Radius of the Earth RE = 6.37 × 106 m, G = 6.67 × 10-11 N m2/kg2
Solution:
Given: g = 9.81 m/s2, RE = 6.37 × 106 m,
G = 6.67 × 10-11 N m2/kg2
To find: Mass of the Earth (ME)
Formula: g = \(\frac{\mathrm{GM}_{\mathrm{E}}}{\mathrm{R}_{\mathrm{E}}^{2}}\)
Calculation: From formula,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 39
= antilog {0.9912 + 0.8041 + 0.8041 – 0.8241) × 1023
= antilog {1.7753} × 1023
= 59.61 × 1023
= 5.961 × 1024 kg
Mass of the Earth is 5.961 × 1024 kg.

Maharashtra Board Solutions

Question 28.
Calculate the acceleration due to gravity at the surface of the Earth from the given data. (Mass of the Earth = 6 × 1024 kg, Radius of the Earth = 6.4 × 106 m, G = 6.67 × 10-11 N m2/kg2)
Solution:
Given. M = 6 × 1024 kg, R = 6.4 × 106 m, G = 6.67 × 10-11 N m2/kg2
Tofind. Acceleration due to gravity (g)
Formula: g = \(\frac{\mathrm{GM}}{\mathrm{R}^{2}}\)
Calculation: From formula,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 40
The acceleration due to gravity at the surface of the Earth is 9.77 m/s2.

Question 29.
Calculate the acceleration due to gravity on the surface of moon if mass of the moon is 1/80 times that of the Earth and diameter of the moon is 1/4 times that of the Earth (g = 9.8 m/s2)
Solution:
Given: Mm = \(\frac{\mathrm{M}_{\mathrm{E}}}{80}\), Rm = \(\frac{\mathrm{R}_{\mathrm{E}}}{4}\), g = 9.8 m/s2
To find: Acceleration due to gravity on the surface of moon (gm)
Formula: g = \(\frac{\mathrm{GM}}{\mathrm{R}^{2}}\)
Calculation: For moon, from formula,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 41
Acceleration due to gravity on surface of the planet is 0.245 m/s2.

Question 30.
Find the acceleration due to gravity on a planet that is 10 times as massive as the Earth and with radius 20 times of the radius of the Earth (g = 9.8 m/s2).
Solution:
Given: MP = 10 × Mass of the Earth = 10 ME,
RP = 20 × radius of the Earth = 20 RE, g = 9.8 m/s2
To find: Acceleration due to gravity on surface of the planet (gP)
Formula: g = \(\frac{\mathrm{GM}}{\mathrm{R}^{2}}\)
Calculation: From formula,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 42
Acceleration due to gravity on surface of the planet is 0.245 m/s2.

Maharashtra Board Solutions

Question 31.
Acceleration due to gravity on the Earth is g. A planet has mass and radius half that of the Earth. How much will be percentage change in the acceleration due to gravity on the planet?
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 43
The percentage change in acceleration due to gravity between the planet and the Earth will be 100%.

Question 32.
Explain the graph showing variation of acceleration due to gravity with altitude and depth.
Answer:
The value of acceleration due to gravity is calculated to be maximum at the surface of the Earth. The value goes on decreasing with
i) increase in depth below the Earth’s surface. [varies linearly with (R – d) = r]

ii) increase in height above the Earth’s surface. [varies inversely with (R + h)2 = r2].
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 44
Graph of g, as a function of r, the distance from the centre of the Earth, is plotted as shown in figure.
For r< R,
gd = g\(\left(1-\frac{\mathrm{d}}{\mathrm{R}}\right)\)
if r = R – d,
g(r) = g\(\left(\frac{r}{R}\right) \Rightarrow g(r) \propto r\)
Hence, the graph shows a straight line passing through origin and having slope \(\frac{\mathrm{g}}{\mathrm{R}}\).
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 45
which is represented in the graph.

Question 33.
Why does the weight of a body of a finite mass m is zero at the centre of the Earth?
Answer:
Acceleration at depth d due to gravity is given
by,
gd = g\(\left(1-\frac{\mathrm{d}}{\mathrm{R}}\right)\)
As, at centre of the Earth d = R ⇒ gd = 0.
Hence, the weight of a body of a finite mass m is zero at the centre of the Earth.

Question 34.
Discuss the variation of acceleration due to gravity at poles and equator due to latitude of the Earth.
Answer:

  1. Effective acceleration due to gravity at P is given as,
    g’ = g – Rω2cos2θ.
  2. As the value of θ increases, cos θ decreases. Therefore g’ will increase as we move away from equator towards any pole due to the rotation of the Earth.
  3. At equator θ = 0°
    ∴ cos θ = 1
    ∴ g’e = g – Rω2
    The effective acceleration due to gravity (g’e) is minimum at equator, as here it is reduced by Rω2
  4. At poles θ = 90° cos θ = 0
    ∴ g’p = g – Rω2 cos θ
    = g – 0
    = g
    There is no reduction in acceleration due to gravity at poles, due to the rotation of the Earth as the poles are lying on the axis of rotation and do not revolve.

Question 35.
If g = 9.8 m/s2 on the surface of the Earth, find its value at h = \(\frac{\mathbf{R}}{\mathbf{2}}\) from the surface of the Earth.
Solution:
Given: g = 9.8 m/s2, h = \(\frac{\mathrm{R}}{2}\)
To find: Acceleration due to gravity (gh)
Formula: \(\frac{\mathrm{g}_{\mathrm{h}}}{\mathrm{g}}\) = \(\frac{\mathrm{R}^{2}}{(\mathrm{R}+\mathrm{h})^{2}}\)
Calculation:
From formula,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 46
At h = \(\frac{\mathrm{R}}{2}\) from the surface of the Earth, the value of g is 4.35 m/s2.

Maharashtra Board Solutions

Question 36.
At what distance above the surface of Earth the acceleration due to gravity decreases by 10% of its value at the surface? (Radius of Earth = 6400 km)
Solution:
Given: gh = 90% of g i.e., \(\frac{g_{h}}{g}\) = 0.9,
R = 6400 km = 6.4 × 106 m
To find: Distance above the surface of the Earth (h)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 47

Question 37.
Find the altitude at which the acceleration due to gravity is 25% of that at the surface of the Earth.
(Radius of the Earth = 6400 km)
Solution:
Given: gh = 25% of g = \(\frac{25}{100} \times \mathrm{g}=\frac{\mathrm{g}}{4}\), R = 6400 km = 6.4 × 106 m
To find: Height (h)
Formula: gh = g\(\left(\frac{R}{R+h}\right)^{2}\)
Calculation: From formula,
\(\frac{\mathrm{g}}{4}\) = g\(\left(\frac{R}{R+h}\right)^{2}\)
(R + h)2 = 4R2
R + h = 2R
∴ h = 2R – R
∴ h = R
∴ h = 6400 km

Question 38.
A hole is drilled half way to the centre of the Earth. A body is dropped into the hole. How much will it weigh at the bottom of the hole if the weight of the body on the Earth’s surface is 350 N?
Solution:
Given: W = mg = 350 N, d = \(\frac{\mathrm{R}}{2}\)
To find: Weight at certain depth (Wd)
Formula: gd = \(\mathrm{g}\left[1-\frac{\mathrm{d}}{\mathrm{R}}\right]\)
Calculation: Since Wd = mgd,
from formula,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 48

Question 39.
Assuming the Earth to be a homogeneous sphere, determine the density of the Earth from following data. (g = 9.8 m/s2, G = 6.673 × 10-11 N m2/kg2, R = 6400 km)
Solution:
Given g = 9.8 m/s2,
G = 6.673 × 10-11 N m2/kg2, R = 6400 km = 6.4 × 106 m
To find: Density (ρ)
Formula: g = \(\frac{4}{3} \pi \mathrm{R} \rho \mathrm{G}\)
Calculation: From formula,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 49

Question 40.
If the Earth were a perfect sphere of radius 6.4 × 106 m rotating about its axis with the period of one day (8.64 × 104 s), what is the difference in acceleration due to gravity from poles to equator?
Solution:
Given: R = 6.4 × 106 m, T = 8.64 × 104 s
To find: Difference in acceleration due to gravity (gP – gE)
Formula: g’ = g – Rω2 cos2θ
Calculation: Since ω = \(\frac{2 \pi}{\mathrm{T}}\)
∴ ω = \(\frac{2 \times 3.14}{8.64 \times 10^{4}}\) = \(\frac{6.28}{8.64 \times 10^{4}}\)
= 0.7268 × 10-4
ω = 7.268 × 10-5 rad/s
At poles, θ = 90°
From formula,
gP = g – Rω2cos2 (90°)
= g – 0 ….(∵ cos 90° = 0)
∴ gP = g …. (i)
At equator, θ = 0°,
∴ gE = g – Rω2cos2
gE = g – Rω2 …. (ii)
Subtracting equation (ii) from equation (i), we have,
gP – gE = g – (g – Rω2)
∴ gP – gE = Rω2
= 6.4 × 106 × (7.268 × 10-5)2
= 6.4 × 106 × 52.82 × 10-10
= 338 × 10-4
∴ gP – gE = 3.38 × 10-2 m/s2

Maharashtra Board Solutions

Question 41.
The Earth is rotating with angular velocity ω about its own axis. R is the radius of the Earth. If Rω2 = 0.03386 m/s2, calculate the weight of a body of mass 100 gram at latitude 25°. (g = 9.8 m/s2)
Solution:
Given: Rω2 = 0.03386 m/s2, θ = 25°,
m = 0.1 kg, g = 9.8 m/s2
To find: Weight (W)

Formulae:
i) g’ = g – Rω2 cos2 θ
ii) W = mg

Calculation:
From formula (i),
g’ = 9.8 – [0.03386 – cos2 (25°)]
∴ g’ = 9.8 – [0.03386 × (0.9063)2]
∴ g’ = 9.8 – 0.02781
∴ g’ = 9.772 m/s2
From formula (ii),
W = 0.1 × 9.772
∴ W = 0.9772 N

Question 42.
If the angular speed of the Earth is 7.26 × 10-5 rad/s and radius of the Earth is 6,400 km, calculate the change in weight of 1 kg of mass taken from equator to pole.
Solution:
Given: R = 6.4 × 106 m, ω = 7.26 × 10-5 rad/s
To find: Change in weight (∆W)
Formulae:
i) ∆g = gp – geq = Rω2
ii) ∆W = m∆g

Calculation: From formula (i) and (ii),
∆W = m(Rω2)
= 1 × 6.4 × 106 × (7.26 × 10-5)2
= 3373 × 10-5 N

Question 43.
Define potential energy.
Answer:
Potential energy is the work done against conservative force (or forces) in achieving a certain position or configuration of a given system.

Question 44.
Explain with examples the universal law which states that “Every system always configures itself in order to have minimum potential energy or every system tries to minimize its potential energy”.
Answer:
Example 1:

  1. A spring in its natural state, possesses minimum potential energy. Whenever we stretch it or compress it, we perform work against the conservative force.
  2. Due to this work, the relative distances between the particles of the system change i.e., configuration changes and potential energy of the spring increases.
  3. The spring finally regains its original configuration of minimum potential energy on removal of the applied force.
    This explains that the spring always try to rearrange itself in order to attain minimum potential energy.

Example 2:

  1. When an object is lying on the surface of the Earth, the system of that object and the Earth has minimum potential energy.
  2. This is the gravitational potential energy of the system as these two are bound by the gravitational force. While lifting the object to some height, we do work against the conservative gravitational force.
  3. In its new position, the object is at rest due to balanced forces. However, now, the object has a capacity to acquire kinetic energy, when allowed to fall.
  4. This increase in the capacity is the potential energy gained by the system. The object falls on the Earth to achieve the configuration of minimum potential energy on dropping it from the new position.

Maharashtra Board Solutions

Question 45.
Obtain an expression for change in gravitational potential energy of any object displaced from one point to another.
Answer:
i) Work done against gravitational force in displacing an object through a small displacement, stored in the system in the form of increased potential energy of the system.
∴ dU = –\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{\mathrm{g}} \cdot \overrightarrow{\mathrm{dr}}\)
Negative sign appears because dU is the work done against the gravitational force \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}_{\mathrm{g}}}\).

ii) For displacement of the object from an initial position \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}_{\mathrm{i}}}\) to the final position \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}_{\mathrm{f}}}\), the change in potential energy ∆U, can be obtained by integrating dU.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 50

 

iii) Gravitational force of the Earth, \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{\mathrm{g}}\) = –\(\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}} \hat{\mathrm{r}}\) where \(\hat{r}\) is the unit vector in the direction of \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}}\).
Negative sign appears here because \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}_{\mathrm{g}}}\) is directed towards centre of the Earth and opposite to \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}}\).

iv) For Earth and mass system,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 51
Hence, change in potential energy corresponds to the work done against conservative forces.

Question 46.
Using expression for change in potential energy, show that gravitational potential energy of the system of object of mass m and the Earth with separation of r is, –\(\frac{\text { GMm }}{\text { r }}\)
Answer:

  1. Change in P.E. for a system of Earth and mass is given by,
    ∆U = GMm\(\left(\frac{1}{r_{i}}-\frac{1}{r_{f}}\right)\)
  2. For gravitational force, point of zero potential energy is taken to be at r = ∞.
  3. Hence, U(ri) = 0 at ri = ∞
    Final point rf is the point where the potential energy of the system is to be determined.
  4. At rf = r
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 52
    This is gravitational potential energy of the system of object of mass m and Earth of mass M having separation r (between their centres of mass).

Question 47.
Derive the formula for increase in gravitational potential energy of a Earth – mass system when the mass is lifted to a height h provided h << R.
Answer:

  1. If the object is on the surface of Earth, r = R
    U1 = –\(\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{R}}\)
    If the object is lifted to height h above the surface of Earth, the potential energy becomes _ GMm 12 ~~ R+h
    U2 = –\(\frac{G M m}{R+h}\)
  2. Increase in the potential energy is given by
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 53
  3. If g is acceleration due to gravity on the surface of Earth. GM = gR2
    ∴ ∆U = mgh\(\left(\frac{R}{R+h}\right)\) … (1)
  4. Equation (1) gives the work to be done to raise an object of mass rn to a height h, above the surface of the Earth.
  5. If h << R, we can use R + h ≈ R.
    ∴ ∆U = mgh
    Thus, mgh is increase in the gravitational potential energy of the Earth – mass system if an object of mass m is lifted to a height h, provided h << R.

Maharashtra Board Solutions

Question 48.
Write a short note on gravitational potential.
Answer:
The gravitational potential energy of the system of Earth and any mass m at a distance r from the centre of the Earth is given by,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 54
The factor –\(\frac{\mathrm{GM}}{\mathrm{r}}\) = (VE)r is defined as the
gravitational potential of Earth at distance r from its centre.

As the potential depends only upon mass of the Earth and location of the object, it is same for any mass m bound to the Earth.

Question 49.
Explain the relation between the gravitational potential energy and the gravitational potential.
Answer:

  1. In terms of potential, we can write the potential energy of the Earth-mass system as, Gravitational potential energy (U) = Gravitational potential (Vr) × mass (m)
  2. Thus, gravitational potential is gravitational potential energy per unit mass.
    ∴ Vr = \(\frac{\mathrm{U}}{\mathrm{m}}\)
  3. For any conservative force field, the concept of potential can be defined on similar lines.
  4. Gravitational potential difference between any two points in gravitational field can be written as,
    V2 – V1 = \(\frac{U_{2}-U_{1}}{m}\)
    = \(\frac{\mathrm{dW}}{\mathrm{m}}\)
    This is the work done (or change in potential energy) per unit mass.
  5. Therefore, in general, for a system of any two masses m1 and m2, separated by distance r, we can write,
    U = –\(\frac{\mathrm{G} \mathrm{m}_{1} \mathrm{~m}_{2}}{\mathrm{r}}\)
    = (V1)m2
    = (V2)m1
    Here V1 and V2 are gravitational potentials at r due to m1 and m2 respectively.

Solved Exmaples

Question 50.
What will be the change in potential energy of a body of mass m when it is raised from height RE above the Earth’s surface to 5/2 RE above the Earth’s surface? RE and ME are the radius and mass of the Earth respectively.
Solution:
Change in potential energy (P.E.) of a body of mass m is given by,
∆U = GMEm\(\left(\frac{1}{r_{i}}-\frac{1}{r_{f}}\right)\)
Here, ri = RE + RE = 2 RE
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 55
[Note: Answer calculated above is in accordance with textual methods of calculation.]

Question 51.
What will be the change in potential energy of a body of mass m when it is placed on the surface of the Earth from height R above the Earth’s surface?
Solution:
Change in potential energy (P.E.) of a body of mass m is given by,
∆U = GMEm\(\frac{1}{r_{i}}-\frac{1}{r_{r}}\)
Here, ri = R + R = 2R
Similarly, rf = R
∴ ∆U = GMEm \(\left[\frac{1}{2 R}-\frac{1}{R}\right]\) = GMEm\(\left(-\frac{1}{2 R}\right)\)
∴ ∆U = –\(\frac{\mathbf{G} \mathbf{M} \mathbf{m}}{\mathbf{2 R}}\)
Negative sign indicates that potential energy is decreasing.

Question 52.
Determine the gravitational potential of a body of mass 80 kg whose gravitational potential energy is 5 × 109 J on the surface of the Earth.
Solution:
Given: m = 80 kg, U = 5 × 109 J
To find: Gravitational potential (V)
Formula: V = \(\frac{\mathrm{U}}{\mathrm{m}}\)
Calculation: From formula,
V = \(\frac{5 \times 10^{9}}{80}=\frac{25}{4}\) × 107
= 6.25 × 107 J kg-1
Potential of the body at the surface of the Earth is 6.25 × 107 J kg-1.

Maharashtra Board Solutions

Question 53.
Calculate the escape velocity of a body from the surface of the Earth.
(Average density of Earth = 5.5 × 103 kg/m3, G = 6.67 × 10-11 N m2/kg2, radius of Earth R = 6.4 × 106 m)
Solution:
Given: ρ = 5.5 × 103 kg/m3, R = 6.4 × 106 m,
G = 6.67 × 10-11 N m2/kg2
To find: Escape velocity (ve)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 27
= 2 × 6.4 × 106 × 8.759 × 10-4
∴ ve = 11.21 × 103 m/s = 11.21 km/s
The escape velocity of a body is 11.21 km/s.

Question 54.
What is a satellite?
Answer:
An object which revolves in an orbit around a planet is called as satellite.
Example:

  • Moon is a natural satellite of the Earth.
  • INSAT is an artificial satellite of the Earth.

Question 55.
Write a short note on Polar satellites.
Answer:

  1. Polar Satellites are placed in lower polar orbits.
  2. They are at low altitude 500 km to 800 km.
  3. Period of revolution of polar satellite is nearly 85 minutes, so it can orbit the Earth 16 time per day.
  4. They go around the poles of the Earth in a north-south direction while the Earth rotates in an east-west direction about its own axis.
  5. The polar satellites have cameras fixed on them. The camera can view small stipes of the Earth in one orbit. In entire day the whole Earth can be viewed strip by strip.
  6. Polar region and equatorial regions close to it can be viewed by these satellites.
  7. Polar satellites are used for weather forecasting and meteorological purpose. They are also used for astronomical observations and study of Solar radiations.

Maharashtra Board Solutions

Question 56.
Derive the expression for the critical velocity of a satellite revolving close to the surface of the Earth in terms of acceleration due to gravity.
Answer:

  1. When the satellite is revolving close to the surface of the Earth, the height is very small as compared to the radius of the Earth.
  2. Hence the height can be neglected and radius of the orbit is nearly equal to R, i.e., R + h ≈ R
  3. The critical speed of the satellite then becomes,
    vc = \(\sqrt{\frac{G M}{R}}\)
  4. G is related to acceleration due to gravity by the relation,
    g = \(\frac{G M}{R^{2}}\)
    ∴ GM = gR2
  5. Thus, critical speed in terms of acceleration due to gravity, neglecting the air resistance, can be obtained as,
    vc = \(\sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{gR}^{2}}{\mathrm{R}}}=\sqrt{\mathrm{gR}}\)

Question 57.
From an inertial frame of reference, explain the apparent weight for a person standing in a lift having zero acceleration.
Answer:

  1. A passenger inside a lift experiences only two forces:
    • Gravitational force mg directed vertically downwards and
    • normal reaction force N directed vertically upwards, exerted by the floor of the lift.
  2. As these forces are oppositely directed, the net force in the downward direction will be F = ma – N.
  3. Though the weight of a passenger is the gravitational force acting upon it, the person experiences his weight only due to the normal reaction force N exerted by the floor.
  4. A lift has zero acceleration when the lift is at rest or is moving upwards or downwards with constant velocity.
  5. Thus, a net force acting on the passenger inside the lift will be,
    F = 0 = mg – N
    ∴ mg = N
    Hence, in this case the passenger feels his normal weight mg.

Question 58.
What happens to the apparent weight of the person inside the lift moving with net upward acceleration?
Answer:

  1. The lift is said to be moving with net upward acceleration in two possible conditions:
    • when the lift just starts moving upwards or
    • is about to stop at a lower floor during its downward motion.
  2. As the net acceleration is upwards, the upward force must be greater.
    ∴ F = ma = N – mg
    ∴ N = mg + ma
    ∴ N > mg
  3. Thus, for a passenger inside this lift, his apparent weight is more than his actual weight when the lift was not accelerated.

Question 59.
Why does a passenger feel lighter when the lift is about to stop at a higher floor during its upward motion?
Answer:

  1. When the lift is about to stop at a higher floor during its upward motion it has a net downward acceleration.
  2. As the net acceleration is downwards, the downward force must be greater.
    ∴ F = ma = mg – N
    ∴ N = mg – ma
    i.e., N < mg
    Hence, a passenger feels lighter when the lift is about to stop at a higher floor during its upward motion.

Question 60.
When does a weighing machine will record zero for a passenger in a lift?
Answer:
If the cables of the lift are cut, the downward acceleration of the lift, ad = g. In this case, we get,
N = mg – mad = 0
Thus, there will not be any feeling of weight and the weighing machine will record zero.

Maharashtra Board Solutions

Question 61.
Define time period of a satellite.
Obtain an expression for the period of a satellite in a circular orbit round the Earth. Show that the square of the period of revolution of a satellite is directly proportional to the cube of the orbital radius.
Answer:
Definition:
The time taken by a satellite to complete one revolution around the Earth is called its time period.
Expression for time period:
i) Consider, m = mass of satellite, h = altitude of satellite. Thus, r = R + h = radius of orbit of the satellite.
ii) In one revolution, distance traced by satellite is equal to circumference of its circular orbit.
iii) If T is the time period of satellite, then
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 28
Since π2, G and M are constant,
∴ T2 ∝ r3
Hence, square of the period of revolution of a satellite is directly proportional to the cube of the radius of its orbit.

vi) Taking square roots on both the sides of equation (4), we get,
T = 2π\(\sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{r}^{3}}{\mathrm{GM}}}\)
T = 2π\(\sqrt{\frac{(R+h)^{3}}{G M}}\)
This is the required expression for period of satellite orbiting around the Earth in circular path.

Question 62.
For an orbiting satellite very close to surface of the Earth, show that T = 2π \(\sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{R}}{\mathrm{g}}}\).
Answer:

  1. Time period of an orbiting satellite at certain height is given by, T = 2π \(\sqrt{\frac{(R+h)^{3}}{G M}}\)
  2. If satellite is orbiting very close to the Earth’s surface, then h ≈ 0
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 29

Solved Examples

Question 63.
Show that the critical velocity of a body revolving in a circular orbit very close to the surface of a planet of radius R and
mean density ρ is 2R\(\sqrt{\frac{G \pi \rho}{3}}\).
Solution:
Since the body is revolving very close to the surface of a planet,
∴ h << R
R = radius of planet
ρ = mean density of planet
Critical velocity of a body very close to Earth is given by,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 30

Question 64.
Find the orbital speed of the satellite w hen satellite is revolving round the Earth in circular orbit at a distance 9 × 106 m from its centre. (Given: Mass of Earth = 6 × 1024 kg, G = 6.67 × 10-11 N m2/kg2)
Solution:
Given: r = 9 × 106 m, M = 6 × 1024kg,
G = 6.67 × 10-11 N m2/kg2
To find: Orbital speed (vc)
Formula: vc = \(\sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{GM}}{\mathrm{r}}}\)
Calculation: From formula,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 31
∴ vc = 6.668 × 103 m/s
The orbital speed of the satellite is 6.668 × 103 m/s.

Question 65.
Taking radius of the Earth as 6400 km and g at the Earth’s surface as 9.8 m/s2, calculate the speed of revolution of a satellite orbiting close to the Earth’s surface.
Solution:
Given: R = 6400 km = 6.4 × 106 m, g = 9.8 m/s2
To find: Critical velocity (vc)
Formula: vc = \(\sqrt{\mathrm{gR}}\)
Calculation: From formula,
vc = \(\sqrt{9.8 \times 6.4 \times 10^{6}}\)
= \(\sqrt{98 \times 64 \times 10^{4}}\)
= 7\(\sqrt{2}\) × 8 ×102
= 7.92 × 103 m/s
The speed of revolution of the satellite orbiting close to the Earth’s surface is 7.92 × 103 m/s.

Maharashtra Board Solutions

Question 66.
The critical velocity of a satellite revolving around the Earth is 10 km/s at a height where gh = 8 m/s 2. Calculate the height of the satellite from the surface of the Earth. (R = 6.4 × 106 m)
Solution:
Given: vc = 10 km/s = 10 × 103 m/s,
gh = 8 m/s3, R = 6.4 × 106 m
To find: Height of the satellite (h)
Formula: vc = \(\sqrt{g_{\mathrm{h}}(R+h)}\)
Calculation: From formula,
10 × 103 = \(\sqrt{8 \times(\mathrm{R}+\mathrm{h})}\)
Squaring both the sides, we get,
100 × 106 = 8(R + h)
∴ 8(R + h) = 100 × 106
∴ R + h = \(\frac{100}{8}\) × 106
∴ h = 12.5 × 106 – R
= 12.5 × 106 – 6.4 × 106
= 6.1 × 106m
∴ h = 6100 km
The height of the satellite from the surface of the Earth is 6100 km.

Question 67.
An artificial satellite revolves around a planet in circular orbit close to its surface. Obtain the formula for period of the satellite in terms of density p and radius R of planet.
Solution:
Time period of a satellite revolving around the planet at certain height is given by,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation q 15

Question 68.
Calculate the period of revolution of a polar satellite orbiting close to the surface of the Earth. Given R = 6400 km, g = 9.8 m/s2.
Solution:
Given: For satellite close to Earth surface,
R + h ≈ R
R = 6400 km = 6.4 × 106 m, g = 9.8 m/s2
To find: Time period of satellite (T)
Formula: T = 2π \(\sqrt{\frac{R}{g}}\)
Calculation: From Formula,
T = 2 × 3.14 × \(\sqrt{\frac{6.4 \times 10^{6}}{9.8}}\)
= 6.28 × 8.081 × 102
= 5.075 × 103 sec
≈ 85 min
The time period of satellite very close to the Earth’s surface is nearly 85 minute.

Question 69.
A satellite orbits around the Earth at a height equal to R of the Earth. Find its period. (R = 6.4 × 106 m, g = 9.8 m/s2)
Solution:
Given: h = R = 6.4 × 106m, g = 9.8 m/s2
To find: Time period (T)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 33
The time period of the satellite is 1.435 × 104 s.

Maharashtra Board Solutions

Question 70.
Calculate the height of the communication satellite. (Given: G = 6.67 × 10-11 N m2/kg2, M = 6 × 1024 kg, R = 6400 km)
Solution:
For communication satellite, T = 24 × 60 × 60 s,
Given: M = 6 × 1024 kg,
G = 6.67 × 10-11 N m2/kg2,
R = 6400 km = 6.4 × 106m
To find: Height (h)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 34
The height of the communication satellite is 35910 km.

Question 71.
How will you ‘weigh the Sun’, that is estimate its mass? The mean orbital radius of the Earth around the Sun is 1.5 × 108 km.
Solution:
Given: r = 1.5 × 108 × 103m,
T = 365 days = 365 × 24 × 60 × 60 s
To find: Mass (M)
Formula: T = 2π \(\sqrt{\frac{r^{3}}{G M}}\)
Calculation:
From formula,
M = \(\frac{4 \pi^{2} r^{3}}{G T^{2}}\)
= \(\frac{4 \times(3.14)^{2}\left(1.5 \times 10^{11}\right)^{3}}{\left(6.67 \times 10^{-11}\right)(365 \times 24 \times 60 \times 60)^{2}}\)
∴ M = 2.01 × 1030kg
The mass of the Sun is 2.01 × 1030 kg.
[Trick: To ‘weigh the Sun’, i.e., estimate its mass, one needs to know the period of one of its planets and the radius of the planetary orbit.]

Question 72.
Calculate the B.E. of a satellite of mass 2000 kg moving in an orbit very close to the surface of the Earth. (G = 6.67 × 10-11 N m2/kg2)
Solution:
Given: m = 2 × 103 kg, R = 6.4 × 106 m,
R = 6.4 × 106 m, M = 6 × 1024kg,
G = 6.67 × 10-11 N m2/kg2,
M = 6 × 1024 kg
To find: Binding Energy (B.E.)
Formula: For satellite very close to Earth,
B.E. = \(\frac{1}{2} \times \frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{R}}\)
Calculation: From formula,
B.E. = \(\frac{1}{2} \times \frac{6.67 \times 10^{-11} \times 6 \times 10^{24} \times 2 \times 10^{3}}{6.4 \times 10^{6}}\)
∴ B.E. = 6.25 × 1010 joule
The binding energy of the satellite is 6.25 × 1010 joule.

Question 73.
Find the binding energy of a body of mass 50 kg at rest on the surface of the Earth. (Given: G = 6.67 × 10-11 N m2/kg2, R = 6400 km, M = 6 × 1024 kg)
Solution:
Given: G = 6.67 × 10-11 N m2/kg2,
R = 6400 km = 6.4 × 106m,
M = 6 × 1024 kg, m = 50 kg
To find: Binding energy (B.E.)
Formula: B.E. = \(\frac{\text { GMm }}{\mathrm{R}}\)
Calculation: From formula,
B.E. = \(\frac{6.67 \times 10^{-11} \times 6 \times 10^{24} \times 50}{6.4 \times 10^{6}}\)
= \(\frac{2001}{6.4}\) × 107
∴ B.E. = 3.127 × 109 J
The binding energy of the body 3.127 × 109 J.

Maharashtra Board Solutions

Question 74.
Find the total energy and binding energy of an artificial satellite of mass 1000 kg orbiting at height of 1600 km above the Earth’s surface.
(Given: G = 6.67 × 10-11 N m2/kg2, R = 6400 km, M = 6 × 1024 kg)
Solution:
Given: h = 1600 km = 1.6 × 106 m,
G = 6.67 × 10-11 N m2/kg2,
R = 6400 km = 6.4 × 106m,
m = 1000 kg, M = 6 × 1024kg
To find:
i) Total Energy (T.E.)
ii) Binding Energy (B.E.)
Formulae: i. T.E. = –\(\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{2(\mathrm{R}+\mathrm{h})}\)
ii. B.E. = -T.E.

Calculation: From formula (i),
T.E = – \(\frac{6.67 \times 10^{-11} \times 6 \times 10^{24} \times 1000}{2(6.4+1.6) \times 10^{6}}\)
= –\(\frac{40020 \times 10^{7}}{2 \times 8}\)
∴ T.E. = -2.501 × 1010J
From formula (ii),
B.E. = 2.501 × 1010 J
i) The total energy of the artificial satellite is -2.501 × 1010 J.
ii) The binding energy of the artificial satellite is 2.501 × 1010 J.

Question 75.
Determine the binding energy of satellite of mass 1000 kg revolving in a circular orbit around the Earth when it is close to the surface of Earth. Hence find kinetic energy and potential energy of the satellite. (Mass of Earth = 6 × 1024 kg, radius of Earth = 6400 km; gravitational constant G = 6.67 × 10-11 N m2/kg2)
Solution:
Given: m = 1000 kg, M = 6 × 1024 kg,
R = 6400 km, G = 6.67 × 10-11 N m2/kg2
To find:
i) Binding Energy (B.E.)
ii)Kinetic Energy (K.E.)
iii) Potential Energy (P.E.)

Formulae: For satellite very close to Earth,
i) B.E. = \(\frac{1}{2} \times \frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{R}}\)
ii) K.E.= B.E.
iii) P.E. = -2 K.E.

Calculation: From formula (i),
B.E. = \(\frac{6.67 \times 10^{-11} \times 6 \times 10^{24} \times 1000}{2 \times 6.4 \times 10^{6}}\)
∴ B.E. = 3.1265 × 1010 J
From formula (ii),
K.E. = 3.1265 × 1010
∴ K.E. = 3.1265 × 1010 J
From formula (iii),
P.E. = -2(3.1265 × 1010)
∴ P.E. = -6.2530 × l010J
i) The binding energy of the satellite is 3.1265 × 1010 J.
ii) The kinetic energy of the satellite is 3.1265 × 1010 J.
iii) The potential energy of the satellite is -6.2530 × 1010J.

Apply Your Knowledge

Question 76.
How are Kepler’s law of periods and Newton’s law of gravitation related?
Answer:
Consider a planet of mass m revolving around the Sun of mass M in a circular orbit.
Let,
r = radius of the circular orbit of the planet.
T = Time period of revolution of planet around the Sun.
ω = angular velocity of planet.
F = Centripetal force exerted by the Sun on the planet.
Centripetal force is given by,
F = mrω2;
But ω = \(\frac{2 \pi}{T}\)
∴ F = mr (\(\frac{2 \pi}{\mathrm{T}}\))2
∴ F = \(\frac{4 \pi^{2} \mathrm{mr}}{\mathrm{T}^{2}}\) …(i)
According to Kepler’s third law,
T2 ∝ r3
T2 = Kr3 ……….. (where, K = constant) (ii)
Substituting equation (ii) in equation (i),
F = \(\frac{4 \pi^{2} \mathrm{mr}}{\mathrm{Kr}^{3}}\)
∴ F = \(\frac{4 \pi^{2}}{\mathrm{~K}} \frac{\mathrm{m}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\)
∴ F ∝ \(\frac{\mathrm{m}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\) ….(∵ \(\frac{4 \pi^{2}}{\mathrm{~K}}\) is a constant quantity)
Since, the gravitational attraction between the Sun and the planet is mutual, force exerted by the planet on the Sun will be proportional to the mass M of the Sun.
∴ F ∝ \(\frac{\mathrm{Mm}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\)
∴ F = \(\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\)
The above equation represents Newton’s law of gravitation. In this manner, Newton’s law of gravitation is derived from Kepler’s law of periods.

Maharashtra Board Solutions

Question 77.
Represent graphically the variation of total energy, kinetic energy and potential energy of a satellite with its distance from the centre of the Earth.
Answer:
For a satellite,
Potential energy (U) = \(\)
Kinetic energy (K) = \(\) and
Total energy (E) = \(\), where, r = R + h
Also, U and E remain negative whereas K remains positive.
Hence, the graph will be:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation q 1.1

Multiple Choice Questions

Question 1.
Kepler’s law of equal areas is an outcome of
(A) conservation of energy
(B) conservation of linear momentum
(C) conservation of angular momentum
(D) conservation of mass
Answer:
(C) conservation of angular momentum

Question 2.
Amongst given statements, choose the correct statement.
(I) Kepler derived the laws of planetary motion.
(II) Newton provided the reason behind the laws of planetary motion.
(A) (I) is correct.
(B) (II) is correct.
(C) Both (I) and (II) are correct.
(D) Neither (I) nor (II) is correct.
Answer:
(B) (II) is correct.

Question 3.
The figure shows the motion of a planet satellite in terms of mean density of Earth. around the Sun in an elliptical orbit with Sun at the focus. The shaded areas A and B are also shown in the figure which can be assumed to be equal. If t1 and t2 represent the time for the planet to move from a to b and d to c respectively, then
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation q 16
(A) t1 < t2
(B) t1 >t2
(C) t1 = t2
(D) t1 ≤ t2
Answer:
(C) t1 = t2

Question 4.
A planet is revolving around a star in a circular orbit of radius R with a period T. If the gravitational force between the planet and the star is proportional to R-3/2, then
(A) T2 ∝ R5/2
(B) T2 ∝ R-7/2
(C) T2 ∝ R3/2
(D) T2 ∝ R4
Answer:
(A) T2 ∝ R5/2

Question 5.
Time period of revolution of a satellite around a planet of radius R is T. Period of revolution around another planet whose radius is 3R is
(A) T
(B) 9T
(C) 3T
(D) 3\(\sqrt{3}\) T
Answer:
(D) 3\(\sqrt{3}\) T

Question 6.
Newton’s law of gravitation is called universal law because
(A) force is always attractive.
(B) it is applicable to lighter and heavier bodies.
(C) it is applicable at all times,
(D) it is applicable at all places of universe for all distances between all particles.
Answer:
(D) it is applicable at all places of universe for all distances between all particles.

Question 7.
If the mass of a body is M on the surface of the Earth, the mass of the same body on the surface of the moon is
M
(A) 6M
(B) \(\frac{M}{6}\)
(C) M
(D) Zero
Answer:
(C) M

Maharashtra Board Solutions

Question 8.
Which of the following statements about the gravitational constant is true?
(A) It has no units.
(B) It has same value in all systems of units.
(C) It is a force.
(D) It does not depend upon the nature of medium in which the bodies lie.
Answer:
(D) It does not depend upon the nature of medium in which the bodies lie.

Question 9.
The gravitational force between two bodies is ______
(A) attractive at large distance only
(B) attractive at small distance only
(C) repulsive at small distance only
(D) attractive at all distances large or small
Answer:
(D) attractive at all distances large or small

Question 10.
Mass of a particle at the centre of the Earth is
(A) infinite.
(B) zero.
(C) same as at other places.
(D) greater than at the poles.
Answer:
(C) same as at other places.

Question 11.
Which of the following is not a property of gravitational force?
(A) It is an attractive force.
(B) It acts along the line joining the two bodies.
(C) The forces exerted by two bodies on each other form an action-reaction pair.
(D) It has a very finite range of action.
Answer:
(D) It has a very finite range of action.

Question 12.
If the distance between Sun and Earth is made two third times of the present value, then gravitational force between them will become
(A) \(\frac{4}{9}\)times
(B) \(\frac{2}{3}\)times
(C) \(\frac{1}{3}\)times
(D) \(\frac{9}{4}\) times
Answer:
(D) \(\frac{9}{4}\) times

Question 13.
The gravitational constant G is equal to 6.67 × 10-11 N m2/kg2 in vacuum. Its value in a dense matter of density 1010 g/cm3 will be
(A) 6.67 × 10-1 N m2/kg2
(B) 6.67 × 10-11 N m2/kg2
(C) 6.67 × 10-10 N m2/kg2
(D) 6.67 × 10-21 N m2/kg2
Answer:
(B) 6.67 × 10-11 N m2/kg2

Question 14.
Acceleration due to gravity above the Earth’s surface at a height equal to the radius of the Earth is ______
(A) 2.5 m/s2
(B) 5 m/s2
(C) 9.8 m/s2
(D) 10 m/s2
Answer:
(A) 2.5 m/s2

Question 15.
If R is the radius of the Earth and g is the acceleration due to gravity on the Earth’s surface, the mean density of the Earth is
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation q 2
Answer:
(D) \(\frac{3 \mathrm{~g}}{4 \pi \mathrm{RG}}\)

Maharashtra Board Solutions

Question 16.
Variation of acceleration due to gravity (g) with distance x from the centre of the Earth is best represented by (R → Radius of the Earth)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation q 3
Answer:
(D)

Question 17.
Which of the following statements is not correct for the decrease in the value of acceleration due to gravity?
(A) As we go down from the surtce of the Earth towards its centre.
(B) As we go up from the surface of the Earth.
(C) As we go from equator to the poles on the surface on the Earth.
(D) As the rotational velocity of the Earth is increased.
Answer:
(C) As we go from equator to the poles on the surface on the Earth.

Question 18.
Calculate angular velocity of Earth so that acceleration due to gravity at 60° latitude becomes zero. (Radius of Earth = 6400 km, gravitational acceleration at poles = 10 m/s2, cos60° = 0.5)
(A) 7.8 × 10-2 rad/s
(B) 0.5 × 10-3 radis
(C) 1 × 10-3 radis
(D) 2.5 × 10-3 rad/s
Answer:
(D) 2.5 × 10-3 rad/s

Question 19.
The gravitational potential energy per unit mass at a point gives ________ at that point.
(A) gravitational field
(B) gravitational potential
(C) gravitational potential energy
(D) gravitational force
Answer:
(B) gravitational potential

Question 20.
A satellite is orbiting around a planet at a constant height in a circular orbit. If the mass of the planet is reduced to half, the satellite would
(A) fall on the planet.
(B) go to an orbit of smaller radius.
(C) go to an orbit of higher radius,
(D) escape from the planet.
Answer:
(D) escape from the planet.

Question 21.
How does the escape velocity of a particle depend on its mass?
(A) m2
(B) m
(C) m0
(D) m-1
Answer:
(C) m0

Question 22.
Escape velocity on a planet is ve. If radius of the planet remains same and mass becomes 4 times, the escape velocity becomes
(A) 4ve
(B) 2ve
(C) ve
(D) 0.5 ve
Answer:
(B) 2ve

Question 23.
If the escape velocity of a body on Earth is 11.2 km/s, the escape velocity of the body thrown at an angle 45° with the horizontal will be
(A) 11.2 km/s
(B) 22.4 km/s
(C) \(\frac{11.2}{\sqrt{2}}\)km/s
(D) 11.2 \(\sqrt{2}\) km/s
Answer:
(A) 11.2 km/s

Question 24.
Potential energy of a body in the gravitational field of planet is zero. The body must be
(A) at centre of planet.
(B) on the surface of planet.
(C) at infinity.
(D) at distance equal to radius of Earth.
Answer:
(C) at infinity.

Maharashtra Board Solutions

Question 25.
If gravitational force of Earth disappears, what will happen to the satellite revolving round the Earth?
(A) Satellite will come back to Earth.
(B) Satellite will continue to revolve.
(C) Satellite will escape in tangential path.
(D) Satellite will start falling towards centre.
Answer:
(C) Satellite will escape in tangential path.

Question 26.
If ve and vo represent the escape velocity and orbital velocity of a satellite corresponding to a circular orbit of radius R respectively, then
(A) ve = vo
(B) \(\sqrt{2}\)vo = ve
(C) ve = \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}\)vo
(D) ve and vo are not related
Answer:
(B) \(\sqrt{2}\)vo = ve

Question 27.
If the kinetic energy of a satellite is 2 × 104 J, then its potential energy will be
(A) – 2 × 104 J
(B) 4 × 104 J
(C) -4 × 104 J
(D) -104J
Answer:
(C) -4 × 104 J

Competitive Corner

Question 1.
A body weighs 200 N on the surface of the Earth. How much will it weigh half way down to the centre of the Earth?
(A) 250 N
(B) 100 N
(C) 150 N
(D) 200 N
Answer:
(B) 100 N
Hint:
Acceleration due to gravity at depth d,
gd = g (1 – \(\frac{\mathrm{d}}{\mathrm{R}}\))
= g(1 – \(\frac{1}{2}\)) …(∵ d = \(\frac{1}{2}\))
∴ gd = \(\frac{\mathrm{g}}{2}\)
Weight of the body at depth d = R/2,
Wd = mgd = m × g/2 = \(\frac{1}{2}\) × 200
∴ Wd = 100 N

Maharashtra Board Solutions

Question 2.
The work done to raise a mass m from the surface of the Earth to a height h, which is equal to the radius of the Earth, is:
(A) \(\frac{1}{2}\) mgR
(B) \(\frac{3}{2}\) mgR
(C) mgR
(D) 2mgR
Answer:
(A) \(\frac{1}{2}\) mgR
Hint:
Initial potential energy on Earth’s surface,
Ui = \(\frac{-\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{R}}\)
Final potential energy at height h = R
Uf = \(\frac{-\mathrm{GMm}}{2 \mathrm{R}}\)
Work done, W = Uf – Ui
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation q 4
∴ W = \(\frac{1}{2}\) mgR

Question 3.
The time period of a geostationary satellite is 24 h, at a height 6RE (RE is radius of Earth) from surface of Earth. The time period of another satellite whose height is 2.5 RE from surface will be,
(A) \(\frac{12}{2.5}\)h
(B) 6\(\sqrt{2}\) h
(C) 12\(\sqrt{2}\) h
(D) \(\frac{24}{2.5}\)h
Answer:
(B) 6\(\sqrt{2}\) h
Hint:
By Kepler’s third law,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation q 5
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation q 6

Question 4.
Assuming that the gravitational potential energy of an object at infinity is zero, the change in potential energy (final – initial) of an object of mass m, when taken to a height h from the surface of Earth (of radius R), is given by,
(A) \(\frac{\text { GMm }}{R+h}\)
(B) – \(\frac{\text { GMm }}{R+h}\)
(C) \(\frac{\text { GMmh }}{R(R+h)}\)
(D) mgh
Answer:
(C) \(\frac{\text { GMmh }}{R(R+h)}\)
Hint:
Potential energy of object of mass m on the surface of Earth,
P.E = \(\frac{-\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{R}}\)
Potential energy of object of mass m at a height h from the surface of the Earth,
P.E.’ = \(\frac{-\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{R}+\mathrm{h}}\)
∴ Change in potential energy
= P.E.’ – P.E.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation q 7

Question 5.
A body mass ‘m’ is dropped from height \(\), from Earth’s surface, where ‘R’ is the radius of Earth. Its speed when it will hit the Earth’s surface is (ve = escape velocity from Earth’s surface)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation q 8
Answer:
(B) \(\frac{\mathbf{v}_{\mathrm{e}}}{\sqrt{3}}\)
Hint:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation q 9
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation q 10

Question 6.
According to Kepler’s Law, the areal velocity of the radius vector drawn from the Sun to any planet always
(A) decreases.
(B) first increases and then decreases.
(C) remains constant.
(D) increases.
Answer:
(C) remains constant.

Maharashtra Board Solutions

Question 7.
A body is thrown from the surface of the Earth with velocity ‘u’ m/s. The maximum height in m above the surface of the Earth upto which it will reach is (R = radius of Earth, g = acceleration due to gravity)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation q 11
Answer:
(A) \(\frac{u^{2} R}{2 g R-u^{2}}\)
Hint:
(T.E.) on surface = (T.E.) at height ‘h’
∴ (K.E.)1 + (P.E.)1 = (K.E.)2 + (P.E.)2
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation q 12
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation q 13

Question 8.
A satellite is revolving in a circular orbit at a height ‘h’ above the surface of the Earth of radius ‘R’. The speed of the satellite in its orbit is one-fourth the escape velocity from the surface of the Earth. The relation between ‘h’ and ‘R’ is
(A) h = 2R
(B) h = 3R
(C) h = 5R
(D) h = 7R
Answer:
(D) h = 7R
Hint:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation q 14

Question 9.
Two astronauts are floating in gravitational free space after having lost contact with their spaceship. The two will:
(A) keep floating at the same distance between them.
(B) move towards each other.
(C) move away from each other.
(D) will become stationary.
Answer:
(B) move towards each other.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Cell Division

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 11th Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Cell Division Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Cell Division

Question 1.
Why interphase is known as preparatory phase.
Answer:
1. During interphase, the cell is metabolically very active.
2. In this phase, a cell grows to its maximum size, chromosomal material (DNA and histone proteins) duplicates and the cell prepares itself for next mitotic division. Hence, inteiphase is known as preparatory phase.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Cell Division

Question 2.
Name the following.
1. In which phase the amount of DNA per cell doubles?
2. Which types of RNA are synthesized during first growth phase?
Answer:
1. S-phase.
2. m-RNA, t-RNA and r-RNA

Question 3.
Match the Column I (Phases of Cell cycle) with Column II (Approximate time for completion).

Column I Column II
1. G: Phase (a) 1-3 Hours
2. Gi Phase (b) 2-5 Hours
3. M Phase (c) 6-8 Hours
4. S Phase (d) 8 Hours

Answer:

Column I Column II
1. G: Phase (b) 2-5 Hours
2. Gi Phase (d) 8 Hours
3. M Phase (a) 1-3 Hours
4. S Phase (c) 6-8 Hours

Question 4.
What is cell division? Mention the types of cell division.
Answer:
The division of cells into two (or more) daughter cells with same (or different) genetic material is called cell division. There are three types of cell divisions:
1. Amitosis:
a. It is the simplest form of cell division. The nucleus elongates and a constriction appears along its length.
b. This constriction deepens and divides nucleus into two daughter nuclei followed by division of cytoplasm resulting in formation of two daughter cells.
c. This type of division is observed in unicellular organisms, abnormal cells, old cells and in foetal membrane cells.

2. Mitosis:
a. In this type of cell division, the cell divides and forms two similar daughter cells which are identical to the parent cell.
b. It is completed in two steps as karyokinesis and cytokinesis.

3. Meiosis:
a. In this type of cell division, the number of chromosomes is reduced to half. Hence, this type of cell division is also called reductional division.
b. Meiosis produces four haploid daughter cells from a diploid parent cell.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Cell Division

Question 5.
With the help of suitable diagrams, explain karyokinesis in brief.
Answer:
Karyokinesis is the nuclear division which is divided into prophase, metaphase, anaphase and telophase.
1. Prophase:
a. In this phase, condensation of chromatin material, migration of centrioles, appearance of mitotic apparatus and disappearance of nuclear membrane takes place.
b. Due to condensation, each chromosome with its sister chromatids connected by centromere is clearly visible under light microscope.
c. The nucleolus starts to disappear.
d. Centrosome start moving towards the opposite poles of the cell.
e. Mitotic apparatus is almost completely formed.

2. Metaphase:
a. Chromosomes are completely condensed and appear short.
b. Centromere and sister chromatids become very prominent.
c. All the chromosomes are arranged at equatorial plane of cell. This is called metaphase plate.
d. Mitotic spindle is fully formed in this phase.
e. Centromere of each chromosome divides horizontally into two, each being associated with a chromatid. [Note: The centromeres divide at the beginning of anaphase so that the two chromatids of each chromosome become separated from each other.
Source: Cell Division, Donald B. McMillan, Richard J. Harris, in An Atlas of Comparative Vertebrate Histology, 2018.]

3. Anaphase:
a. In this phase, chromatids of each chromosome separate and form two chromosomes called daughter chromosomes.
b. The chromosomes which are formed are pulled away in opposite direction by spindle apparatus.
c. Anaphase ends when each set of chromosomes reach at opposite poles of the cell.

4. Telophase:
a. This is the final stage of karyokinesis.
b. The chromosomes with their centromeres begin to uncoil at the poles.
c. The chromosomes lengthen and lose their individuality.
d. The nucleolus reappears and the nuclear membrane appear around the chromosomes.
e. Spindle fibres breakdown and get absorbed in the cytoplasm. Thus, two daughter nuclei are formed.

These are small disc-shaped structures at the surface of the centromeres which serve as the sites of attachment of spindle fibres to the chromosomes.

Question 6.
Draw neat and labelled diagram of Anaphase.
Answer:
Anaphase:
a. In this phase, chromatids of each chromosome separate and form two chromosomes called daughter chromosomes.
b. The chromosomes which are formed are pulled away in opposite direction by spindle apparatus.
c. Anaphase ends when each set of chromosomes reach at opposite poles of the cell.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Cell Division

Question 7.
Match the following.

Column I Column II
1. Prophase (a) Chromatids moving to opposite poles.
2. Metaphase (b) Nuclear membrane starts disappearing.
3. Anaphase (c) Chromosomes at equatorial plane of the cell.
4. Telophase (d) Nuclear membrane reappears

Answer:

Column I Column II
1. Prophase (b) Nuclear membrane starts disappearing.
2. Metaphase (c) Chromosomes at equatorial plane of the cell.
3. Anaphase (a) Chromatids moving to opposite poles.
4. Telophase (d) Nuclear membrane reappears

Question 8.
Observe the given diagram and explain the depicted process in your own words.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Cell Division 1
Answer:

  1. The process depicted in the given diagram is cytokinesis in animal cell.
  2. This step takes place at the end of karyokinesis (nuclear division) of mitosis.
  3. It depicts the division of the cytoplasmic material in order to form two daughter cells that resemble each other.
  4. The division starts with a constriction generally at the equator. This constriction gradually deepens and ultimately joins in the centre dividing into two cells.
  5. At the time of cytoplasmic division, organelles like mitochondria and plastids get distributed between the two daughter cells.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Cell Division

Question 9.
Diagrammatically differentiate between cytokinesis in animal cell and plant cell.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Cell Division 2

Question 10.
How cell wall is formed in plant cell?
Answer:
The formation of the new cell wall begins with the formation of a simple precursor, called the ‘cell-plate’ that represents the middle lamella between the walls of two adjacent cells.

Question 11.
What is necrosis?
Answer:
Necrosis is a form of cell injury which leads to the premature death of cells. For example: due to scrape or a harmful chemical.

Question 12.
What is apoptosis? Write its significance.
Answer:

  1. Apoptosis also known as programmed cell death or cellular suicide. In apoptosis cells die in controlled way.
  2. For example: during embryonic development the cells between the embryonic fingers die in a normal process called apoptosis to give a definite shape to the fingers.
  3. Apoptosis also helps in eliminating potential cancer cells.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Cell Division

Question 13.
Which type of cell division is known as reductional division? Why?
Answer:
1. Meiosis is known as reductional division.
2. The number of chromosome is reduced to half, hence, meiosis is known as reductional division.

Question 14.
Describe the various phases of heterotypic division.
Answer:
Heterotypic division is first meiotic division, during which a diploid cell is divided into two haploid cells. The daughter cells resulting from this division are different from the parent cell in chromosome number. Hence the division is called heterotypic division.
It consists of following phases:
1. Prophase -I:
It is the most complicated and longest phase of meiotic division.
It is further divided into five sub-phases viz. leptotene, zygotene, pachytene, diplotene and diakinesis.

a. Leptotene:

  1. The volume of the nucleus increases.
  2. The chromosomes become long distinct and coiled.
  3. They orient themselves in a specific fonn known as bouquet stage. This is characterized with the ends of chromosomes converged towards the side of nucleus where the centrosome lies.
  4. The centriole duplicates into two and migrates to opposite poles. [Note: Centrioles divide during Gj phase of interphase.]

b. Zygotene:

  1. Pairing of non-sister chromatids of homologous chromosomes takes place by formation of synaptonemal complex. This pairing is called synapsis.
  2. Each pair consists of a maternal chromosome and a paternal chromosome. Chromosomal pairs are called bivalents or tetrads.

c. Pachytene:

  1. Each individual chromosome begins to split longitudinally into two similar chromatids. Therefore, each bivalent now appears as a tetrad consisting of four chromatids.
  2. The homologous chromosomes begin to separate but they do not separate completely and remain attached to one or more points. These points are called chiasmata (Appear like a cross-X).
  3. Chromatids break at these points and broken segments are exchanged between non-sister chromatids of homologous chromosomes resulting in recombination.

d. Diplotene:
The chiasma becomes clearly visible in diplotene due to beginning of repulsion between synapsed homologous chromosomes. This is known as desynapsis. Synaptonemal complex also starts to disappear.

e. Diakinesis:

  1. The chiasmata begin to move along the length of chromosomes from the centromere towards the ends of chromosomes. The displacement of chiasmata is termed as terminalization.
  2. The terminal chiasmata exist till the metaphase.
  3. The nucleolus and nuclear membrane completely disappear and spindle fibres begin to appear.

2. Metaphase -1:
a. The spindle fibres are well developed.
b. The tetrads orient themselves on equator in such a way that centromeres of homologous tetrads lie towards the poles and arms towards the equator.
c. They are ready to separate as repulsive force increases.
a. Homologous chromosomes are carried towards the opposite poles by spindle apparatus. This is known as disjunction.
b. The two sister chromatids of each chromosome do not separate in meiosis -I. This is reductional division.
c. The sister chromatids of each chromosome are connected by a common centromere.
d. Both sister chromatids of each chromosome are now different in genetic content as one of them has undergone recombination.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Cell Division 3

3. Anaphase – I:
1. Homologous chromosomes are carried towards the opposite poles by spindle apparatus. This is known as disjunction.
2. The two sister chromatids of each chromosome do not separate in meiosis -I. This is reductional division.
3. The sister chromatids of each chromosome are connected by a common centromere.
4. Both sister chromatids of each chromosome are now different in genetic content as one of them has undergone recombination.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Cell Division 4

4. Telophase-I:
a. The haploid number of chromosomes becomes uncoiled and elongated after reaching their respective poles.
b. The nuclear membrane and nucleolus reappear and thus two daughter nuclei are formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Cell Division 5

Cytokinesis -1:
Cytokinesis occurs after karyokinesis and two haploid cells are formed. In many cases, these daughter cells pass through interkinesis.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Cell Division 6
[Note: The association between the homologous chromosomes i.e. chiasmata remain till metaphase I. During metaphase /, the paired homologous chromosomes move to the metaphase plate. In anaphase [ the spindle fibers begin to shorten. As these spindle fibres shorten, the association between homologous chromosomes (chiasmata) are broken, allowing homologous chromosomes to be pulled to opposite poles.]

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Cell Division

Question 15.
What is Homotypic Division? Explain its phases.
Answer:
Two haploid cells formed during first meiotic division divide further into four haploid cells this division is called homotypic division. It consists of five phases: prophase – II, metaphase – II, anaphase – II, telophase – II, and Cytokinesis – II.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Cell Division 7

1. Prophase-II:
a. The chromosomes are distinct with two chromatids.
b. Each centriole divides into two resulting in formation of two centrioles which migrate to opposite poles and form asters.
c. Spindle fibres are formed between the centrioles.
d. The nuclear membrane and nucleolus disappears in this phase.

2. Metaphase -II:
a. Chromosomes are arranged at the equator.
b. The two chromatids of each chromosome are separated by division of the centromere.
c. Some of the spindle fibres are attached to the centromeres and some are arranged end to end between two opposite centrioles.

3. Anaphase – II:
In this phase, the separated chromatids become daughter chromosomes and move to opposite poles due to the contraction of the spindle fibres attached to centromeres.

4. Telophase – II:
a. In this stage daughter chromosomes starts to uncoil.
b. The nuclear membrane surrounds each group of chromosomes.
c. Nucleolus reappears in this phase.

5. Cytokinesis – II
a. Cytokinesis takes place after the nuclear division.
b. Two haploid cells are formed from each haploid cell.
c. Thus, four haploid daughter cells are formed.
d. These cells then undergo changes to form gametes.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Cell Division

Question 16.
Why meiosis is important?
Answer:

  1. Meiotic division produces gametes or spores.
  2. If it is absent, the number of chromosomes would double or quadruple resulting in the formation of monstrosities (abnormal gametes).
  3. The constant number of chromosomes in a given species across generations is maintained by meiosis and fertilization.
  4. Because of crossing over, exchange of genetic material takes place leading to genetic variations, which are the raw materials for evolution.

Question 17.
Observe the diagram and answer the questions given below it.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Cell Division 8
1. Identify the type of cell division shown in the diagram.
2. Write its significance of meiosis.
Answer:
1. The type of cell division shown in diagram is meiosis II.
2. Meiotic division produces gametes or spores.

  1. If it is absent, the number of chromosomes would double or quadruple resulting in the formation of monstrosities (abnormal gametes).
  2. The constant number of chromosomes in a given species across generations is maintained by meiosis and fertilization.
  3. Because of crossing over, exchange of genetic material takes place leading to genetic variations, which are the raw materials for evolution.

Question 18.
Explain Anaphase-I with a neat labelled diagram.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Cell Division 9
Anaphase:
a. In this phase, chromatids of each chromosome separate and form two chromosomes called daughter chromosomes.
b. The chromosomes which are formed are pulled away in opposite direction by spindle apparatus.
c. Anaphase ends when each set of chromosomes reach at opposite poles of the cell.

Question 19.
What is crossing over? Give its significance.
Answer:
Crossing over:
The process of exchange of genetic material between non-sister chromatids of homologous chromosomes is known as crossing over.
Significance of crossing over:
Crossing over results in genetic recombination of parental characters that leads to variations.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Cell Division

Question 20.
What happens during diakinesis?
Answer:

  1. In diakinesis, the chiasmata begin to move along the length of chromosomes from the centromere towards the ends of chromosomes.
  2. The displacement of chiasmata is termed as terminalization. The terminal chiasmata exist till the metaphase.
  3. The nucleolus disappears and the nuclear membrane also begins to disappear.
  4. Spindle fibres starts to appear in the cytoplasm.

Question 21.
Differentiate between anaphase of mitosis and anaphase – I of meiosis.
Answer:

Anaphase of mitosis Anaphase – I of meiosis
1. Centromere divides into two, resulting in the separation of chromatids. Centromere does not divide.
2. Homologous chromosomes are not involved. Homologous chromosomes are involved.
3. Disjunction does not occur. Disjunction occurs.
4. Same number of chromosomes gather at each pole. Half the chromosome number gather at respective pole.

Question 22.
Give reasons: Meiosis is known as reductional division.
Answer:
Meiosis is known as reductional division because the parent cell produces four daughter cells each having half the number of chromosomes present in the parent cell.

Question 23.
Fill in the blanks:

  1. The process of mitosis maintains the _______.
  2. ________ involves the cell death, but it benefits the organism as a whole.
  3. Crossing over takes place in _______ phase of Prophase-I.

Answer:

  1. The process of mitosis maintains the nucleo-cytoplasmic ratio.
  2. Apoptosis involves the cell death, but it benefits the organism as a whole.
  3. Crossing over takes place in pachytene phase of Prophase-I.

Question 24.
1. Complete the following flowchart.
2. Explain the type of cell division in which chromosome number remain the same as that of the parent cell.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Cell Division 10
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Cell Division 11Karyokinesis is the nuclear division which is divided into prophase, metaphase, anaphase and telophase.
1. Prophase:
a. In this phase, condensation of chromatin material, migration of centrioles, appearance of mitotic apparatus and disappearance of nuclear membrane takes place.
b. Due to condensation, each chromosome with its sister chromatids connected by centromere is clearly visible under light microscope.
c. The nucleolus starts to disappear.
d. Centrosome start moving towards the opposite poles of the cell.
e. Mitotic apparatus is almost completely formed.

2. Metaphase:
a. Chromosomes are completely condensed and appear short.
b. Centromere and sister chromatids become very prominent.
c. All the chromosomes are arranged at equatorial plane of cell. This is called metaphase plate.
d. Mitotic spindle is fully formed in this phase.
e. Centromere of each chromosome divides horizontally into two, each being associated with a chromatid. [Note: The centromeres divide at the beginning of anaphase so that the two chromatids of each chromosome become separated from each other.
Source: Cell Division, Donald B. McMillan, Richard J. Harris, in An Atlas of Comparative Vertebrate Histology, 2018.]

3. Anaphase:
a. In this phase, chromatids of each chromosome separate and form two chromosomes called daughter chromosomes.
b. The chromosomes which are formed are pulled away in opposite direction by spindle apparatus.
c. Anaphase ends when each set of chromosomes reach at opposite poles of the cell.

4. Telophase:
a. This is the final stage of karyokinesis.
b. The chromosomes with their centromeres begin to uncoil at the poles.
c. The chromosomes lengthen and lose their individuality.
d. The nucleolus reappears and the nuclear membrane appear around the chromosomes.
e. Spindle fibres breakdown and get absorbed in the cytoplasm. Thus, two daughter nuclei are formed.

These are small disc-shaped structures at the surface of the centromeres which serve as the sites of attachment of spindle fibres to the chromosomes.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Cell Division

Question 25.
While studying mitosis, different teams of students made following observations in the cells focused under microscope.
1. In certain cells chromosomes were arranged at equatorial plane with fibres originating from cylindrical structures at both the poles.
2. Few cells showed chromatids moving towards opposite poles.
a. In first observation which stage of mitosis is seen by students and what is the scientific term used to represent cylindrical structures?
b. Which stage is seen in the second observation?
Answer:
a. The stage observed in the first case is metaphase. The scientific term used to represent the cylindrical structures are centrioles.
b. The other stage seen in second observation is anaphase.

Question 26.
During biology practical students were asked to see the slide mounted under microscope and note down their observations. Few students noted that the stage observed is anaphase of mitosis and others said that it is anaphase I of meiosis. Later while explaining about experiments teacher said that it is anaphase I of meiosis. On what basis teacher confirmed that it is anaphase I of meiosis?
Answer:
Chromosomes moving towards opposite poles during anaphase I do not separate at the centromeres.

Question 27.
Colchicine is an alkaloid extracted from plants. It prevents the formation of spindle fibres. In the presence colchicine, if a cell enters mitosis what would be the outcome?
Answer:
The spindle fibres are necessary for segregating the sister chromatids to opposite poles of the cell during anaphase. In the presence of colchicine, no spindle fibres will form to attach to the kinetochores (small disc¬like structures present on chromosomes). Therefore, the cell will be stuck in mitosis with the condensed pairs of sister chromatids in an unorganized array.

Question 28.
Read the following statements and mention whether they are TRUE or FALSE in respective boxes.
1. Life of all multicellular organisms starts from single cell which is known as zygote.
2. Spindle fibres present between centriole and centromere are known as polar fibres which can contract.
3. Growth of every living organism depends on cell division.
4. Spindle fibres present between opposite centrioles are called as kinetochore fibres which can elongate.

(i) (ii) (iii) (iv)
(A) T T F T
(B) F F T F
(C) T F T F
(D) 1 T F F ‘

Answer:
(C)

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Cell Division

Question 29.
Quick Review

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Cell Division 12

Question 30.
Exercise:

Question 1.
Define cell cycle.
Answer:

  1. Sequential events occurring in the life of a cell is called cell cycle.
  2. Interphase and M – phase are the two phases of cell cycle.
  3. Cell undergoes growth or rest during interphase and divides during M – phase.

Question 2.
Observe the following diagram and the questions based on it.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Cell Division 13
1. If the initial amount of DNA in a cell is 2C then in which phase of cell cycle the amount of this DNA would become 4C? Also name the process.
2. Which sub-phase of the interphase is of short duration?
3. Enlist the phases of karyokinesis in proper order.
Answer:
S – phase (Synthesis phase):
In this phase DNA is synthesized (replicated), so that amount of DNA per cell doubles.
Synthesis of histone proteins takes place in this phase.
Karyokinesis is the nuclear division which is divided into prophase, metaphase, anaphase and telophase.
1. Prophase:
a. In this phase, condensation of chromatin material, migration of centrioles, appearance of mitotic apparatus and disappearance of nuclear membrane takes place.
b. Due to condensation, each chromosome with its sister chromatids connected by centromere is clearly visible under light microscope.
c. The nucleolus starts to disappear.
d. Centrosome start moving towards the opposite poles of the cell.
e. Mitotic apparatus is almost completely formed.

2. Metaphase:
a. Chromosomes are completely condensed and appear short.
b. Centromere and sister chromatids become very prominent.
c. All the chromosomes are arranged at equatorial plane of cell. This is called metaphase plate.
d. Mitotic spindle is fully formed in this phase.
e. Centromere of each chromosome divides horizontally into two, each being associated with a chromatid. [Note: The centromeres divide at the beginning of anaphase so that the two chromatids of each chromosome become separated from each other.
Source: Cell Division, Donald B. McMillan, Richard J. Harris, in An Atlas of Comparative Vertebrate Histology, 2018.]

3. Anaphase:
a. In this phase, chromatids of each chromosome separate and form two chromosomes called daughter chromosomes.
b. The chromosomes which are formed are pulled away in opposite direction by spindle apparatus.
c. Anaphase ends when each set of chromosomes reach at opposite poles of the cell.

4. Telophase:
a. This is the final stage of karyokinesis.
b. The chromosomes with their centromeres begin to uncoil at the poles.
c. The chromosomes lengthen and lose their individuality.
d. The nucleolus reappears and the nuclear membrane appear around the chromosomes.
e. Spindle fibres breakdown and get absorbed in the cytoplasm. Thus, two daughter nuclei are formed.

These are small disc-shaped structures at the surface of the centromeres which serve as the sites of attachment of spindle fibres to the chromosomes.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Cell Division

Question 3.
During which stage of Prophase-I synapsis occurs?
Answer:
b. Zygotene:
Pairing of non-sister chromatids of homologous chromosomes takes place by formation of synaptonemal complex. This pairing is called synapsis.
Each pair consists of a maternal chromosome and a paternal chromosome. Chromosomal pairs are called bivalents or tetrads.

Question 4.
During which stage disjunction takes place?
Answer:
Telophase-I:
a. The haploid number of chromosomes becomes uncoiled and elongated after reaching their respective poles.
b. The nuclear membrane and nucleolus reappear and thus two daughter nuclei are formed.

Question 5.
What is disjunction?
Answer:
Telophase-I:
a. The haploid number of chromosomes becomes uncoiled and elongated after reaching their respective poles.
b. The nuclear membrane and nucleolus reappear and thus two daughter nuclei are formed.

Question 6.
Why meiosis is known as reductional division?
Answer:
In this type of cell division, the number of chromosomes is reduced to half. Hence, this type of cell division is also called reductional division.

Question 7.
Sketch and label the phase of cell division in which synaptonemal complex is formed?
Answer:
Zygotene:
Pairing of non-sister chromatids of homologous chromosomes takes place by formation of synaptonemal complex. This pairing is called synapsis.
Each pair consists of a maternal chromosome and a paternal chromosome. Chromosomal pairs are called bivalents or tetrads.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Cell Division

Question 8.
Make a schematic representation of a type of cell division in which chromosome number is reduced to half.
Answer:
Karyokinesis is the nuclear division which is divided into prophase, metaphase, anaphase and telophase.
1. Prophase:
a. In this phase, condensation of chromatin material, migration of centrioles, appearance of mitotic apparatus and disappearance of nuclear membrane takes place.
b. Due to condensation, each chromosome with its sister chromatids connected by centromere is clearly visible under light microscope.
c. The nucleolus starts to disappear.
d. Centrosome start moving towards the opposite poles of the cell.
e. Mitotic apparatus is almost completely formed.

2. Metaphase:
a. Chromosomes are completely condensed and appear short.
b. Centromere and sister chromatids become very prominent.
c. All the chromosomes are arranged at equatorial plane of cell. This is called metaphase plate.
d. Mitotic spindle is fully formed in this phase.
e. Centromere of each chromosome divides horizontally into two, each being associated with a chromatid. [Note: The centromeres divide at the beginning of anaphase so that the two chromatids of each chromosome become separated from each other.
Source: Cell Division, Donald B. McMillan, Richard J. Harris, in An Atlas of Comparative Vertebrate Histology, 2018.]

3. Anaphase:
a. In this phase, chromatids of each chromosome separate and form two chromosomes called daughter chromosomes.
b. The chromosomes which are formed are pulled away in opposite direction by spindle apparatus.
c. Anaphase ends when each set of chromosomes reach at opposite poles of the cell.

4. Telophase:
a. This is the final stage of karyokinesis.
b. The chromosomes with their centromeres begin to uncoil at the poles.
c. The chromosomes lengthen and lose their individuality.
d. The nucleolus reappears and the nuclear membrane appear around the chromosomes.
e. Spindle fibres breakdown and get absorbed in the cytoplasm. Thus, two daughter nuclei are formed.

These are small disc-shaped structures at the surface of the centromeres which serve as the sites of attachment of spindle fibres to the chromosomes.

Question 9.
Describe mitosis and its stages in brief.
Answer:
Karyokinesis is the nuclear division which is divided into prophase, metaphase, anaphase and telophase.
1. Prophase:
a. In this phase, condensation of chromatin material, migration of centrioles, appearance of mitotic apparatus and disappearance of nuclear membrane takes place.
b. Due to condensation, each chromosome with its sister chromatids connected by centromere is clearly visible under light microscope.
c. The nucleolus starts to disappear.
d. Centrosome start moving towards the opposite poles of the cell.
e. Mitotic apparatus is almost completely formed.

2. Metaphase:
a. Chromosomes are completely condensed and appear short.
b. Centromere and sister chromatids become very prominent.
c. All the chromosomes are arranged at equatorial plane of cell. This is called metaphase plate.
d. Mitotic spindle is fully formed in this phase.
e. Centromere of each chromosome divides horizontally into two, each being associated with a chromatid. [Note: The centromeres divide at the beginning of anaphase so that the two chromatids of each chromosome become separated from each other.
Source: Cell Division, Donald B. McMillan, Richard J. Harris, in An Atlas of Comparative Vertebrate Histology, 2018.]

3. Anaphase:
a. In this phase, chromatids of each chromosome separate and form two chromosomes called daughter chromosomes.
b. The chromosomes which are formed are pulled away in opposite direction by spindle apparatus.
c. Anaphase ends when each set of chromosomes reach at opposite poles of the cell.

4. Telophase:
a. This is the final stage of karyokinesis.
b. The chromosomes with their centromeres begin to uncoil at the poles.
c. The chromosomes lengthen and lose their individuality.
d. The nucleolus reappears and the nuclear membrane appear around the chromosomes.
e. Spindle fibres breakdown and get absorbed in the cytoplasm. Thus, two daughter nuclei are formed.

These are small disc-shaped structures at the surface of the centromeres which serve as the sites of attachment of spindle fibres to the chromosomes.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Cell Division

Question 10.
Describe chiasmata. Draw diagram to illustrate your answer.
Answer:
Pachytene:
Each individual chromosome begins to split longitudinally into two similar chromatids. Therefore, each bivalent now appears as a tetrad consisting of four chromatids.
The homologous chromosomes begin to separate but they do not separate completely and remain attached to one or more points. These points are called chiasmata (Appear like a cross-X).
Chromatids break at these points and broken segments are exchanged between non-sister chromatids of homologous chromosomes resulting in recombination.

Diplotene:
The chiasma becomes clearly visible in diplotene due to beginning of repulsion between synapsed homologous chromosomes. This is known as desynapsis. Synaptonemal complex also starts to disappear.

Question 11.
Correct the following diagram and write a short note on it.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Cell Division 14
Answer:
b. Zygotene:
Pairing of non-sister chromatids of homologous chromosomes takes place by formation of synaptonemal complex. This pairing is called synapsis.
Each pair consists of a maternal chromosome and a paternal chromosome. Chromosomal pairs are called bivalents or tetrads.

Question 12.
Explain prophase I in your own words.
Answer:
Prophase -I:
It is the most complicated and longest phase of meiotic division.
It is further divided into five sub-phases viz. leptotene, zygotene, pachytene, diplotene and diakinesis.

Question 13.
Explain homotypic division.
Answer:
Two haploid cells formed during first meiotic division divide further into four haploid cells this division is called homotypic division. It consists of five phases: prophase – II, metaphase – II, anaphase – II, telophase – II, and Cytokinesis – II.

1. Prophase-II:
a. The chromosomes are distinct with two chromatids.
b. Each centriole divides into two resulting in formation of two centrioles which migrate to opposite poles and form asters.
c. Spindle fibres are formed between the centrioles.
d. The nuclear membrane and nucleolus disappears in this phase.

2. Metaphase -II:
a. Chromosomes are arranged at the equator.
b. The two chromatids of each chromosome are separated by division of the centromere.
c. Some of the spindle fibres are attached to the centromeres and some are arranged end to end between two opposite centrioles.

3. Anaphase – II:
In this phase, the separated chromatids become daughter chromosomes and move to opposite poles due to the contraction of the spindle fibres attached to centromeres.

4. Telophase – II:
a. In this stage daughter chromosomes starts to uncoil.
b. The nuclear membrane surrounds each group of chromosomes.
c. Nucleolus reappears in this phase.

5. Cytokinesis – II
a. Cytokinesis takes place after the nuclear division.
b. Two haploid cells are formed from each haploid cell.
c. Thus, four haploid daughter cells are formed.
d. These cells then undergo changes to form gametes.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Cell Division

Question 14.
How does cytokinesis in plant cells differ from animal cells?
Answer:
The formation of the new cell wall begins with the formation of a simple precursor, called the ‘cell-plate’ that represents the middle lamella between the walls of two adjacent cells.

Question 15.
What is the significance of meiosis in sexually reproducing animals?
Answer:

  1. Meiotic division produces gametes or spores.
  2. If it is absent, the number of chromosomes would double or quadruple resulting in the formation of monstrosities (abnormal gametes).
  3. The constant number of chromosomes in a given species across generations is maintained by meiosis and fertilization.
  4. Because of crossing over, exchange of genetic material takes place leading to genetic variations, which are the raw materials for evolution.
  5. Gametes are produced by the process of meiosis which are essential for sexual reproduction.
  6. Diploid organisms have two set of chromosomes (one paternal and one maternal).
  7. For a diploid organism to undergo sexual reproduction it needs to create gametes that contain only one set of chromosomes so the number of chromosomes remains same in the next generation.
  8. In absence of meiosis, the chromosome number of parents and their offsprings will differ in every generation; hence no species will hold its characters.
  9. Also, there will be no crossing over of homologous chromosomes. Thus, there will be no variations with respect to the changing environment in progeny to maintain their existence, which may lead to extinction of species.

Question 16.
Explain the first three stages of Meiosis II.
Answer:
Two haploid cells formed during first meiotic division divide further into four haploid cells this division is called homotypic division. It consists of five phases: prophase – II, metaphase – II, anaphase – II, telophase – II, and Cytokinesis – II.

1. Prophase-II:
a. The chromosomes are distinct with two chromatids.
b. Each centriole divides into two resulting in formation of two centrioles which migrate to opposite poles and form asters.
c. Spindle fibres are formed between the centrioles.
d. The nuclear membrane and nucleolus disappears in this phase.

2. Metaphase -II:
a. Chromosomes are arranged at the equator.
b. The two chromatids of each chromosome are separated by division of the centromere.
c. Some of the spindle fibres are attached to the centromeres and some are arranged end to end between two opposite centrioles.

3. Anaphase – II:
In this phase, the separated chromatids become daughter chromosomes and move to opposite poles due to the contraction of the spindle fibres attached to centromeres.

4. Telophase – II:
a. In this stage daughter chromosomes starts to uncoil.
b. The nuclear membrane surrounds each group of chromosomes.
c. Nucleolus reappears in this phase.

5. Cytokinesis – II
a. Cytokinesis takes place after the nuclear division.
b. Two haploid cells are formed from each haploid cell.
c. Thus, four haploid daughter cells are formed.
d. These cells then undergo changes to form gametes.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Cell Division

Question 17.
Sketch, label and describe telophase in mitosis.
Answer:
Telophase:
a. This is the final stage of karyokinesis.
b. The chromosomes with their centromeres begin to uncoil at the poles.
c. The chromosomes lengthen and lose their individuality.
d. The nucleolus reappears and the nuclear membrane appear around the chromosomes.
e. Spindle fibres breakdown and get absorbed in the cytoplasm. Thus, two daughter nuclei are formed.

These are small disc-shaped structures at the surface of the centromeres which serve as the sites of attachment of spindle fibres to the chromosomes.

Question 18.
Explain the process recombination.
Answer:
a. Recombination is exchange of genetic material between paternal and maternal chromosomes during gamete formation.
b. The points where crossing over takes place is known as chiasmata.
c. Chromatids acquire new combinations of alleles by physically exchanging segments in crossing-over.
d. The exchange of genetic material between homologous chromosomes involves accurate breakage and joining of DNA molecules through a complex mechanism.
e. It is catalyzed by enzymes.

Question 19.
1. What is necrosis?
2. What is apoptosis? Mention its significance.
Answer:
1. Necrosis is a form of cell injury which leads to the premature death of cells. For example: due to scrape or a harmful chemical.
(2) 1. Apoptosis also known as programmed cell death or cellular suicide. In apoptosis cells die in controlled way.
2. For example: during embryonic development the cells between the embryonic fingers die in a normal process called apoptosis to give a definite shape to the fingers.
3. Apoptosis also helps in eliminating potential cancer cells.

Question 20.
Multiple Choice Questions:

Question 1.
Replication of DNA takes place during
(A) prophase
(B) S-phase
(C) G2 phase
(D) Interkinesis
Answer:
(B) S-phase

Question 2.
During cell division, spindle fibers are attached to
(A) telomere
(B) centromere
(C) chromomeres
(D) chromosome
Answer:
(B) centromere

Question 3.
Which of the following is the shortest phase?
(A) metaphase
(B) anaphase
(C) interphase
(D) S-phase
Answer:
(B) anaphase

Question 4.
Reappearance of nucleolus is during
(A) telophase
(B) prophase
(C) cytokinesis
(D) inter-kinesis
Answer:
(A) telophase

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Cell Division

Question 5.
During telophase,
(A) nuclear membrane is formed.
(B) nucleolus appears.
(C) astral rays disappear.
(D) all the above
Answer:
(D) all the above

Question 6.
Cytokinesis in plant cell takes place by
(A) furrowing
(B) cell plate formation
(C) any one of (A) or (B)
(D) none of these
Answer:
(B) cell plate formation

Question 7.
Meiosis is a
(A) homotypic division
(B) equatorial division
(C) reductional division
(D) none of the above
Answer:
(C) reductional division

Question 8.
Formation of Synaptonemal complex during meiosis occurs at
(A) Leptotene
(B) Zygotene
(C) Diplotene
(D) Pachytene
Answer:
(B) Zygotene

Question 9.
Crossing over takes place in the ________ stage.
(A) leptotene
(B) zygotene
(C) pachytene
(D) diplotene
Answer:
(C) pachytene

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Cell Division

Question 10.
Crossing over takes place between
(A) sister chromatids
(B) non-homologous chromosomes
(C) non-sister chromatids of homologues
(D) any two chromatids
Answer:
(C) non-sister chromatids of homologues

Question 11.
Crossing over of chromosomes during meiosis leads to
(A) mutation
(B) sex determination
(C) new gene combination
(D) loss of chromosomes
Answer:
(C) new gene combination

Question 12.
Points at which crossing over has taken place between homologous chromosomes are called
(A) chiasmata
(B) synaptonemal complexes
(C) centromeres
(D) telomere
Answer:
(A) chiasmata

Question 13.
Which of the following events take place during diplotene stage of prophase I of meiosis?
(A) Compaction of chromosomes
(B) Formation of synapsis
(C) Process of crossing over
(D) Repulsion of homologues
Answer:
(D) Repulsion of homologues

Question 14.
The correct sequence of stages in prophase I of meiosis is
(A) Leptotene, Pachytene, Zygotene, Diakinesis, Diplotene
(B) Zygotene, Leptotene, Pachytene, Diakinesis, Diplotene
(C) Leptotene, Zygotene, Pachytene, Diplotene, Diakinesis
(D) Diplotene, Diakinesis, Pachytene, Zygotene, Leptotene
Answer:
(C) Leptotene, Zygotene, Pachytene, Diplotene, Diakinesis

Question 15.
In which phase of meiosis are homologous chromosomes separated?
(A) Anaphase I
(B) Prophase II
(C) Anaphase II
(D) Prophase I
Answer:
(A) Anaphase I

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Cell Division

Question 16.
Mitosis differs from meiosis in not having
(A) Long prophase
(B) duplication of DNA
(C) Synapsis and crossing over
(D) interphase
Answer:
(C) Synapsis and crossing over

Question 17.
How many divisions are required to produce 128 gametes?
(A) 64
(B) 16
(C) 32
(D) 12
Answer:
(C) 32

Question 18.
Number of cells undergoing meiotic divisions to produce 124 microspores in angiosperm is
(A) 62
(B) 31
(C) 124
(D) 8
Answer:
(B) 31

Question 19.
How many haploid daughter cells are produced at the end of meiosis-II?
(A) 2
(B) 4
(C) 6
(D) 8
Answer:
(B) 4

Question 21.
Competitive Corner:

Question 1.
Crossing over takes place between which chromatids and in which stage of the cell cycle?
(A) Non-sister chromatids of nonhomologous chromosomes at Pachytene stage of prophase I
(B) Non-sister chromatids of nonhomologous chromosomes at Zygotene stage of prophase I
(C) Non-sister chromatids of homologous chromosomes at Pachytene stage of prophase I
(D) Non-sister chromatids of homologous chromosomes at Zygotene stage of prophase I
Answer:
(C) Non-sister chromatids of homologous chromosomes at Pachytene stage of prophase I

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Cell Division

Question 2.
After meiosis I, the resultant daughter cells have
(A) four times the amount of DNA in comparison to haploid gamete.
(B) same amount of DNA as in the parent cell in S phase.
(C) twice the amount of DNA in comparison to haploid gamete.
(D) same amount of DNA in comparison to haploid gamete.
Answer:
(C) twice the amount of DNA in comparison to haploid gamete.

Question 3.
Cells in G0 phase
(A) suspend the cell cycle
(B) terminate the cell cycle
(C) exit the cell cycle
(D) enter the cell cycle
Answer:
(C) exit the cell cycle

Question 4.
The CORRECT sequence of phases of cell cycle is: [NEET (UG) 2019]
(A) S → G1 → G2 → M
(B) G1 → S → G2 → M
(C) M → G1 → G2 → S
(D) G1 → G2 → S → M
Answer:
(B) G1 → S → G2 → M

Question 5.
The stage during which separation of the paired homologous chromosomes begins is
(A) Diakinesis
(B) Diplotene
(C) Pachytene
(D) Zygotene
Answer:
(B) Diplotene

Question 6.
Which of the following options gives the correct sequence of events during mitosis?
(A) Condensation → nuclear membrane disassembly → crossing over – segregation → telophase
(B) Condensation → nuclear membrane disassembly → arrangement at equator → centromere division → segregation → telophase
(C) Condensation → crossing over → nuclear membrane disassembly → segregation → telophase
(D) Condensation → arrangement at equator → centromere division → segregation → telophase
Answer:
(B) Condensation → nuclear membrane disassembly → arrangement at equator → centromere division → segregation → telophase

Question 7.
Which of the following is not a characteristic feature during mitosis in somatic cells?
(A) Chromosome movement
(B) Synapsis
(C) Spindle fibres
(D) Disappearance of nucleolus
Answer:
(B) Synapsis

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Cell Division

Question 8.
Arrange the following events of meiosis in correct sequence. [AIPMT Retest 2015]
(a) Crossing over
(b) Synapsis
(c) Terminalisation of chiasmata
(d) Disappearance of nucleolus
(A) (b), (c), (d), (a)
(B) (b), (a), (d), (c)
(C) (b),(a), (c), (d)
(D) (a), (b), (c), (d)
Answer:
(C) (b),(a), (c), (d)

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 11th Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion

Question 1.
‘Rest and motion are relative concepts.’ Explain the statement with an example.
Answer:

  1. A body can be described to be at rest or in motion with respect to a system of co¬ordinate axes known as the frame of reference.
  2. A body is in motion if it changes its position with respect to a fixed reference point in a frame of reference. On the other hand, a body is at rest if it does not change its position with respect to a fixed reference point in a frame of reference.
  3. An object can be said to be at rest with respect to a frame of reference while the same object can be said to be in motion with respect to a different frame of reference.
    Example: In a running train, all the travellers in the train are in a state of rest if the train is taken as the frame of reference. On the other hand, all the travellers in the train are in a state of motion if ground (or platform) is taken as the frame of reference.
  4. Thus, motion and rest always need a frame of reference to be described. Hence, rest and motion are relative concepts.

Question 2.
Explain how acceleration and initial velocity decides trajectory of a motion.
Answer:

  1. The resultant motion is linear if:
    • initial velocity \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{u}}\) = 0 (starting from rest) and acceleration \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{a}}\) is in any direction.
    • initial velocity \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{u}}\) ≠ 0 and acceleration a is in line with the initial velocity (same or opposite direction).
  2. The resultant motion is circular if initial velocity \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{u}}\) ≠ 0 and acceleration \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{a}}\) is perpendicular to the velocity throughout.
  3. The resultant motion is parabolic if the initial velocity \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{u}}\) is not in line with the acceleration \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{a}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{a}}\) = constant.
    e.g., trajectory of a projectile motion.
  4. Similarly, various other combinations of initial velocity and acceleration will result into more complicated motions.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion

Question 3.
State Newton’s first law of motion.
Answer:
Statement: Every inanimate object continues to be in a state of rest or of uniform unaccelerated motion along a straight line, unless it is acted upon by an external, unbalanced force.

Question 4.
An astronaut accidentally gets separated out of his small spaceship accelerating in inter stellar space at a constant rate of 100 m s-2. What is the acceleration of the astronaut the instant after he is outside the spaceship? (Assume that there are no nearby stars to exert gravitational force on him.) (NCERT)
Answer:

  1. Assuming absence of stars in the vicinity, the only gravitational force exerted on astronaut is by the spaceship.
  2. But this force is negligible.
  3. Hence, once astronaut is out of the spaceship net external force acting on him can be taken as zero.
  4. From the first law of motion, the acceleration of astronaut is zero.

Question 5.
Give the magnitude and direction of the net force acting on:

  1. a drop of rain falling down with a constant speed.
  2. a cork of mass 10 g floating on water.
  3. a kite skilfully held stationary in the sky.
  4. a car moving with a constant velocity of 30 kmh-1 on a rough road.
  5. a high speed electron in space far from all gravitating objects, and free of electric and magnetic fields. (NCERT)

Answer:

  1. The drop of rain falls down with a constant speed, hence according to the first law of motion, the net force on the drop of rain is zero.
  2. Since the 10 g cork is floating on water, its weight is balanced by the up thrust due to water. Therefore, net force on the cork is zero.
  3. As the kite is skilfully held stationary in the sky, in accordance with first law of motion, the net force on the kite is zero.
  4. As the car is moving with a constant velocity of 30 km/h on a road, the net force on the car is zero.
  5. As the high-speed electron in space is far from all material objects, and free of electric and magnetic fields, it doesn’t accelerate and moves with constant velocity. Hence, net force acting on the electron is zero.

Question 6.
State Newton’s second law of motion and its importance.
Answer:
Statement: The rate of change of linear momentum of a rigid body is directly proportional to the applied (external unbalanced) force and takes place in the direction of force.
\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}=\frac{\mathrm{d} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{p}}}{\mathrm{dt}}\)
Where, \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}\) = Force applied
p = m\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}\) = linear momentum

Importance of Newton’s second law:

  1. It gives mathematical formulation for quantitative measure of force as rate of change of linear momentum.
  2. It defines momentum instead of velocity as the fundamental quantity related to motion.
  3. It takes into consideration the resultant unbalanced force on a body which is used to overcome Aristotle’s fallacy.

Question 7.
Explain why a cricketer moves his hands backwards while holding a catch. (NCERT)
Answer:

  1. In the act of catching the ball, by drawing hands backward, cricketer allows longer time for his hands to stop the ball.
  2. By Newton’s second law of motion, force applied depends on the rate of change of momentum.
  3. Taking longer time to stop the ball ensures smaller rate of change of momentum.
  4. Due to this the cricketer can stop the ball by applying smaller amount of force and thereby not hurting his hands.

Question 8.
Large force always produces large change in momentum on a body than a small force. Is this correct?
Answer:
No. From Newton’s second law, we have.
\(\frac{\mathrm{dP}}{\mathrm{dt}}=\mathrm{F}\) …. (i)
dP = Fdt …. (ii)
From equation (ii), we can infer that a small force acting for a longer time can produce same change in momentum of a body as a large force acting in the same direction for a short time. Hence, the given statement is incorrect.

Question 9.
Newton’s first law is contained in the second law. Prove it.
Answer:

  1. From Newton’s second law of motion, we have, \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}=\frac{\mathrm{d} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{p}}}{\mathrm{dt}}=\frac{\mathrm{d}}{\mathrm{dt}}(\mathrm{m} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}})\)
  2. For a given body, mass m is constant.
    ∴ \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}=\mathrm{m} \frac{\mathrm{d} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}}{\mathrm{dt}}=\mathrm{m} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{a}}\)
  3. If \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}\) = zero, \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}\) is constant. Hence if there is no force, velocity will not change. This is nothing but Newton’s first law of motion.

Question 10.
State Newton’s third law of motion
Answer:
Statement: To every action (force) there is always an equal and opposite reaction force).

Question 11.
State the importance of Newton’s third law of motion.
Answer:

  1. Newton’s third law of motion defines action and reaction as a pair of equal and opposite forces acting along the same line.
  2. Action and reaction forces always act on different objects.

Question 12.
State the consequences of Newton’s third law of motion.
Answer:

  1. Two interacting bodies exert forces which are always equal in magnitude, have the same line of action and are opposite in direction, upon each other. Thus, forces always occur in pairs.
  2. If a body A exerts an action force \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{\mathrm{BA}}\) on body B, then body B also exerts an equal and opposite reaction force \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{\mathrm{AB}}\) on body A, simultaneously.
  3. Body A experiences the force \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{\mathrm{AB}}\) only and
    body B experiences the force \overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{\mathrm{BA}} only.
  4. Both the forces, action and reaction act at the same instant.
  5. Both the forces always act on different bodies. Hence, they never cancel each other.
  6. Both the forces do not necessarily arise due to contact i.e., they can be non-contact forces. Example: Repulsive forces between two magnets.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion

Question 13.
If a constant force of 800 N produces an acceleration of 5 m/s2 in a body, what is its mass? If the body starts from rest, how much distance will it travel in 10 s?
Solution:
Given: F = 800 N, a = 5 m/s2, u = 0, t = 10 s
To find: mass (m), distance travelled (s)
Formulae:

i. F = ma
ii. s = ut + \(\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{at}^{2}\)

Calculation:
From formula (i),
∴ m = \(\frac{\mathrm{F}}{\mathrm{a}}=\frac{800}{5}\) = 160 kg
From formula (ii),
s = \(\frac{1}{2}\) × 5 × (10)2 [∵ u = 0]
∴ s = 250 m
Answer:
Mass of the body is 160 kg and the distance travelled by the body is 250 m.

Question 14.
A constant force acting on a body of mass 3 kg changes its speed from 2 m s-1 to 3.5 m/s in 25 s. The direction of motion of the body remains unchanged. What is the magnitude and direction of the force? (NCERT)
Solution:
Given: u = 2 ms-1, m = 3 kg,
v = 3.5 m s-1, t = 25s
To find: Force (F)
Formula: F = ma
Calculation: Since, v = u + at
∴ 3.5 = 2 + a × 25
a = \(\frac{3.5-2}{25}\) = 0.06 m s-2
From formula,
F = 3 × 0.06 = 0.18 N
Since, the applied force increases the speed of the body, it acts in the direction of the motion.
Answer:
The applied force is 0.18 N along the direction of motion.

Question 15.
A constant retarding force of 50 N is applied to a body of mass 20 kg moving initially with a speed of 15 ms-1. How long does the body take to stop? (NCERT)
Solution:
Given: m = 20 kg, u = 15ms-1, v = 0,
F = – 50 N (retarding force)
To find: Time (t)
Formula: v = u + at
Calculation: Since, F = ma
∴ a = \(\frac{\mathrm{F}}{\mathrm{m}}=\frac{-50}{20}\) = -2.5 m s-2
From formula,
0 = 15 + (-2.5) × t
∴ t = 6s
Answer:
Time taken to stop the body is 6 s.

Question 16.
A hose pipe used for gardening is ejecting water horizontally at the rate of 0.5 m/s. Area of the bore of the pipe is 10 cm2. Calculate the force to be applied by the gardener to hold the pipe horizontally stationary.
Solution:
Let ejecting water horizontally be considered as the action force on the water, then the water exerts a backward force (called recoil force) on the pipe as the reaction force.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 1
Where, V = volume of water ejected
A = area of cross section of bore = 10 cm2
ρ = density of water = 1 g/cc
l = length of the water ejected in time t
\(\frac{\mathrm{d} l}{\mathrm{dt}}\) = v = velocity of water ejected
= 0.5 m/s = 50 cm/s
F = \(\frac{\mathrm{dm}}{\mathrm{dt}} \mathrm{v}\)
= (Aρv) v
= Aρv2
= 10 × 1 × 502
∴ F = 25000 dyne = 0.25 N
Answer:
The gardener must apply an equal and opposite force of 0.25 N.

Question 17.
What does the term frame of reference mean?
Answer:
A system of co-ordinate axes with reference to which the position or motion of an object is described is called a frame of reference.

Question 18.
Explain the terms inertial and non-inertial frame of reference.
Answer:

  1. Inertial frame of reference:
    • A frame of reference in which Newton ‘s first law of motion is applicable is called inertia/frame of reference.
    • A body moves with a constant velocity (which can be zero) in the absence of a net force. The body does not accelerate.
    • Example: A rocket in inter-galactic space (gravity free space between galaxies) with all its engine shut.
  2. Non-inertial frame of reference:
    • A frame of reference in which an object suffers acceleration in absence of net force is called non-inertial frame of reference.
    • The body undergoes acceleration.
    • Example: If a car just start its motion from rest, then during the time of acceleration the car will be in a non-inertial frame of reference.

Question 19.
State the limitations of Newton’s laws of motion.
Answer:

  1. Newton’s laws of motion are not applicable in a non-inertial (accelerated) frame of reference.
  2. Newton’s laws are only applicable to point objects.
  3. Newton’s laws are only applicable to rigid bodies.
  4. Results obtained by applying Newton’s laws of motion for objects moving with speeds comparable to that of light do not match with the experimental results and Einstein special theory of relativity has to be used.
  5. Newton’s laws of motion fail to explain the behaviour and interaction of objects having atomic or molecular sizes, and quantum mechanics has to be used.

Question 20.
Name the different types of fundamental forces in nature.
Answer:
Fundamental forces in nature are classified into four types:

  1. Gravitational force
  2. Electromagnetic force
  3. Strong nuclear force
  4. Weak nuclear force

Question 21.
Define gravitational force. Give its examples.
Answer:
Force of attraction between two (point) masses separated by a distance is called as gravitational force.
F = \(\mathrm{G} \frac{\mathrm{m}_{1} \mathrm{~m}_{2}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\)
where ‘G’ is constant called the universal gravitational constant = 6.67 × 10-11 Nm2/kg2

Examples:

  1. The motion of moon, artificial satellites around the earth and motion of planets around the sun is due to gravitational force of attraction.
  2. The concept of weight of a body in the earth’s gravitational field is due to gravitational force exerted by the earth on a body.

Question 22.
Write down the main characteristics of gravitational force.
Answer:
Characteristics of gravitational force:

  1. It is always attractive.
  2. It is the weakest of the four basic forces in nature.
  3. Its range is infinite.
  4. Structure of the universe is governed by this force.

Question 23.
Write a note on electromagnetic (EM) force.
Answer:
Electromagnetic force:

  1. The attractive and repulsive force between electrically charged particles is called electromagnetic force.
  2. It can be attractive or repulsive.
  3. It is stronger than the gravitational force.
  4. Example: force of friction, normal reaction, tension in strings, collision forces, elastic forces, fluid friction etc. are electromagnetic in nature.
  5. Reaction forces are a result of the action of electromagnetic forces.
  6. Since majority of forces are electromagnetic in nature, our life is practically governed by these forces.

Question 24.
Write a note on strong and weak nuclear force.
Answer:

  1. Strong nuclear force: The strong force which binds protons and neutrons (nucleons) together in the nucleus of an atom is called strong nuclear force.
    Characteristics of strong nuclear force:

    • It is a very strong attractive force.
    • It is a short range force of the order of 10-14 m.
    • it is charge independent.
  2. Weak nuclear force: The force of interaction between subatomic particles which results in the radioactive decay of atoms is called weak nuclear force.

Characteristics of weak nuclear force:

  • It acts between any two elementary particles (pair of subatomic particles).
  • It is a stronger force than gravitational force.
  • It is much weaker than electromagnetic force or strong nuclear force.
  • It is a short range force of the order of 10-16m.

Question 25.
Three identical point masses are fixed symmetrically on the periphery of a circle. Obtain the resultant gravitational force on any point mass M at the centre of the circle. Extend this idea to more than three identical masses symmetrically located on the periphery. How far can you extend this concept?
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 2
i. Consider three identical points A, B and C of mass m on the periphery of a circle of radius r. Mass M is at the centre of the circle.
Gravitational forces on M due to these masses are attractive and are given as,
In magnitude, \(\mathrm{F}_{\mathrm{MA}}=\mathrm{F}_{\mathrm{MB}}=\mathrm{F}_{\mathrm{MC}}=\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\)

ii. Forces \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{\mathrm{MB}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{\mathrm{MC}}\) are resolved along \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{\mathrm{MA}}\) and perpendicular to \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{\mathrm{MA}}\). Components perpendicular to \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{\mathrm{MA}}\) cancel each other. Components along \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{\mathrm{MA}}\) are,
FMB cos 60° = FMC cos 60° = \(\frac{1}{2} F_{M A}\) each.

Magnitude of their resultant is FMA and its direction is opposite to that of FMA. Thus, the
resultant force on mass M is zero. For any even number of equal masses, the force due to any mass m is balanced (cancelled) by diametrically opposite mass. For any odd number of masses, the components perpendicular to one of them cancel each other while the components parallel to one of these add up in such a way that the resultant is zero for any number of identical masses m located symmetrically on the periphery.

As the number of masses tends to infinity, their collective shape approaches circumference of the circle, which is nothing but a ring. Thus, the gravitational force exerted by a ring mass on any other mass at its centre is zero.

iii. This concept can be further extended to three-dimensions by imagining a uniform hollow sphere to be made up of infinite number of such rings with a common diameter. Thus, the gravitational force for any mass kept at the centre of a hollow sphere is zero.

Question 26.
A car of mass 1.5 ton is running at 72 kmph on a straight horizontal road. On turning the engine off, it stops in 20 seconds. While running at the same speed, on the same road, the driver observes an accident 50 m in front of him. He immediately applies the brakes and just manages to stop the car at the accident spot. Calculate the braking force.
Solution:
Given: m = 1.5 ton = 1500 kg,
u = 72 kmph = 72 × \(\frac{5}{18} \mathrm{~m} / \mathrm{s}\)m/s = 20 m
s-1 (on turning engine off),
v = 0, t = 20 s, s = 50 m
To find: Braking force (F)

Formula:

i. v = u + at
ii. v2 – u2 = 2as
iii. F = ma

Calculation:
On turning the engine off,
From formula (i),
a = \(\frac{0-20}{20}\) = -1 m s-2
This is frictional retardation (negative acceleration).
After seeing the accident,
From formula (ii),
a1 = \(\frac{0^{2}-20^{2}}{2(50)}\) = -4 m s-2
This retardation is the combined effect of braking and friction
∴ braking retardation =4 – 1 = 3 m s-2
From formula (iii), the braking force, F = 1500 × 3 = 4500 N
Answer:
The braking force is 4500 N.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion

Question 27.
A body constrained to move along the z-axis of a coordinate system is subject to a constant force F given by \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{F}}=(-\hat{\mathbf{i}}+2 \hat{\mathbf{j}}+3 \hat{\mathbf{k}})\) N where \(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\), \(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\), \(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\) are unit vectors along the x, y and z axis of the system respectively. What is the work done by this force in moving the body a distance of 4 m along the z-axis? (NCERT)
Solution:
Given: \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{F}}=(-\hat{\mathbf{i}}+2 \hat{\mathbf{j}}+3 \hat{\mathbf{k}})\) N, \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{s}}=4 \hat{\mathrm{k}}\)
To find: work done (W)

Formula: W = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}} \cdot \overrightarrow{\mathrm{s}}\)
Calculation: From formula,
W = \((-\hat{\mathrm{i}}+2 \hat{\mathrm{j}}+3 \hat{\mathrm{k}}) \cdot(4 \hat{\mathrm{k}})\)
= \(12 \hat{\mathrm{k}} \cdot \hat{\mathrm{k}}\) = 12 J
Answer:
The work done by the force is in moving the body 12 J.

Question 28.
Over a given region, a force (in newton) varies as F = 3x2 – 2x + 1. In this region, an object is displaced from x1 = 20 cm to x2 = 40 cm by the given force. Calculate the amount of work done.
Solution:
Given: F = 3x2 – 2x + 1, x1 = 20 cm = 0.2 m,
x2 = 40 cm = 0.4 m.
To find: Work done (W)
Formula: W = \(\int_{A}^{B} \vec{F} \cdot \overrightarrow{d s}\)
Calculation:
From formula,
W = \(\int_{x_{1}}^{x_{2}} F \cdot d x=\int_{0.2}^{0.4}\left(3 x^{2}-2 x+1\right) d x\)
= [x3 – x2 + x]0.4
= [0.43 – 0.42 + 0.4] – [0.23 – 0.22 + 0.2]
= 0.304 – 0.168 = 0.136 J
The work done is 0.136 J.

Question 29.
A position dependent force f = 7 – 2x + 3x2 newton acts on a small body of mass 2 kg and displaces from x = 0 m to x = 5 m, calculate the work done.
Solution:
Given: F = 7 – 2x + 3x2, x = 0 at A and x = 5 at B.
To find: Work done (W)
Formula: W = \(\int_{A}^{B} \vec{F} \cdot \overrightarrow{d s}\)
Calculation: From formula,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 3
∴ W = 135 J
Answer:
The work done is 135 J.

Question 30.
State the principle of work-energy theorem in case of a conservative force and explain.
OR
Show that work done on a body by a conservative force is equal to the change in its kinetic energy
Answer:
Principle: Decrease in the potential energy due to work done by a conservative force is entirely converted into kinetic energy. Vice versa, for an object moving against a conservative force, its kinetic energy decreases by an amount equal to the work done against the force.

Work-energy theorem in case of a conservative force:

  1. Consider an object of mass m moving with velocity u experiencing a constant opposing force F which slows it down to v during displacement s.
  2. The equation of motion can be written as, v2 – u2 = -2as (negative acceleration for
    opposing force.)
    Multiplying throughout by \(\frac{\mathrm{m}}{2}\), we get,
    \(\frac{\mathrm{1}}{2}\)mu2 – \(\frac{\mathrm{1}}{2}\)mv2 = (ma)s …. (1)
  3. According to Newton’s second law of motion,
    F = ma … (2)
  4. From equations (1) and (2), we get,
    \(\frac{\mathrm{1}}{2}\)mu2 – \(\frac{\mathrm{1}}{2}\)mv2 = F.s
  5. But, \(\frac{\mathrm{1}}{2}\)mv2= Kf = final K.E of the body,
    \(\frac{\mathrm{1}}{2}\)mu2 = Ki = initial K.E of the body. and, work done by the force = F.s
    ∴ work done by the force = kf – ki
    = decrease in K.E of the body.
  6. Thus, work done on a body by a conservative force is equal to the change in its kinetic energy.

Question 31.
Explain the work-energy theorem in case of an accelerating conservative force along with a retarding non-conservative force.
Answer:

  1. Consider an object dropped from some point at height h.
  2. While coming down its potential energy decreases.
    ∴ Work done = decrease in P.E of the body.
  3. But, in this case, some part of the energy is used in overcoming the air resistance. This part of energy appears in some other forms such as heat, sound, etc. Thus, the work is not entirely converted into kinetic energy. In this case, the work-energy theorem can mathematically be written as,
    ∴ ∆ PE = ∆ K.E. + Wair resistance
    ∴ Decrease in the gravitational P.E. = Increase in the kinetic energy + work done against non-conservative forces.

Question 32.
A liquid drop of 1.00 g falls from height of cliff 1.00 km. It hits the ground with a speed of 50 m s-1. What is the work done by the unknown force? (Take g = 9.8 m/s2)
Solution:
Given: m = 1.0 g = 1.0 × 10-3 kg,
h = 1 km = 103 m, v = 50 ms-1
To find: Work done (Wf)
Formula: Wf = ∆ K.E – Wg

Calculation:

i. The change in kinetic energy of the drop
∆ K.E = (K.E.)final (K.E.)initial
∴ ∆ K.E. = \(\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{mv}^{2}-0\)
= \(\frac{1}{2} \times 1.0 \times 10^{-3} \times(50)^{2}\)
∴ ∆ K.E.= 1.25 J

ii. Work done by the gravitational force is,
Wg = mgh = 1.0 × 10-3 × 9.8 × 103 = 9.8 J
∴ Wg = 9.8J
From formula,
Wf = ∆K.E. – Wg = 1.25 – 9.8
Wf = -8.55 J
Answer:
Work done by the unknown force is – 8.55 J.

Question 33.
A body of mass 0.5 kg travels in a straight line with velocity y = ax3/2, where a = 5 m1/2s-1. What is the work done by the net force during its displacement from x = 0 to x = 2m? (NCERT)
Solution:
Given: M = 0.5 kg, y = ax3/2,
where a = 5 m-1/2s-1
Let v1 and v2 be the velocities of the body, when x = 0 and x = 2 m respectively. Then,
v1 = 5 × 03/2 = 0, v2 = 5 × 23/2 = \(10 \sqrt{2}\) m
To find: Work done (W)
Formula: Work done = Increase in kinetic energy
W = \(\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{M}\left(\mathrm{v}_{2}^{2}-\mathrm{v}_{1}^{2}\right)\)
Calculation: From formula,
W = \(\frac{1}{2}\) × 0.5 × [latex](10 \sqrt{2})^{2}-0^{2}[/latex]
∴ W = 50J
Answer:
Work done by the net force on the body is 50 J.

Question 34.
A particle of mass 12 kg is acted upon by a force f = (100 – 2x2) where f is in newton and ‘x’ is in metre. Calculate the work done by this force in moving the particle x = 0 to x = -10 m. What will be the speed at x = 10 m if it starts from rest?
Solution:
Given: F = 100 – 2x2
at A, x = 0 and at B, x = -10 m
To find: Work done (W), speed (v)

Formulae:

i. W = \(\int_{A}^{B} \vec{F} \cdot d s\)
ii. W = K.E. = \(\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{mv}^{2}\)

Calculation:
From formula (i),
W = \(\int_{A}^{B} \vec{F} \cdot \overline{d s}=\int_{x=0}^{x=-10} F d x\)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 4
Answer:

  1. Work done by the force on the particle is 333.3 J.
  2. The speed of the particle at x = 10 will be 7.45 m/s.

Question 35.
Define free body diagram. In the figure given below, draw the free body diagrams for mass of 2 kg, 4 kg and 5 kg and hence state their force equations.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 5
Answer:
i. The diagram showing the forces acting on only one body at a time along-with its acceleration is called a free body diagram.

ii. The free body diagram for the mass of 2 kg is
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 6
Free body diagram for 2 kg mass
The force equation is given as,
2a = T3 – 2g

iii. The free body diagram for the mass of 4 kg is,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 7
The force equation is given as, 4a = T1 + 4g – T2

iv. The free body diagram for the mass of 5kg is,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 8

The force equation for the mass of 5 kg is given as,
N + F sin 60° = 5g, along the vertical direction.
T1 + 10 = F cos 60°, along the horizontal direction (Considering the mass is in equilibrium).

Question 36.
Figure shows a fixed pulley. A massless inextensible string with masses m1 and m2 > m1 attached to its two ends is passing over the pulley. Such an arrangement is called an Atwood machine. Calculate accelerations of the masses and force due to the tension along the string assuming axle of the pulley to be frictionless.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 9
Solution:
Method I: As m2 > m1, mass m2 is moving downwards and mass m1 is moving upwards.
Net downward force = F = (m2) g – (m1) g
= (m2 – m1)g
the string being inextensible, both the masses travel the same distance in the same time. Thus, their accelerations are equal in magnitude (one upward, other downward). Let it be a.
Total mass in motion, M = m2 + m1
∴ a = \(\frac{F}{M}=\left(\frac{m_{2}-m_{1}}{m_{2}+m_{1}}\right) g\) …. (i)

For mass m1, the upward force is the force due to tension T and downward force is mg. It has upward acceleration a. Thus, T – m1g = m1a
∴ T = m1(g + a)
Using equation (i), we get,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 10
From the free body equation for the first body,
T – m1g = m1a .. (i)

From the free body equation for the second body,
m2g – T = m2a … (ii)
Adding (i) and (ii), we get,
a = \(\left(\frac{\mathrm{m}_{2}-\mathbf{m}_{1}}{\mathrm{~m}_{2}+\mathrm{m}_{1}}\right) \mathbf{g}\) ….(iii)
Solving equations. (ii) and (iii) for T, we get,
T = m2(g – a) = \(\left(\frac{2 m_{1} m_{2}}{m_{1}+m_{2}}\right) g\)

Question 37.
Write a note on elastic collision.
Answer:

  1. Collision between two bodies in which kinetic energy of the entire system is conserved along with the linear momentum is called as elastic collision.
  2. In an elastic collision,
    \(\mathrm{m}_{1} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{u}_{1}}+\mathrm{m}_{2} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{u}_{2}}=\mathrm{m}_{1} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}_{1}}+\mathrm{m}_{2} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}_{2}\)
  3. In an elastic collision,
    \(\sum \mathrm{K} \cdot \mathrm{E}_{\text {‘initial }}=\sum \mathrm{K} \cdot \mathrm{E}_{\text {. final }}\)
  4. An elastic collision is impossible in daily life.
  5. However, in many situations, the interatomic and intermolecular collisions are considered to be elastic.

Question 38.
Write a note on inelastic collision.
Answer:

  1. A collision is said to be inelastic if there is a loss in the kinetic energy during collision, but linear momentum is conserved.
  2. In an inelastic collision, m1u1 + m2u2 = m1v1 + m2v2.
  3. In an inelastic collision,
    \(\sum \mathrm{K} \cdot \mathrm{E}_{\text {.initial }} \neq \sum \mathrm{K} \cdot \mathrm{E}_{\text {.final }}\)
  4. The loss in kinetic energy is either due to internal friction or vibrational motion of atoms causing heating effect.

Question 39.
Define perfectly inelastic collision. Give an example of it.
Answer:

  1. Collision in which the colliding bodies stick together after collision and move with a common velocity is called perfectly inelastic collision.
  2. The loss in kinetic energy is maximum in perfectly elastic collision.
  3. Example: Lump of mud thrown on a wall sticks to the wall due to the loss of kinetic energy.

Question 40.
In case of an elastic head on collision between two bodies, derive an expression for the final velocities of the bodies in terms of their masses and velocities before collision.
Answer:
Head on elastic collision of two spheres:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 11

i. Consider two rotating smooth bodies A and B of masses m1 and m2 respectively moving
along the same straight line.

ii. Let \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{u}}_{1}\) = initial velocity of the sphere A before collision.
\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{u}}_{2}\) = initial velocity of the sphere B before collision.
\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}_{1}\) = velocity of the sphere A after collision.
\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}_{2}\) = velocity of the sphere B after collision.

iii. After the elastic collision, the spheres separate and move along the same straight line without rotation.

iv. According to the law of conservation of momentum,
m1\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{u}}_{1}\) + m2\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{u}}_{2}\) = m1\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}_{1}\) + m2\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}_{2}\) ….(i)
According to the law of conservation of energy (as kinetic energy is conserved during elastic collision),
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 12

v. Since kinetic energy is a scalar quantity, the terms involved in the above equations are scalars.

vi. The equation (1) can be written in scalar form as,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 13

vii. Also the equation (2) can be written as,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 14

viii. Now dividing equation (4) by (3) we get,
(u1 + v1) = (u2 + v2)
∴ u1 + v1 = u2 + v2
∴ v2 = u1 – u2 + v1 … (5)

ix. Comparing equation (3) and (5),
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 15
Equations, (6) and (7), represent the final velocities of two spheres after collision.

Question 41.
Are you aware of elasticity of materials? Is there any connection between elasticity of materials and elastic collisions?
Answer:
(Students should answer the question as per their understanding).

Question 42.
Two bodies undergo one-dimensional, inelastic, head-on collision. State an expression for their final velocities in terms
of their masses, initial velocities and coefficient of restitution.
Answer:
If e is the coefficient of restitution, the final velocities after an inelastic, head on collision are given as,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 16

Question 43.
Two bodies undergo one-dimensional, inelastic, head-on collision. State an expression for the loss in the kinetic energy.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 17
ii. As e < 1, (1 – e2) is always positive. Thus, there is always a loss of kinetic energy in an inelastic collision.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion

Question 44.
Two bodies undergo one-dimensional, inelastic, head-on collision. Obtain an expression for the magnitude of impulse.
Answer:
i. When two bodies undergo collision, the linear momentum delivered by the first body to the second body must be equal to the change in momentum or impulse of the second body and vice versa.
∴ Impulse,
|J| = |∆p1| = |∆p2|
= |m1v1 – m1u1| = |m2v2 – m2u2| ….(1)

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 18
In equation (1) and solving, we get,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 19

Question 45.
Two bodies undergo one-dimensional, perfectly inelastic, head-on collision. Derive an expression for the loss in the kinetic energy.
Answer:
i. Let two bodies A and B of masses m1 and m2 move with initial velocity \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{u}}_{1}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{u}}_{2}\), respectively such that particle A collides head on with particle B i.e., u1 > u2.

ii. If the collision is perfectly inelastic, the particles stick together and move with a common velocity \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}\) after the collision along the same straight line.
loss in kinetic energy = total initial kinetic energy – total final kinetic energy.

iii. By the law of conservation of momentum,
m1u1 + m2u2 = (m1 + m2)v
∴ v = \(\frac{\mathrm{m}_{1} \mathrm{u}_{1}+\mathrm{m}_{2} \mathrm{u}_{2}}{\mathrm{~m}_{1}+\mathrm{m}_{2}}\)

iv. Loss of Kinetic energy,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 20

iv. Both the masses and the term (u1 – u2)2 are positive. Hence, there is always a loss in a perfectly inelastic collision. For a perfectly inelastic collision, as e = 0, the loss is maximum.

Question 46.
Distinguish between elastic and inelastic collision.
Answer:

No. Elastic Collision Inelastic Collision
i. In an elastic collision, both momentum and kinetic energy are conserved. In an inelastic collision, momentum is conserved but kinetic energy is not conserved.
ii. The total kinetic energy after collision is equal to the total kinetic energy before collision. The total kinetic energy after the collision is not equal to the total kinetic energy before collision.
iii. Coefficient of restitution (e) is equal to one. Coefficient of restitution (e) is less than one. For a perfectly inelastic collision coefficient of restitution is equal to zero.
iv. Bodies do not stick together in elastic collision. Bodies stick together in a perfectly inelastic collision.
v. Sound, heat and light are not produced. Sound or light or heat or all of these may be produced.

Question 47.
Explain elastic collision in two dimensions.
Answer:
i. Suppose a particle of mass mi moving with initial velocity \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{u}_{1}}\), undergoes a non head-on collide with another particle of mass m2 and initial velocity \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{u}_{2}}\).
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 21

ii. Let us consider two mutually perpendicular directions; Common tangent at the point of impact, along which there is no force (or no change of momentum).
Line of impact which is perpendicular to the common tangent through the point of impact, in the two-dimensional plane of initial and final velocities.

iii. Applying the law of conservation of linear momentum along the line of impact, we have, m1u1 cos α1 + m2u2 cos α2 = m1v1 cos β1 + m2v2 cos β2
As there is no force along the common tangent,
m1u1 sin α1 = m1u1 sin β1 and m2u2 sin α2 = m2v2 sin β2
iv. Coefficient of restitution (e) along the line of impact is given as
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 22

Question 48.
Two bodies undergo a two-dimensional collision. State an expression for the magnitude of impulse along the line of impact and the loss in kinetic energy.
Answer:
i. For two bodies undergoing a two-dimensional collision, the magnitude of impulse along the line of impact is given as, Magnitude of the impulse, along the line of impact,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 23

ii. The loss in the kinetic energy is given as Loss in the kinetic energy = ∆ (K.E.)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 24

Question 49.
0ne marble collides head-on with another identical marble at rest. If the collision is partially inelastic, determine the ratio of their final velocities in terms of coefficient of restitution e.
Solution:
According to conservation of momentum,
m1u1 + m2u2 = m1v1 + m2v2
As m1 = m2, we get, u1 + u2 = v1 + v2
∴ If u2 = 0, we get, v1 + v2 = u1 ….. (i)
Coefficient of restitution,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 25

Question 50.
A 10 kg mass moving at 5 m/s collides head- on with a 4 kg mass moving at 2 m/s in the same direction. If e = \(\frac{1}{2}\), find their velocity after impact.
Solution:
Given: m1 = 10 kg, m2 = 4 kg
u1 = 5 m/s, u2 = 2 m/s, e = \(\frac{1}{2}\)
To find: Velocity after impact (v1 and v2)

Formulae:

i. m1u1 + m2u2 = m1v1 + m2v2
ii. e = \(\left(\frac{v_{2}-v_{1}}{u_{1}-u_{2}}\right)\)

Calculation:

From formula (i),
10 × 5 + 4 × 2 = 10v1 + 4v2
∴ 5v1 + 2v2 = 29 … (1)

From formula (ii),
v2 – v1 = e(u1 – u2) = \(\frac{1}{2}\) (5 – 2) = \(\frac{3}{2}\)
∴ 2v2 – 2v1 = 3 … (2)
Solving (1) and (2), we have
∴ v1 = \(\frac{26}{7}\) m/s and v2 = \(\frac{73}{14}\) m/s
Answer:
The respective velocities of the two masses are \(\frac{26}{7}\) m/s and \(\frac{73}{14}\) m/s.

Question 51.
A metal ball falls from a height 1 m on a steel plate and jumps upto a height of 0.81 m. Find the coefficient of restitution.
Solution:
As the ball falls to the steel plate P.E changes to kinetic energy.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 26
As ground is stationary, both its initial and final velocities are zero.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 27

Question 52.
Two bodies of masses 5 kg and 3 kg moving in the same direction along the same straight line with velocities 5 m s-1 and 3 m s-1 respectively suffer one-dimensional elastic collision. Find their velocities after the collision.
Solution:
Given: m1 = 5kg, u1 = 5ms-1, m2 = 3kg, u2 = 3 m s-1
To find: velocities after collision (v1 and v2)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 281
Answer:
The velocities of the two bodies after collision are 3.5 m/s and 5.5 m/s.

Question 53.
A 20 g bullet leaves a machine gun with a velocity of 200 m/s. If the mass of the gun is 20 kg, find its recoil velocity. If the gun fires 20 bullets per second, what force is to be applied to the gun to prevent recoil?
Solution:
Given: m1 = 20g = 0.02 kg, m2 = 20 kg, v1 = 200 m/s, t = \(\frac{1}{20}\) s,
To find: Recoil velocity (v2), applied force (F)

Formulae:

i. v2 = \(-\frac{\mathrm{m}_{1} \mathrm{v}_{1}}{\mathrm{~m}_{2}}\)
ii. F = ma

Calculation: From formula (i),
∴ v2 = \(-\frac{0.02}{20} \times 200\)
= -0.2 m/s

Negative sign shows that the machine gun moves in a direction opposite to that of the bullet.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 29
From formula (ii),
∴ F = m2 × a = 20 × 4 = 80N
Answer:
The recoil velocity of gun is 0.2 m/s and the required force to prevent recoil is 80 N.

Question 54.
A shell of mass 3 kg is dropped from some height. After falling freely for 2 seconds, it explodes into two fragments of masses 2 kg and 1 kg. Kinetic energy provided by the explosion is 300 J. Using g = 10 m/s2, calculate velocities of the fragments. Justify your answer if you have more than one options.
Solution:
Total mass = m1 + m2 = 3 kg
Initially, when the shell falls freely for 2 seconds, v = u+ at = 0 + 10(2) = 20 ms-1 = u1 = u2
According to conservation of linear momentum,
m1u1 + m2u2 = m1v1 + m2v2
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 30
There are two possible answers since the positions of two fragments can be different as explained below.
Case 1: v1 = 30 m s-1 and v2 = 0 with the lighter fragment 2 above.
Case 2: v1 = 10 m s-1 and v2 = 40 m s-1 with the lighter fragment 2 below, both moving downwards.

Question 55.
Bullets of mass 40 g each, are fired from a machine gun at a rate of 5 per second towards a firmly fixed hard surface of area 10 cm2. Each bullet hits normal to the surface at 400 m/s and rebounds in such a way that the coefficient of restitution for the collision between bullet and the surface is 0.75. Calculate average force and average pressure experienced by the surface due to this firing.
Solution:
For the collision,
u1 = 400 m s-1, e = 0.75
For the firmly fixed hard surface, u2 = v2 = 0
e = 0.75 = \(\frac{v_{1}-v_{2}}{u_{2}-u_{1}}=\frac{v_{1}-0}{0-400}\)
∴ v1 = -300 m/s.
Negative sign indicates that the bullet rebounds in exactly opposite direction.
Change in momentum of each bullet = m(v1 – u1)
The same momentum is transferred to the surface per collision in opposite direction.
∴ Momentum transferred to the surface, per collision,
p = m (u1 – v1) = 0.04(400 – [-300]) = 28 Ns
The rate of collision is same as rate of firing.
∴ Momentum received by the surface per second, \(\frac{\mathrm{dp}}{\mathrm{dt}}\) = average force experienced by the surface = 28 × 5 = 140 N

This is the average force experienced by the surface of area A = 10 cm2 = 10-3 m2
∴ Average pressure experienced,
P = \(\frac{\mathrm{F}}{\mathrm{A}}=\frac{140}{10^{-3}}\) = 1.4 × 105 N m-2
∴ P ≈ 1.4 times the atmospheric pressure.
Answer:
The average force and average pressure experienced by the surface due to the firing is 140 N and 1.4 × 105 N m-2 respectively.

Question 56.
A shell of mass 0.020 kg is fired by a gun of mass 100 kg. If the muzzle speed of the shell is 80 m s-1, what is the recoil speed of the gun? (NCERT)
Solution:
Given: m1 = 0.02 kg, m2 = 100 kg, v1 = 80 m s-1
To find: Recoil speed (v2)
Formula: m1u1 + m2u2 = m1v1 + m2v2
Calculation: Initially gun and shell are at rest.
∴ m1u1 + m2u2 = 0
Final momentum = m1v1 – m2v2
Using formula,
0 = 0.02 (80) – 100(v2)
∴ v2 = \(\frac{0.02 \times 80}{100}\) = 0.016 ms-1
Answer:
The recoil speed of the gun is 0.016 m s-1.

Question 57.
Two billiard balls each of mass 0.05 kg moving in opposite directions with speed 6 m s-1 collide and rebound with the same speed. What is the impulse imparted to each bail due to the other? (NCERT)
Solution:
Given: m = 0.05 kg. u = 6 m/s, v = -6 m/s
To find: Impulse (J)
Formula: J = m (v – u)
calculation: From formula,
J = 0.05 (-6 – 6) = -0.6 kg m s-1
Answer:
Impulse received by each ball is -0.6 kg m s-1.

Question 58.
A bullet of mass 0.1 kg moving horizontally with a velocity of 20 m/s strikes a target and brought to rest in 0.1 s. Find the impulse and average force of impact.
Solution:
Given: m = 0.1 kg, u = 20 m/s, t = 0.1 s
To find: Impulse (J), Average force (F)

Formulae:

i. J = mv – mu
ii. F = \(m \frac{(v-u)}{t}\)

Calculation:

From formula (i).
J = m(v – u) = 0.1 (0 – 20) = -2 Ns
From formula (ii),
F = \(\frac{m(v-u)}{t}=\frac{2}{0.1}=20 N\)
Answer:
Magnitude of impulse is 2 Ns, average force of impact is 20 N.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion

Question 59.
A batsman deflects a ball by an angle of 45° without changing its initial speed which is equal to 54 km/h. What is the impulse imparted to the ball? (Mass of the ball is 0.15 kg) (NCERT)
Answer:
Let the point B represents the position of bat. The ball strikes the bat with velocity v along the path AB and gets deflected with same velocity along BC. such that ∠ABC = 45°
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 31
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 32
Thus, impulse imparted to the ball is 4.157 kg ms-1

Question 60.
A cricket ball of mass 150 g moving with a velocity of 12 m/s is turned back with a velocity of 20 m/s on hitting the bat. The force of the ball lasts for 0.01 s. Find the average force exerted on the ball by the bat.
Solution:
m = 0.150 kg, v = 20 m/s,
u = -12 m/s and t = 0.01 s
To find: Average force (F)
Formula: F = \(\frac{m(v-u)}{t}\)
Calculation: From formula,
F = \(\frac{0.150[20-(-12)]}{0.01}\) = 480 N
Answer:
The average force exerted on the ball by the bat is 480 N.

Question 61.
Mass of an Oxygen molecule is 5.35 × 10-26 kg and that of a Nitrogen molecule is 4.65 × 10-26 kg. During their Brownian motion (random motion) in air, an Oxygen molecule travelling with a velocity of 400 m/s collides elastically with a nitrogen molecule travelling with a velocity of 500 m/s in the exactly opposite direction. Calculate the impulse received by each of them during collision. Assuming that the collision lasts for
1 ms, how much is the average force experienced by each molecule?
Solution:
Let, m1 = mO = 5.35 × 10-26 kg,
m2 = mN = 4.65 × 10-26 kg,
∴ u1 = 400 ms-1 and u2 = -500 ms-1 taking direction of motion of oxygen molecule as the positive direction.
For an elastic collision,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 33
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 34
Hence, the net impulse or net change in momentum is zero.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 35
Answer:
The average force experienced by the nitrogen molecule and the oxygen molecule are
-4.478 × 10-20 N and 4.478 × 10-20 N.

Question 62.
Explain rotational analogue of the force. On what factors does it depend? Represent it in vector form.
Answer:

  1. Rotational analogue of the force is called as moment of force or torque.
  2. It depends on the mass of the object, the point of application of the force and the angle between direction of force and the line joining the axis of rotation with the point of application.
  3. In its mathematical form, torque or moment of a force is given by
    \(\vec{\tau}=\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}} \times \overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}\)
    where \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}\) is the applied force and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}}\) is the position vector of the point of application of the force from the axis of rotation.

Question 63.
Illustrate with an example how direction of the torque acting on any object is determined.
Answer:
i. Consider a laminar object with axis of rotation perpendicular to it and passing through it as shown in figure (a).
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 36

ii. Figure (b) indicates the top view of the object when the rotation is in anticlockwise direction
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 37

iii. Figure (c) shows the view from the top, if rotation is in clockwise direction.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 38

iv. The applied force \(\vec{F}\) and position vector \(\vec{r}\) of the point of application of the force are in the plane of these figures.

v. Direction of the torque is always perpendicular to the plane containing the vectors \(\vec{r}\) and \(\vec{F}\) and can be obtained from the rule of cross product or by using the right-hand thumb rule.

vi. In Figure (b), it is perpendicular to the plane of the figure and outwards while in the figure (c), it is inwards.

Question 64.
State the equation for magnitude of torque and explain various cases of angle between the direction of \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{r}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{F}}\).
Answer:
Magnitude of torque, \(\tau\) = r F sin θ
where θ is the smaller angle between the directions of \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{r}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{F}}\).

Special cases:

  1. If θ = 90°, \(\tau\) = \(\tau\)max = rF. Thus, the force should be applied along normal direction for easy rotation.
  2. If θ = 0° or 180°, \(\tau\) = \(\tau\)min = 0. Thus, if the force is applied parallel or anti-parallel to \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}}\), there is no rotation.
  3. Moment of a force depends not only on the magnitude and direction of the force, but also on the point where the force acts with respect to the axis of rotation. Same force can have different torque as per its point of application.

Question 65.
A force \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{F}}=\mathbf{3} \hat{\mathbf{i}}+\hat{\mathbf{j}}-\mathbf{4} \hat{\mathbf{k}}\) is applied at a point (3, 4, -2). Find its torque about the point (-1, 2, 4).
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 39

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion

Question 66.
Define couple. Show that moment of couple is independent of the points of application of forces.
Answer:
A pair of forces consisting of two forces of equal magnitude acting in opposite directions along different lines of action is called a couple.

  1. Figure shows a couple consisting of two forces \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{1}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{2}\) of equal magnitudes and opposite directions acting along different lines of action separated by a distance r.
  2. Position vector of any point on the line of action of force \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{1}\) from the line of action of force \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{2}\) is \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}}_{12}\). Similarly, the position vector of any point on the line of action of force \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{2}\) from the line of action of force \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{1}\) is \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}}_{21}\).
  3. Torque or moment of the couple is then given mathematically as
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 40
  4. From the figure, it is clear that r12 sinα = r21 sin β = r.
  5. If \(\left|\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{1}\right|=\left|\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{2}\right|\) = F, the magnitude of torque is given by
    \(\tau=\mathrm{r}_{12} \mathrm{~F}_{1} \sin \alpha\) = \(r_{21} F_{2} \sin \beta=r F\)
  6. It clearly shows that the torque corresponding to a given couple, i.e., the moment of a given couple is constant, i.e., it is independent of the points of application of forces.

Question 67.
The figure below shows three situations of a ball at rest under the action of balanced forces. Is the bail in mechanical equilibrium? Explain how the three situations differ.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 41
Answer:

  1. In all these cases, as the ball is at rest under the action of balanced forces i.e, there is no net force acting on it. Hence, it is in mechanical equilibrium.
    However, potential energy-wise, the three situations show the different states of mechanical equilibrium.
  2. Stable equilibrium: In situation (a), potential energy of the system is at its local minimum. If it is disturbed slightly from its equilibrium position and released, it tends to recover its position. In this situation, the ball is most stable and is said to be in stable equilibrium.
  3. Unstable equilibrium: In situation (b), potential energy of the system is at its local maximum. If it is slightly disturbed from its equilibrium position, it moves farther from that position. This happens because initially, if disturbed, it tries to achieve the configuration of minimum potential energy. In this situation, the ball is said to be in unstable equilibrium.
  4. Neutral equilibrium: in situation (e), potential energy of the system is constant over a plane and remains same at any position. Thus, even if the ball is disturbed, it still remains in equilibrium, practically at any position. In this situation, the ball is in neutral equilibrium.

Question 68.
Two weights 5 kg and 8 kg are suspended from a uniform rod of length 10 m and weighing 3 kg. The distances of the weights from one end are 2 m and 7 m. Find the point at which the rod balances.
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 42
Let the rod balance at a point P, x m from the end A of the rod AB. The suspended weight and the centre of gravity of the rod G is shown in the figure.
P = 5 + 3 + 8 = 16kg
Taking moments about A,
16 × x = 5 × 2 + 3 × 5 + 8 × 7
16x = 10 + 15 + 56 = 81
∴ x = \(\frac{81}{16}\) = 5.1 m
Answer:
The rod balances at 5.1 m from end A.

Question69.
A metre stick is balanced on a knife edge at its centre. When two coins, each of mass 5 g are put one on top of the other at the 12.0 cm mark, the stick is found to be balanced at 45.0 cm. What is the mass of the metre stick? (NCERT)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 43
Consider the metre scale AB. Let its mass be concentrated at C at 50 cm. mark. Upon placing coins, balancing point of the scale and the coins system is shifted to C’ at 45 cm mark.
For equilibrium about C’
10(45 – 12) = m (50 – 45)
m = \(\frac{10 \times 33}{5}\) = 66g
Answer:
The mass of the metre scale is 66 g.

Question 70.
The diagram shows a uniform beam of length 10 m, used as a balance. The beam is pivoted at its centre. A 5.0 N weight is attached to one end of the beam and an empty pan weighing 0.25 N Is attached to the other end of the beam.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 44
i. What is the moment of couple at pivot?
ii. If pivot is shifted 2 ni towards left, then what will be moment of couple at new position?
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 45
Answer:

  1. The moment of couple at center is 23.75 N-m.
  2. The moment of couple at new position is 13.25 N-m.
    ∴ For equilibrium,
    40 × x = 20 × 0.5
    ∴ x = \(\frac{1}{4}\) = 0.25 m

Hence, the total distance walked by the person is 1.25 m.

Ans
The person can walk 1.25 m before the plank topples.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion

Question 71.
Define centre of mass.
Answer:
Centre of mass of a body is a point about which the summation of moments of masses in the system is zero.

Question 72.
Derive an expression for the position of centre of mass of a system of n particles and for continuous mass distribution.
Answer:
System of n particles;
i. Consider a system of n particles of masses m1, m2, …, mn having position vectors \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}_{1}}\), \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}_{2}}\),….., \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}_{n}}\) from the origin O.
The total mass of the system is,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 46
Centre of mass for n particles

ii. Position vector \(\vec{r}\) of their centre of mass from the same origin is then given by
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 47

iii. If the origin is at the centre of mass, \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{r}}\) = 0
∴ \(\sum_{1}^{\mathrm{n}} \mathrm{m}_{\mathrm{i}} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}}_{\mathrm{i}}\) = 0,

iv. In this case, \(\sum_{1}^{n} m_{i} \vec{r}_{i}\) gives the moment of masses (similar to moment of force) about the centre of mass.

v. If (x1, x2, …… xn), (y1, y2, …..yn), (z1, z2, …. zn) are the respective x, y and z – coordinates of (r1, r2,…….. rn) then x,y and z – coordinates of the centre of mass are given by,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 48

vi. Continuous mass distribution: For a continuous mass distribution with uniform density, the position vector of the centre of mass is given by,
r = \(\frac{\int \vec{r} d m}{\int d m}=\frac{\int \vec{r} d m}{M}\)
Where \(\int \mathrm{dm}=\mathrm{M}\) is the total mass of the object.

vii. The Cartesian coordinates of centre of mass are
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 49

Question 73.
State the expression for velocity of the centre of mass of a system of n particles and for continuous mass distribution.
Answer:
Let v1, v2,…..vn be the velocities of a system of point masses m1, m2, … mn. Velocity of the centre of mass of the system is given by
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 50
x, y and z components of \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{v}}\) can be obtained similarly.
For continuous distribution, \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}_{\mathrm{cm}}\) = \(\frac{\int \vec{v} \mathrm{dm}}{\mathrm{M}}\)

Question 74.
State the expression for acceleration of the centre of mass of a system of n particles and for continuous mass distribution.
Answer:
Let a1, a2,…. an be the accelerations of a system of point masses m1, m2 … mn.
Acceleration of the centre of mass of the system is given by
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 51
x, y and z components of can be obtained similarly.
For continuous distribution, \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{a}}_{\mathrm{cm}}\) = \(\frac{\int \vec{a} d m}{\mathrm{M}}\)

Question 75.
State the characteristics of centre of mass.
Answer:

  1. Centre of mass is a hypothetical point at which entire mass of the body can be assumed to he concentrated.
  2. Centre of mass is a location, not a physical quantity.
  3. Centre of mass is particle equivalent of a given object for applying laws of motion.
  4. Centre of mass is the point at which applied force causes only linear acceleration and not angular acceleration.
  5. Centre of mass is located at the centroid, for a rigid body of uniform density.
  6. Centre of mass is located at the geometrical centre, for a symmetric rigid body of uniform density.
  7. Location of centre of mass can be changed only by an external unbalanced force.
  8. Internal forces (like during collision or explosion) never change the location of centre of mass.
  9. Position of the centre of mass depends only upon the distribution of mass, however, to describe its location we may use a coordinate system with a suitable origin.
  10. For a system of particles, the centre of mass need not coincide with any of the particles.
  11. While balancing an object on a pivot, the line of action of weight must pass through the centre of mass and the pivot. Quite often, this is an unstable equilibrium.
  12. Centre of mass of a system of only two particles divides the distance between the particles in an inverse ratio of their masses, i.e., it is closer to the heavier mass.
  13. Centre of mass is a point about which the summation of moments of masses in the system is zero.
  14. If there is an axial symmetry for a given object, the centre of mass lies on the axis of symmetry.
  15. If there are multiple axes of symmetry for a given object, the centre of mass is at their point of intersection.
  16. Centre of mass need not be within the body.
    Example: jumper doing fosbury flop.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion

Question 76.
The mass of moon is 0.0 123 times the mass of the earth and separation between them is 3.84 × 108 m. Determine the location of C.M as measured from the centre of the earth.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 52
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 53
Answer:
The location of centre of mass as measured from the center of the earth is 4.67 × 106 m.

Question 77.
Three particles of masses 3 g, 5 g and 8 g are situated at point (2, 2, 2), (-3, 1, 4) and (-1, 3, -2) respectively. Find the position vector of their centre of mass.
Solution:
m1 = 3 g, m2 = 5 g, m3 = 8 g, x1 = 2, y1 = 2, z1 = 2
x2 = -3, y2 = 1, z2 = 4,
x3 = -1, y3 = 3, z3 = -2
Let (X, Y, Z) be co-ordinates of C.M., then
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 54
The co-ordinates of the C.M. are \(\left(-\frac{17}{16}, \frac{35}{16}, \frac{5}{8}\right)\)
Answer:
The position vector of the C.M. is \(-\frac{17}{16} \hat{\mathbf{i}}+\frac{35}{16} \hat{\mathbf{j}}+\frac{5}{8} \hat{\mathbf{k}}\)

Question 78.
In the HCl molecule, the separation between the nuclei of the two atoms is about 1.27 Å (1 Å = 10-10 m). Find the approximate location of the CM of the molecule, given that a chlorine atom is about 35.5 times as massive as a hydrogen atom and nearly all the mass of an atom is concentrated in its nucleus. (NCERT)
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 55
Claculation: From formula
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 56
Answer:
The location of centre of mass from the nucleus of hydrogen atom is 1.235 A.

Question 79.
Three thin walled uniform hollow spheres of radii 1 cm, 2 cm and 3 cm are so located that their centres are on the three vertices of an equilateral triangle ABC having each side 10 cm. Determine centre of mass of the system.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 57
Solution:
Mass of a thin walled uniform hollow sphere is proportional to its surface area. (as density is constant) hence proportional to r2.

Thus, if mass of the sphere at A is mA = m, then mB = 4m and mC = 9m. By symmetry of the spherical surface, their centres of mass are at their respective centres, i.e., at A, B and C. Let us choose the origin to be at C, where the largest mass 9m is located and the point B with mass 4m on the positive x-axis. With this, the co-ordinates of C are (0, 0) and that of B are (10, 0). If A of mass m is taken in the first quadrant, its co-ordinates will be \([5,5 \sqrt{3}]\)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 58

Question 80.
Locate the centre of mass of three particles of mass m1 = 1 kg, m2 = 2 kg and m3 = 3 kg at the corner of an equilateral triangle of each side of 1 m.
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 59
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 60
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 61
Answer:
The centre of mass of the system of three particles lies at \(\left(\frac{2}{3} m, \frac{\sqrt{3}}{6} m\right)\) with respect to the particle of mass 1 kg as the origin.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion

Question 81.
A letter ‘E’ is prepared from a uniform cardboard with shape and dimensions as shown in the figure. Locate its centre of mass.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 62
Solution:
As the sheet is uniform, each square can be taken to be equivalent to mass m concentrated at its respective centre. These masses will then be at the points labelled with numbers 1 to 10, as shown in figure. Let us select the origin to be at the left central mass m5, as shown and all the co-ordinates to be in cm.

By symmetry, the centre of mass of m1, m2 and m3 will be at m2 (1, 2) having effective mass 3m. Similarly, effective mass 3m due to m8, m9 and m10 will be at m9 (1, -2). Again, by symmetry, the centre of mass of these two (3m each) will have co-ordinates (1, 0). Mass m6 is also having co-ordinates (1, 0). Thus, the
effective mass at (1, 0) is 7m.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 63
Using symmetry for m4, m5 and m7, there will be effective mass 3m at the origin (0, 0). Thus, effectively, 3m and 7m are separated by 1 cm along X-direction. Y-coordinate is not required.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 64

Question 82.
A hole of radius r is cut from a uniform disc of radius 2r. Centre of the hole is at a distance r from centre of the disc. Locate centre of mass of the remaining part of the disc.
Solution:
Before cutting the hole, c.în. of the full disc was at its centre. Let this be our origin O. Centre of mass of the cut portion is at its centre D. Thus, it is at a distance x1 = r form the origin. Let C be the centre of mass of the
remaining disc, which will he on the extension of the line DO at a distance x2 = x from the origin. As the disc is uniform, mass of any of its part is proportional to the area of that part.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 65
Thus, if m is the mass of the cut disc, mass of the entire disc must be 4m and mass of the remaining disc will be 3m.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 66

Alternate method: (Using negative mass):

Let \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\) be the position vector of the centre of mass of the uniform disc of mass M. Mass m is with centre of mass at position vector \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}}\) from the centre of the disc be cut out from the complete disc. Position vector of the centre of mass of the remaining disc is then given by
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 67

Question 83.
Define centre of gravity of a body. Under what conditions the centre of gravity and centre of mass coincide?
Answer:

  1. centre of gravity of a body is the point around which the resultant torque due to force of gravity on the body is zero.
  2. The centre of mass coincides with centre of gravity when the body is in a uniform gravitational field.

Question 84.
Explain how to find the location of centre of mass or centre of gravity of a laminar object.
Answer:

  1. A laminar object is suspended from a rigid support at two orientations.
  2. Lines are drawn on the object parallel to the plumb line as shown in the figure.
  3. Plumb line is always vertical, i.e., parallel to the line of action of gravitational force.
  4. Intersection of the lines drawn is then the point through which line of action of the gravitational force passes for any orientation. Thus, it gives the location of the c.g. or c.m.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 68

Question 85.
Why do cricketers wear helmet and pads while playing? Is it related with physics?
Answer:
Helmet and pads used by cricketers protects the head, using principles of physics.

  1. The framing between the interior of the helmet and pads increases the time over which the impulse acts on the head resulting into reduction of force.
    (Impulse = force × time = constant)
  2. The pads spread the force applied by the ball over a wider area reducing pressure at a point.

Question 86.
The diagram shows four objects placed on a flat surface.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 69
The centre of mass of each object is marked M. Which object is likely to fall over?
Answer:
Object C will fall because its centre of mass is not exactly at centre, in turn applying more force on one side of the object resulting in to unbalance force. Whereas, in other objects center of mass is exactly at center resulting into zero rotational or translational motion maintaining their equilibrium.

Question 87.
A boy is about to close a large door by applying force at A and B as shown. State with a reason, which of the two positions, A or B, will enable him to close the door with least force.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 70
Answer:
Boy has to apply more force at point B as compared to point A, because point B is at least distance from the hinge of the door while point A is at maximum distance from hinge of the door. Opening of door applies a moment, which is. given by,
M = F × perpendicular distance
F ∝ \(\frac{1}{\text { distance }}\)
More is the distance from the axis of rotation less will be the force.

Question 88.
How is a seat belt useful for safety?
Answer:
When car hits another car or an object with high speed it applies a high impulse on the driver and due to inertia driver tends to move in forward direction towards the steering. Seat belts spreads the force over large area of the body and holds the driver and protects him from crashing at the steering.

Question 89.
According to Newton’s third law of motion for every action there is equal and opposite reaction, why two equal and opposite forces don’t cancel each other?
Answer:
Forces of action and reaction always act on different bodies, hence they never cancel each other.

Question 90.
Linear momentum depends on frame of reference, but principle of conservation of linear momentum is independent of frame of reference. Why?
Answer:
Observers in different frame find different values of linear momentum of a system, hence linear momentum depends upon frame of reference, but each would observe that the value of linear momentum does not change with time (provided the system is isolated), hence principle of conservation of linear momentum is independent of frame of reference.

Question 91.
Multiple choice Questions

Question 1.
A body of mass 2 kg moving on a horizontal surface with initial velocity of 4 m s-1 comes to rest after two seconds. If one wants to keep this body moving on the same surface with a velocity of 4 m s-1, the force required is
(A) 2 N
(B) 4 N
(C) 0
(D) 8 N
Answer:
(B) 4 N

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion

Question 2.
What force will change the velocity of a body of mass 1 kg from 20 m s-1 to 30 m s-1 in two seconds?
(A) 1N
(B) 5 N
(C) 10 N
(D) 25 N
Answer:
(B) 5 N

Question 3.
A force of 5 newton acts on a body of weight 9.80 newton. What is the acceleration produced in m/s2?
(A) 0.51
(B) 1.96
(C) 5.00
(D) 49.00
Answer:
(C) 5.00

Question 4.
A body of mass m strikes a wall with velocity v and rebounds with the same speed. Its change in momentum is
(A) 2 mv
(B) mv/2
(C) – mv
(D) Zero
Answer:
(A) 2 mv

Question 5.
A force of 6 N acts on a body of mass 1 kg initially at rest and during this time, the body attains a velocity of 30 m/s. The time for which the force acts on a body is
(A) 10 second
(B) 8 second
(C) 7 second
(D) 5 second
Answer:
(D) 5 second

Question 6.
A bullet of mass 10 g is fired from a gun of mass 1 kg with recoil velocity of gun = 5 m/s. The muzzle velocity will be
(A) 30 km/min
(B) 60 km/min
(C) 30 m/s
(D) 500 m/s
Answer:
(D) 500 m/s

Question 7.
The velocity of rocket with respect to ground is v1 and velocity of gases ejecting from rocket with respect to ground is v2 Then velocity of gases with respect to rocket is given by
(A) v2
(B) v1 + v2
(C) v1 × v2
(D) v1
Answer:
(B) v1 + v2

Question 8.
Two bodies A and B of masses 1 kg and 2 kg moving towards each other with velocities 4 m/s and 1 m/s suffers a head on collision and stick together. The combined mass will
(A) move in direction of motion of lighter mass.
(B) move in direction of motion of heavier mass.
(C) not move.
(D) move in direction perpendicular to the line of motion of two bodies.
Answer:
(A) move in direction of motion of lighter mass.

Question 9.
Which of the following has maximum momentum?
(A) A 100 kg vehicle moving at 0.02 m s-1.
(B) A 4 g weight moving at 1000 cm s-1’.
(C) A 200 g weight moving with kinetic energy of 10-6 J
(D) A 200 g weight after falling through one kilometre.
Answer:
(D) A 200 g weight after falling through one kilometre.

Question 10.
A bullet hits and gets embedded in a solid block resting on a horizontal frictionless table. What is conserved?
(A) Momentum alone.
(B) K.E. alone.
(C) Momentum and K.E. both.
(D) P.E. alone.
Answer:
(A) Momentum alone.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion

Question 11.
The force exerted by the floor of an elevator on the foot of a person standing there, is more than his weight, if the elevator is
(A) going down and slowing down.
(B) going up and speeding up.
(C) going up and slowing down.
(D) either (A) and (B).
Answer:
(D) either (A) and (B).

Question 12.
If E, G and N represents the magnitudes of electromagnetic, gravitational and nuclear forces between two electrons at a given separation, then,
(A) N = E = G
(B) E < N < G (C) N > G < E (D) E > G > N
Answer:
(D) E > G > N

Qestion 13.
For an inelastic collision, the value of e is
(A) greater than 1
(B) less than 1
(C) equal to 1
(D) none of these
Answer:
(B) less than 1

Question 14.
A perfect inelastic body collides head on with a wall with velocity y. The change in momentum is
(A) mv
(B) 2mv
(C) zero
(D) none of these.
Answer:
(A) mv

Question 15.
Two masses ma and rnb moving with velocitics va and vb in opposite direction collide
elastically and after the collision ma and mb move with velocities vb and va respectively. Then the ratio mamb is
(A) \(\frac{v_{a}-v_{b}}{v_{a}+v_{b}}\)
(B) \(\frac{\mathrm{m}_{\mathrm{a}}+\mathrm{m}_{\mathrm{b}}}{\mathrm{m}_{\mathrm{a}}}\)
(C) 1
(D) \(\frac{1}{2}\)
Answer:
(C) 1

Question 16.
The frictional force acts _____.
(A) in direction of motion
(B) against the direction of motion
(C) perpendicular to the direction of motion
(D) at any angle to the direction of motion
Answer:
(B) against the direction of motion

Question 17.
A marble of mass X collides with a block of mass Z, with a velocity Y. and sticks to it. The final velocity of the system is
(A) \(\frac{\mathrm{Y}}{\mathrm{X}+\mathrm{Y}} \mathrm{Y}\)
(B) \(\frac{X}{X+Z} Y\)
(C) \(\frac{X+Y}{Z}\)
(D) \(\frac{X+Z}{X}\)
Answer:
(B) \(\frac{X}{X+Z} Y\)

Question 18.
Two balls lying on the same plane collide. Which of the following will be always conserved?
(A) heat
(B) velocity
(C) kinetic energy
(D) linear momentum.
Answer:
(D) linear momentum.

Question 19.
A body is moving with uniform velocity of 50 km h-1, the force required to keep the body in motion in SI unit is
(A) zero
(B) 10
(C) 25
(D) 50
Answer:
(A) zero

Question 20.
A coolie holding a suitcase on his head of 20 kg and travels on a platform. then work done in joule by the coolie is
(A) 198
(B) 98
(C) 49
(D) zero
Answer:
(D) zero

Question 21.
Out of the following forces, which force is non-conservative?
(A) gravitational
(B) electrostatic
(C) frictional
(D) magnetic
Answer:
(C) frictional

Question 22.
The work done in conservative force is ____.
(A) negative
(B) zero
(C) positive
(D) infinite
Answer:
(B) zero

Question 23.
The angle between the line of action of force and displacement when no work done (in degree) is
(A) zero
(B) 45
(C) 90
(D) 120
Answer:
(C) 90

Question 24.
If the momentum of a body is doubled, its KE. increases by
(A) 50%
(B) 300%
(C) 100%
(L)) 400%
Answer:
(B) 300%

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion

Question 25.
In perfectly inelastic collision, which is conserved?
(A) P.E. only
(B) K.E. only
(C) momentum only
(D) K.E. and momentum
Answer:
(C) momentum only

Question 26.
In case of elaine collision, which s
(A) Momentum and K.E. is conserved.
(B) Momentum conserved and K.E. not conserved,
(C) Momentum not conserved and K.E. conserved.
(D) Momentum and K.E. both not conserved,
Answer:
(A) Momentum and K.E. is conserved.

Question 27.
Pseudo force is true only in
(A) frame of reference which is at rest
(B) inertial frame of reference.
(C) frame of reference moving with constant velocity.
(D) non-inertial frame of reference
Answer:
(D) non-inertial frame of reference

Question 28.
A men weighing 90kg carries a stone of 20 kg to the top of the building 30m high. The work done by hint is (g = 9.8 m/s2)
(A) 80 J
(B) 100 J
(C) 980 J
(D) 29,400 J
Answer:
(D) 29,400 J

Question 29.
A weight lifter is holding a weight of 100 kg on his shoulders for 45 s, the amount of work done by him in joules is
(A) 4500
(B) 100
(C) 45
(D) zero
Answer:
(D) zero

Question 30.
If m is the mass of a body and E its K.E..then its linear momentum is
(A) \(\mathrm{m} \sqrt{\mathrm{E}}\)
(B) \(2 \sqrt{\mathrm{m}} \mathrm{E}\)
(C) \(\sqrt{m} E\)
(D) \(\sqrt{2 \mathrm{mE}}\)
Answer:
(D) \(\sqrt{2 \mathrm{mE}}\)

Question 31.
Torque applied is masimum when the angle between the directions of \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}\) is
(A) 90°
(B) 180°
(C) 0°
(D) 45°
Answer:
(A) 90°

Question 92.
A particle moving with velocity \(\vec{v}\) is acted by three forces shown by the vector triangle PQR. The velocity of the particle will:
(A) remain constant
(B) change according to the smallest force \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{QR}}\)
(C) increase
(D) decrease
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 71
Hint: As the three forces acting on a particle represents a triangle (i.e., a closed loop)
∴ Fnet = 0
∴ m \(\vec{a}\) = 0
∴ m\(\frac{\mathrm{d} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}}{\mathrm{dt}}\)
∴ v remains constant
Answer:
(A) remain constant

Question 93.
A force F = 20 + 10y acts on a particle in y-direction where F is in newton and y in meter. Work done by this force to move the particle from y = 0 to y = 1 m is:
(A) 25J
(B) 20J
(C) 30J
(D) SJ
Hint: Work done by variable force, W = \(\int_{y_{\text {initial }}}^{y_{\text {final }}} \mathrm{Fdy}\)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 72
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 73
Answer:
(A) 25J

Question 94.
Body A of mass 4m moving with speed u collides with another body B of mass 2m, at rest. The collision is head on and elastic in nature. After the collision the fraction of energy lost by the colliding body A is:
(A) \(\frac{4}{9}\)
(B) \(\frac{5}{9}\)
(C) \(\frac{1}{9}\)
(D) \(\frac{8}{9}\)
Hint:
Fractional loss of K.E. of colliding bodies,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 74
Answer:
(D) \(\frac{8}{9}\)

Question 95.
An object of mass 500 g, initially at rest, is acted upon by a variable force whose X-component varies with X in the manner shown. The velocities of the object at the points X = 8 m and X = 12 m, would have the respective values of
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 75
(A) 18m/s and 20.6 m/s
(B) 18 m/s and 24.4 m/s
(C) 23 m/s and 24.4 m/s
(D) 23 m/s and 20.6 m/s
Hint: From work-energy theorem
∆ K.E. = work = area under F-x graph
From x = 0 to x = 8m
\(\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{mv}^{2}\) = (5 × 20) + (3 × 10)
∴ \(\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{mv}^{2}\) = 100 + 30
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 76
Answer:
(D) 23 m/s and 20.6 m/s

Question 96.
The centre of mass of two particles system lies
(A) at the midpoint on the line joining the two particles.
(B) at one end of line joining the two particles.
(C) on the line perpendicular in the line joining two particles.
(D) on the line joining the Iwo particles.
Answer:
(D) on the line joining the two particles.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion

Question 97.
A block of mass m is placed on a smooth inclined wedge ABC of inclination θ as shown in the figure. The wedge is given an acceleration ‘a’ towards the right. The relation between a and θ for the block to remain stationary on the wedge is
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 77
Hint:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 78
The mass of block is given to be m. It will remain stationary if forces acting on it are in equilibrium i.e., ma cos θ = mg sin θ
Here, ma = Pseudo force on block.
∴ a = g tan θ
Answer:
a = g tan θ

Question 98.
A moving block having mass m, collides with another stationary block having mass 4m. The lighter block comes to rest after collision, When the initial velocity of the lighter block is v, then the value of coefficient of restitution
(e) will
(A) 0.5
(B) 0.25
(C) 0.8
(D) 0.4
Hint:
Given: m1 = m, m2 = 4m, u1 = v, u2 = 0, v1 = 0 According to law of conservation of momentum,
m1u1 + m2u2 = m1v1 + m2v2
mv + 4m × 0 = m × 0 + 4mv2
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 79
Answer:
(B) 0.25

Question 99.
In a collinear collision, a particle with an initial speed v0 strikes a stationary particle of the same mass. If the final total kinetic energy is 50% greater than the original kinetic energy, the magnitude of the relative velocity between the two particles, after collision, is:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 80
Hint:
According to law of conservation of momentum,
mv0 = mv1 + mv2
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 81
Answer:
(D) \(\sqrt{2} \mathbf{v}_{0}\)

Question 100.
The mass of a hydrogen molecule is 3.32 × 10-27 kg. If 1023 hydrogen molecules strike, per second, a fixed wall of area 2 cm2 at an angle of 45° to the normal and rebound elastically with a speed of 103 m/s, then the pressure on the wall is nearly:
(A) 2.35 × 102 N/m2
(B) 4.70 × 102 N/m2
(C) 2.35 × 103 N/m2
(D) 4.70 × 103 N/m2
Hint:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 82
Answer:
(C) 2.35 × 103 N/m2

Question 101.
A bomb at rest explodes into 3 parts of same mass. The momentum of two parts is -3P\(\hat{\mathrm{i}}\) and 2P\(\hat{\mathrm{j}}\) respectively. The magnitude of momentum of the third part is
(A) P
(B) \(\sqrt{5} \mathrm{P}\)
(C) \(\sqrt{11} \mathrm{P}\)
(D) \(\sqrt{13} \mathrm{P}\)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 83
Answer:
(D) \(\sqrt{13} \mathrm{P}\)

Question 102.
A sphere of mass ‘m’ moving with velocity V collides head-on on another sphere of same mass which is at rest. The ratio of final velocity of second sphere to the initial velocity of the first sphere is (e is coefficient of restitution and collision is inelastic)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 84
Hint:
Initial momentum = mv
Final momentum = mv1 + mv2
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 85
Answer:
(C) \(\frac{\mathrm{e}+1}{2}\)

Question 103.
Two blocks A and B of masses 3m and m respectively are connected by a massless and inextensible string. The whole system is suspended by a massless spring as shown in figure. The magnitudes of acceleration of A and B immediately after the string is cut, are respectively:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 86
Hint:
Tension in spring before cutting the strip,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 87
Answer:
(B) \(\frac{\mathrm{g}}{3}\), g

Question 104.
A time dependent force F = 6t acts on a particle of mass 1 kg. If the particle starts from rest, the work done by the force during the first 1 sec. will be
(A) 9 J
(B) 18 J
(C) 4.5 J
(D) 22 J
Hint:
F = 6t
m = 1 kg
∴ a = 6t
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 88
Answer:
(C) 4.5 J

Question 105.
Consider a drop of rain water having mass Ig falling from a height of 1 km. It hits the ground with a speed of 50 m/s. Take ‘g’ constant with a value 10 m/s2. The work done by the
(i) gravitational force and the
(ii) resistive force of air is:
(A) (i) -10 J
(ii) -8.25 J
(B) (i) 1.25 J
(ii) -8.25 J
(C) (i) 100 J
(ii) 8.75 J
(D) (i) 10 J
(ii) -8.75 J
Hint: Work done by gravitation force is given by (Wg)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 89
Answer:
(D) (i) 10 J
(ii) -8.75 J

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 11th Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods

Question 1.
Explain representation of a vector graphically and symbolically.
Answer:

  1. Graphical representation:
    A vector is graphically represented by a directed line segment or an arrow.
    eg.: displacement of a body from P to Q is represented as P → Q.
  2. Symbolic representation:
    Symbolically a vector is represented by a single letter with an arrow above it, such as \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\). The magnitude of the vector \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) is denoted as |A| or | \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) | or A.

Question 2.
A vector has both magnitude and direction. Does it mean that anything that has magnitude and direction is necessarily a vector?
Answer:

  1. For a physical quantity, only having magnitude and direction is not a sufficient condition to be a vector.
  2. A physical quantity also has to obey vectors law of addition to be termed as vector.
  3. Hence, anything that has magnitude and direction is not necessarily a vector.
    Example: Though current has definite magnitude and direction, it is not a vector.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods

Question 3.
Define and explain the following terms:
i. Zero vector (Null vector)
ii. Resultant vector
iii. Negative vectors
iv. Equal vectors
v. Position vector
Answer:
i. Zero vector (Null vector):
A vector having zero magnitude and arbitrary direction is called zero vector. It is denoted as \(\overrightarrow{0}\).
Example: Velocity vector of stationary particle, acceleration vector of a body moving with uniform velocity.

ii. Resultant vector:
The resultant of two or more vectors is defined as that single vector, which produces the same effect as produced by all the vectors together.

iii. Negative vectors:
A negative vector of a given vector is a vector of the same magnitude but opposite in direction to that of the given vector.
Negative vectors are antiparallel vectors.
In figure, \(\vec{b}\) = – \(\vec{a}\)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 1

iv. Equal vectors:
Two vectors A and B representing same physical quantity are said to be equal if and only if they have the same magnitude and direction.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 2
In the given figure |\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\)| = |\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\)| = |\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\)| = |\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{S}}\)|

v. Position vector:
A vector which gives the position of a particle at a point with respect to the origin of chosen co-ordinate system is called position vector.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 3
In the given figure \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OP}}\) represents position vector of \(\vec{P}\) with respect to O.

Question 4.
Whether the resultant of two vectors of unequal magnitude be zero?
Answer:
The resultant of two vectors of different magnitude cannot give zero resultant.

Question 5.
Define unit vector and give its physical significance.
Answer:
Unit vector: A vector having unit magnitude in a given direction is called a unit vector in that direction.
If \(\vec{p}\) is a non zero vector (P ≠ 0) then the unit vector \(\hat{\mathrm{u}}_{\mathrm{p}}\) in the direction of \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) is given by,
\(\hat{\mathrm{u}}_{\mathrm{p}}\) = \(\frac{\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}}{\mathrm{P}}\)
∴ \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) = \(\hat{u}_{p} P\)

Significance of unit vector:

i. The unit vector gives the direction of a given vector.

ii. Unit vector along X, Y and Z direction of a rectangular (three dimensional) coordinate is represented by \(\hat{\mathrm{i}}\), \(\hat{\mathrm{j}}\) and \(\hat{\mathrm{k}}\) respectively Such that \(\hat{\mathbf{u}}_{x}\) = \(\hat{\mathrm{i}}\), \(\hat{\mathbf{u}}_{y}\) = \(\hat{\mathrm{j}}\) and \(\hat{\mathbf{u}}_{z}\) = \(\hat{\mathrm{k}}\)
This gives \(\hat{\mathrm{i}}\) = \(\frac{\overrightarrow{\mathrm{X}}}{\mathrm{X}}\), \(\hat{\mathrm{j}}\) = \(\frac{\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Y}}}{\mathrm{X}}\) and \(\hat{\mathrm{k}}\) = \(\frac{\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Z}}}{\mathrm{Z}}\)

Question 6.
Explain multiplication of a vector by a scalar.
Answer:

  1. When a vector \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) is multiplied by a scalar ‘s’, it becomes ‘s\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}’ whose magnitude is s times the magnitude of \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\).
  2. The unit of \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) is different from the unit of ‘s \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\)’.
    For example,
    If \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) = 10 newton and s = 5 second, then s\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) = 10 newton × 5 second = 50 Ns.

Question 7.
Explain addition of vectors.
Answer:

  1. The addition of two or more vectors of same type gives rise to a single vector such that the effect of this single vector is the same as the net effect of the original vectors.
  2. It is important to note that only the vectors of the same type (physical quantity) can be added.
  3. For example, if two vectors, \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) = 3 unit and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) = 4 unit are acting along the same line, then they can be added as, |\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\)| = |\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\)| + |\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\)|
    |\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\)| = 3 + 4 = 7
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 4
    [Note: When vectors are not in the same direction, then they can be added using triangle law of vector addition.]

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods

Question 8.
State true or false. If false correct the statement and rewrite.
It is possible to add two vectors representing physical quantities having different dimensions.
Answer:
False.
It is not possible to add two vectors representing physical quantities having different dimensions.

Question 9.
Explain subtraction of vectors.
Answer:

  1. When two vectors are anti-parallel (in the opposite direction) to each other, the magnitude
  2. It is important to note that only vectors of the same type (physical quantity) can be subtracted.
  3. For example, if two vectors \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) = 3 unit and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) = 4 unit are acting in opposite direction, they are subtracted as, |\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\)| = ||\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\)| – |\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\)||
    = |3 – 4| = 1 unit, directed along \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\)
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 5

Question 10.
How can resultant of two vectors of a type inclined with each other be determined?
Answer:
When two vectors of a type are inclined with each other, their resultant can be determined by using triangle law of vector addition.

Question 11.
What is triangle law of vector addition?
Answer:
Triangle law of vector addition:
If two vectors describing the same physical quantity are represented in magnitude and direction, by the two sides of a triangle taken in order, then their resultant is represented in magnitude and direction by the third side of the triangle drawn in the opposite sense, i.e., from the starting point (tail) of the first vector to the end point (head) of the second vector.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 6
Let \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) be the two vectors of same type taken in same order as shown in figure.
∴ Resultant vector will be given by third side taken in opposite order, i.e., \(\overline{\mathrm{OA}}\) + \(\overline{\mathrm{AB}}\) = \(\overline{\mathrm{OB}}\)
∴ \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\)

Question 12.
Using triangle law of vector addition, explain the process of adding two vectors which are not lying in a straight line.
Answer:
i. Two vectors in magnitude and direction are drawn in a plane as shown in figure (a)
Let these vectors be \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 7

ii. Join the tail of \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) to head of \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) in the given direction. The resultant vector will be the line which is obtained by joining tail of \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) to head of \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) as shown in figure (b).
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 8

iii. If \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\) is the resultant vector of \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) then using triangle law of vector addition, we have, \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\)

Question 13.
Is it possible to add two velocities using triangle law?
Answer:
Yes, it is possible to add two velocities using triangle law.

Question 14.
Explain, how two vectors are subtracted. Find their resultant by using triangle law of vector addition.
Answer:

  1. Let \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) be the two vectors in a plane as shown in figure (a).
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 10
  2. To subtract \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) from \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\), vector \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) is reversed so that we get the vector –\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) as shown in figure (b).
  3. The resultant vector is obtained by –\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\) joining tail of \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) to head of – \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) as shown in figure (c).
  4. From triangle law of vector addition, \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) + (-\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\)) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) – \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\)

Question 15.
Prove that: Vector addition is commutative.
Answer:
Commutative property of vector addition:
According to commutative property, for two
vectors \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\), \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{p}}\)

Proof:

i. Let two vectors \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) be represented in magnitude and direction by two sides \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OA}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{AB}}\) respectively.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 11

ii. Complete a parallelogramOABC such that
\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OA}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{CB}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{AB}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OC}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) then join OB.

iii. In △OAB, \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OA}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{AB}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OB}}\)
(By triangle law of vector addition)
∴ \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\) … (1)
In △OCB, \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OC}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{CB}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OB}}\)
(By triangle law of vector addition)
∴ \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\) … (2)

iv. From equation (1) and (2),
\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\)
Hence, addition of two vectors obeys commutative law.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods

Question 16.
Prove that: Vector addition is associative.
Answer:
Associative property of vector addition:
According to associative property, for three vectors \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\), \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\),
(\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\)) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) + (\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\))
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 12
Proof:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 13
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 14
On comparing, equation (2) and (4), we get,
(\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\)) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) + (\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\))
Hence, associative law is proved.

Question 17.
State true or false. If false correct the statement and rewrite.
The subtraction of given vectors is neither commutative nor associative.
Answer:
True.

Question 18.
State and prove parallelogram law of vector addition and determine magnitude and direction of resultant vector.
Answer:

i. Parallelogram law of vector add addition;
If two vectors of same type starting from the same point (tails cit the same point), are represented in magnitude and direction by the two adjacent sides of a parallelogram then, their resultant vector is given in magnitude and direction, by the diagonal of the parallelogram starting from the same point.

ii. Proof:

a. Consider two vectors \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) of the same type, with their tails at the point O’ and θ’ is the angle between \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) as shown in the figure below.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 15
b. Join BC and AC to complete the parallelogram OACB, with \(\overline{\mathrm{OA}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) and \(\overline{\mathrm{AC}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) as the adjacent sides. We have to prove that diagonal \(\overline{\mathrm{OC}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\), the resultant of sum of the two given vectors.

c. By the triangle law of vector addition, we have,
\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OA}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{AC}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OC}}\) … (1)
As \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{AC}}\) is parallel to \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OB}}\),
\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{AC}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OB}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\)
Substituting \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OA}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OC}}\) in equation (1) we have,
\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\)
Hence proved.

iii. Magnitude of resultant vector:

a. To find the magnitude of resultant vector \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OC}}\), draw a perpendicular from C to meet OA extended at S.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 16

c. Using Pythagoras theorem in right angled triangle, OSC
(OC)2 = (OS)2 + (SC)2
= (OA + AS)2 + (SC)2
∴ (OC)2 = (OA)2 + 2(OA).(AS) + (AS2) + (SC)2 . . . .(4)

d. From right angle trianle ASC,
(AS)2 + (SC)2 = (AC)2 …. (5)

e. From equation (4) and (5), we get
(OC)2 = (OA)2 + 2(OA) (AS) + (AC)2
… .(6)

f. Using (2) and (6), we get
(OC)2 = (OA)2 + (AC)2 + 2(OA)(AC) cos θ
∴ R2 = P2 + Q2 + 2 PQ cos θ
∴ R = \(\sqrt{\mathrm{P}^{2}+\mathrm{Q}^{2}+2 \mathrm{PQ} \cos \theta}\) ….(7)
Equation (7) gives the magnitude of resultant vector \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\).

iv. Direction of resultant vector:
To find the direction of resultant vector \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\), let \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\) make an angle α with \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\).
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 17
Equation (9) represents direction of resultant vector.
[Note: If β is the angle between \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\), it can be similarly derived that
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 18

Question 19.
Complete the table for two vectors \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) inclined at angle θ.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 19
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 20

Question 20.
The diagonal of the parallelogram made by two vectors as adjacent sides is not passing through common point of two vectors. What does it represent?
Answer:
The diagonal of the parallelogram made by two vectors as adjacent sides not passing through common point of two vectors represents triangle law of vector addition.

Question 21.
If | \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{B}}\) | = | \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A}}\) – \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{B}}\) | then what can be the
angle between \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{B}}\) ?
Answer:
Let θ be the angle between \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{B}}\), then
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 21

Thus, if |\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\)| = |\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) – \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) |, then vectors \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) must be at right angles to each other.

Question 22.
Express vector \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A C}}\) in terms of vectors \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A B}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{C B}}\) shown in the following figure.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 22
Solution:
Using the triangle law of addition of vectors,
\(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A C}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{C B}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A B}}\)
∴\(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A C}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A B}}\) – \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{C B}}\)

Question 23.
From the following figure, determine the resultant of four forces \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A}}_{1}\), \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A}}_{2}\), \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A}}_{3}\), \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A}}_{4}\).
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 23
Solution:
Join \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OB}}\) to complete ∆OAB as shown in figure below
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 24
Now, using triangle law of vector addition,
\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OB}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OA}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{AB}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}_{1}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}_{2}\)
Join \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OC}}\) to complete triangle OBC as shown figure below
Similarly, \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OC}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OB}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{BC}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}_{1}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}_{2}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}_{3}\)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 25
Answer:
\(\overrightarrow{O D}\) is the resultant of the four vectors.

Question 24.
Find the vector that should be added to the sum of (2\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) – 5\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) + 3\(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\)) and (4\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) + 7\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) – 4\(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\)) to give a unit vector along the X-axis.
Solution:
Let vector \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{p}}\) be added to get unit vector (\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\)) along X-axis.
Sum of given vectors is given as,
(2\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) – 5\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) + 3\(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\) ) + (4\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) + 7\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) – 4\(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\)) = 6\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) + 2\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) – \(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\)
According to given condition, (6\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) + 2\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) – \(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\)) + \(\hat{\mathbf{P}}\) = \(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\)
∴ \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) = \(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) – (6\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) + 2\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) – \(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\)) = \(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) – 6\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) – 2\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) + \(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\) = -5\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) – 2\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) + \(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\)
Answer:
The required vector is -5\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) – 2\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) + \(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\).

Question 25.
If \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{P}}\) = 2\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) + 3\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) – \(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{Q}}\) = 2\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) – 5\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) + 2\(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\).Find
i. \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{P}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{Q}}\)
ii. 3\(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{P}}\) – 2\(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{Q}}\)
Solution:
Given \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{P}}\) = 2\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) + 3\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) – \(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\), \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{Q}}\) = 2\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) – 5\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) + 2\(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\)
To find:

i. \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{P}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{Q}}\)
ii. 3\(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{P}}\) – 2\(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{Q}}\)

Calculation:

i. \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{P}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{Q}}\) = (2\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) + 3\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) – k) + (2\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) – 5\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) + 2k)
= (2 + 2)\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) + (3 – 5)\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) + (-1 + 2)\(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\)
= 4\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) – 2\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) + \(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\)

ii. 3\(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{P}}\) = 3(2\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) + 3\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) – \(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\)) = 6\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) + 9\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) – 3\(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\)
2\(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{Q}}\) = 2(2\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) – 5\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) + 2\(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\)) = 4\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) – 10\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) + 4\(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 26

Question 26.
Find unit vector parallel to the resultant of the vectors \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A}}\) = \(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) + 4\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) – 2\(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{B}}\) = 3\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) – 5\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) + \(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\).
Solution:
The resultant of \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) is,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 27
Answer:
The required unit vector is \(\frac{1}{3 \sqrt{2}}\)(4\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) – \(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) – \(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\))

Question 27.
Two forces, F1 and F2, each of magnitude 5 N are inclined to each other at 60°. Find the magnitude and direction of their resultant force.
Solution:
Given: F1 = 5 N, F2 = 5 N, θ = 60°
To find: Magnitude of resultant force (R),
Direction of resultant force (α)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 28
Answer:
i. The magnitude of resultant force is 8.662 N.

ii. The direction of resultant force is 30° w.r.t. \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}_{1}}\).

Question 28.
Water is flowing in a stream with velocity 5 km/hr in an easterly direction relative to the shore. Speed of a boat relative to still water is 20 km/hr. If the boat enters the stream heading north, with what velocity will the boat actually travel?
Answer:
The resultant velocity \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\) of the boat can be obtained by adding the two velocities using ∆ OAB shown in the figure.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 29
The direction ot the resultant velocity is
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 30
Answer: The velocity of the boat is 20.616 km/hr in a direction 14.04° east of north. .
[Note: tan-1 (0.25) ≈ 14.04° which equals 14°2]

Question 29.
Rain is falling vertically with a speed of 35 m/s. Wind starts blowing at a speed of 12 m/s in east to west direction. In which direction should a boy waiting at a bus stop hold his umbrella? (NCERT)
Solution:
Let the velocity of rain and wind be \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{V}_{\mathrm{R}}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{V}_{\mathrm{W}}}\), then resultant velocity \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}\) has magnitude of
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 31
If \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}\) makes an angle θ with vertical then, from the figure
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 32
Answer: The boy should hold his umbrella in vertical plane at an angle of about 19° with vertical towards the east.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods

Question 30.
What are components of a vector?
Answer:

  1. The given vector can be written as sum of two or more vectors along certain fixed directions. The vectors into which the given single vector is splitted are called components of the vector.
  2. Let \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) = \(\mathrm{A}_{1} \hat{\alpha}\) + \(\mathrm{A}_{2} \hat{\beta}\) + \(\mathrm{A}_{3} \hat{\gamma}\) where, \(\hat{\alpha}\), \(\hat{\beta}\) and \(\hat{\gamma}\) are unit vectors along chosen directions. Then, A1, A2 and A3 are known as components of \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) along three directions \(\hat{\alpha}\), \(\hat{\beta}\) and \(\hat{\gamma}\).
  3. It two vectors are equal then, their corresponding components are also equal and vice-versa.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 33

[Note: The magnitude of a vector is a scalar while each component of a vector is always a vector.]

Question 31.
What is meant by resolution of vector?
Answer:

  1. The process of splitting a given vector into its components is called resolution of the vector.
  2. Resolution of vector is equal to replacing the original vector with the sum of the component vectors.

Question 32.
That are rectangular components of vectors? Explain their uses.
Answer:
i. Rectangular components of a vector:
If components of a given vector are mutually perpendicular to each other then they are called rectangular components of that vector.

ii. Consider a vector \(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}
\) = \(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OC}}
\) originating from the origin O’ of a rectangular co-ordinate system as shown in figure.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 34

iii. Draw CA ⊥ OX and CB ⊥ OY.
Let component of \(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}
\) along X-axis \(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}_{\mathrm{x}}
\) and component of \(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}
\) along Y-axis = \(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}_{\mathrm{y}}
\)
By parallelogram law of vectors,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 35
where, \(
\hat{i}
\) and \(
\hat{j}
\) are unit vectors along positive direction of X and Y axes respectively.

iv. If θ is angle made by \(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}
\) with X-axis, then
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 36

v. Squaring and adding equation (1) and (2) we get,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 37
Equation (3) gives the magnitude of \(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}
\).

vi. Direction of \(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}
\) can be found out by dividing equation (2) by (1),
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 38
Equation (4) gives direction of \(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}
\)

vii. When vectors are noncoplanar, it becomes necessary to use the third dimension. If \(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}_{\mathrm{x}}
\), \(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}_{\mathrm{y}}
\) and \(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}_{\mathrm{z}}
\) are three rectangular components of \(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}
\) along X, Y and Z axes of a three dimensional rectangular cartesian co-ordinate system then.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 39
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 40

Question 33.
Find a unit vector in the direction of the vector 3\(
\hat{i}
\) + 4\(
\hat{j}
\).
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 41

Question 34.
Given \(
\overrightarrow{\mathbf{a}}
\) = \(
\hat{\mathbf{i}}
\) + 2\(
\hat{\mathbf{j}}
\) and \(
\overrightarrow{\mathbf{b}}
\) = 2\(
\hat{\mathbf{i}}
\) + \(
\hat{\mathbf{j}}
\), what are the magnitudes of the two vectors? Are these two vectors equal?
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 42
The magnitudes of \(
\vec{a}
\) and \(
\vec{b}
\) are equal. However, their corresponding components are not equal, i.e., ax ≠ bx and ay ≠ by. Hence, the two vectors are not equal.
Answer:
Magnitudes of two vectors are equal, but vectors are unequal.

Question 35.
Find the vector drawn from the point (-4, 10, 7) to the point (3, -2, 1). Also find its magnitude.
Solution:
If \(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}
\) is a vector drawn from the point (x1, y1, z1) to the point (x2, y2, z2), then
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 43

Question 36.
In a cartesian co-ordinate system, the co-ordinates of two points P and Q are (2, 4, 4) and (-2, -3, 7) respectively, find \(
\overrightarrow{\mathbf{P Q}}
\) and its magnitude.
Solution:
Given: Position vector of P = (2,4,4)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 44
∴ |\(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{PQ}}
\)| = 8.6 units
Answer: Vector \(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{PQ}}
\) is -4\(
\hat{\mathbf{i}}
\) – 7\(
\hat{\mathbf{j}}
\) + 3\(
\hat{\mathbf{k}}
\) and its magnitude is 8.6 units.

Question 37.
If \(
\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A}}
\) = 3\(
\hat{i}
\) + 4[/latex] = 3\(
\hat{j}
\) and \(
\overrightarrow{\mathbf{B}}
\) = 7\(
\hat{i}
\) + 24\(
\hat{j}
\), find a vector having the same magnitude as \(
\overrightarrow{\mathbf{B}}
\) and parallel to \(
\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A}}
\).
Solution:
The magnitude of vector \(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}
\) is | \(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}
\) |
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 45
Answer: The required vector is 15\(
\hat{\mathbf{i}}
\) + 20\(
\hat{\mathbf{j}}
\).

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods

Question 38.
Complete the table.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 46
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 47

Question 39.
State with reasons, whether the following algebraic operations with scalar and vector physical quantities are meaningful.
i. Adding any two scalars,
ii. Adding a scalar to a vector of the same dimensions,
iii. Multiplying any vector by any scalar,
iv. Multiplying any two scalars,
v. Adding any two vectors. (NCERT)
Answer:

  1. Not any two scalars can be added. To add two scalars it is essential that they represent same physical quantity.
  2. This operation is meaningless. Only a vector can be added to another vector.
  3. This operation is possible. When a vector is multiplied with a dimensional scalar, the resultant vector will have different dimensions.
    eg.: acceleration vector is multiplied with mass (a dimensional scalar), the resultant vector has the dimensions of force.
    When a vector is multiplied with non – dimensional scalar, it will be a vector having dimensions as that of the given vector.
    eg.: \(
    \overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}
    \) × 3 = 3\(
    \overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}
    \)
  4. This operation is possible. Multiplication of non-dimensional scalars is simply algebraic multiplication. Multiplication of non dimensional scalars will result into scalar with different dimensions.
    eg.: Volume × density = mass.
  5. Not any two vectors can be added. To add two vectors it is essential that they represent same physical quantity.

Question 40.
Explain scalar product of two vectors with the help of suitable examples.
Answer:
Scalar product of two vectors:

  1. The scalar product of two non-zero vectors is defined as the product of the magnitude of the two vectors and cosine of the angle θ between the two vectors.
  2. The dot sign is used between the two vectors to be multiplied therefore scalar product is also called dot product.
  3. The scalar product of two vectors \(
    \overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}
    \) and \(
    \overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}
    \) is given by, \(
    \overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}
    \) . \(
    \overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}
    \) = PQ cos θ
    where, p = magnitude of \(
    \overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}
    \), Q = magnitude of \(
    \overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}
    \)
    θ = angle between \(
    \overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}
    \) and \(
    \overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}
    \)
  4. Examples of scalar product:
    1. Power (P) is a scalar product of force (\(
      \overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}
      \)) and velocity (\(
      \overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}
      \))
      ∴ P = \(
      \overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}
      \) . \(
      \overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}
      \)
    2. Work is a scalar product of force (\(
      \overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}
      \)) and displacement (\(
      \overrightarrow{\mathrm{s}}
      \)).
      ∴ W = \(
      \overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}} \cdot \overrightarrow{\mathrm{s}}
      \)

Question 41.
Discuss characteristics of scalar product of two vectors.
Answer:
Characteristics of the scalar product of two vectors:
i. The scalar product of two vectors is equivalent to the product of magnitude of one vector with component of the other in the direction of the first.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 48
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 49
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 50
vi. Scalar product of two vectors is expressed in terms of rectangular components as
\(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}} \cdot \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}
\) = Ax + Bx + AyBy + AzBz

vii. For \(
\vec{a} \neq 0, \vec{a} \cdot \vec{b}=\vec{a} \cdot \vec{c}
\) does not necessarily mean \(
\vec{b}
\) = \(
\vec{c}
\)

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods

Question 42.
Complete the table vector given below:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 51
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 52

Question 43.
Define and explain vector product of two vectors with suitable examples.
Answer:
i. The vector product of two vectors is a third vector whose magnitude is equal to the product of magnitude of the two vectors and sine of the smaller angle θ between the two vectors.

ii. Vector product is also called cross product of vectors because cross sign is used to represent vector product.

iii. Explanation:

a. The vector product of two vectors \(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}
\) and \(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}
\), is a third vector \(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}
\) and is written as, \(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}
\) = \(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}
\) × \(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}
\) = AB sin θ \(
\hat{\mathrm{u}}_{\mathrm{r}}
\) where, \(
\hat{\mathrm{u}}_{\mathrm{r}}
\) is unit vector in direction of \(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}
\), i.e., perpendicular to plane containing two vectors. It is given by right handed screw rule.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 53
c. Examples of vector product:

1. Force experienced by a charge q moving with velocity \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{V}}\) in uniform magnetic field of induction (strength) \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) is given as \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}\) = q\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{V}}\) × \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\)

2. Moment of a force or torque (\(\begin{aligned}
&\rightarrow\\
&\tau
\end{aligned}\)) is the vector product of the position vector (\(\vec{r}\)) and the force (\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}\)).
i.e., \(\begin{aligned}
&\rightarrow\\
&\tau
\end{aligned}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}} \times \overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}\)

3. The instantaneous velocity (\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}\)) of a rotating particle is equal to the cross product of its angular velocity (\(\vec{\omega}\)) and its position (\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}}\)) from axis of rotation.
\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}}\) × \(\vec{\omega}\)

Question 44.
State right handed screw rule.
Answer:
Statement of Right handed screw rule: Hold a right handed screw with its axis perpendicular to the plane containing vectors and the screw rotated from first vector to second vector through a small angle, the direction in which the screw tip would advance is the direction of the vector product of two vectors.

Question 45.
State the characteristics of the vector product (cross product) of two vectors.
Answer:
Characteristics of the vector product (cross product):
i. The vector product of two vectors does not obey the commutative law of multiplication.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 54
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 55
vi. The magnitude of cross product of two vectors is numerically equal to the area of a parallelogram whose adjacent sides represent the two vectors.

Question 46.
Derive an expression for cross product of two vectors and express it in determinant form.
Answer:
Expression for cross product of two vectors:
i. Let two vectors \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) be represented in magnitude and direction by,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 56
ii.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 57
iii. Determinant form of cross product of two vectors \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) is given by,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 58

Question 47.
Show that magnitude of vector product of two vectors is numerically equal to the area of a parallelogram formed by the two
vectors.
Answer:
Suppose OACB is a parallelogram of adjacent sides, \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OA}}=\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OB}}=\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\).
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 59
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 60

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods

Question 48.
Distinguish between scalar product (dot product) and vector product (cross product).
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 61

Question 49.
Given \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{P}}\) = 4\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) – \(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) + 8\(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{Q}}\) = 2\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) – m\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) + 4\(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\) find m if \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{P}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{Q}}\) have the same direction. Solution:
Since \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{P}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{Q}}\) have the same direction, their corresponding components must be in the same proportion, i.e.,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 62

Question 50.
Find the scalar product of the two vectors \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{v}}_{1}\) = \(\hat{\mathbf{i}}+2 \hat{\mathbf{j}}+\mathbf{3} \hat{\mathbf{k}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{v}}_{2}\) = \(3 \hat{\mathbf{i}}+4 \hat{\mathbf{j}}-\mathbf{5} \hat{\mathbf{k}}\)
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 63
Answer: Scalar product of two given vectors is – 4.

Question 51.
A force \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{F}}\) = \(4 \hat{\mathbf{i}}+6 \hat{\mathbf{j}}+3 \hat{\mathbf{k}}\) acting on a particle produces a displacement of \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{S}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{s}}=2 \hat{\mathbf{i}}+3 \hat{\mathbf{j}}+\mathbf{5} \hat{\mathbf{k}}\) where F is expressed in newton and s in metre. Find the work done by the force.
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 64
Answer: The work done by the force is 41 J.

Question 52.
Find ‘a’ if \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A}}\) = \(3 \hat{\mathbf{i}}-2 \hat{\mathbf{j}}+4 \hat{\mathbf{k}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{B}}\) = \(\mathbf{a} \hat{\mathbf{i}}+2 \hat{\mathbf{j}}-\hat{\mathbf{k}}\) are perpendicular to one another.
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 65

Question 53.
If \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A}}\) = \(5 \hat{\mathbf{i}}+6 \hat{\mathbf{j}}+4 \hat{\mathbf{k}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{B}}\) = \(2 \hat{\mathbf{i}}-2 \hat{\mathbf{j}}+3 \hat{\mathbf{k}}\) determine the angle between \(\) and \(\). Solution:
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 66

Question 54.
Find the angle between the vectors
\(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A}}\) = \(\hat{\mathbf{i}}+2 \hat{\mathbf{j}}-\hat{\mathbf{k}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{B}}\) = \(-\hat{\mathbf{i}}+\hat{\mathbf{j}}-\mathbf{2} \hat{\mathbf{k}}\).
Solution:
Let angle between the vectors be θ
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 67
Answer: The angle between the vectors is 60°.

Question 55.
If \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A}}\) = \(2 \hat{\mathbf{i}}+7 \hat{\mathbf{j}}+3 \hat{\mathbf{k}}\) and \(\vec{B}\) = \(3 \hat{\mathbf{i}}+2 \hat{\mathbf{j}}+\mathbf{5} \hat{\mathbf{k}}\), find the component of \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A}}\) along \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{B}}\).
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 68

Question 56.
\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) and \(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) are unit vectors along X-axis and Y-axis respectively. What is the magnitude and direction of the vector \(\hat{\mathbf{i}}+\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) and \(\hat{\mathbf{i}}-\hat{\mathbf{j}}\)? What are the components of a vector
\(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A}}=2 \hat{\mathbf{i}}+\mathbf{3} \hat{\mathbf{j}}\) along the directions of \((\hat{\mathbf{i}}+\hat{\mathbf{j}})\) and \((\hat{\mathbf{i}}-\hat{\mathbf{j}})\)? (NCERT)
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 69
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 70

Question 57.
The angular momentum \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{L}}=\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}} \times \overrightarrow{\mathrm{p}}\), where \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{r}}\) is a position vector and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{p}}\) is linear momentum of a body.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 71
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 72

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods

Question 58.
If \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A}}=2 \hat{\mathbf{i}}-\hat{\mathbf{j}}+\hat{\mathbf{k}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{B}}=\hat{\mathbf{i}}+2 \hat{\mathbf{j}}-\hat{\mathbf{k}}\) are two vectors, find \(|\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A}} \times \overrightarrow{\mathbf{B}}|\)
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 73

Question 59.
Find unit vectors perpendicular to the plane of the vectors, \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A}}\) = \(\) and
\(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{B}}\) = \(2 \hat{\mathbf{i}}-\hat{\mathbf{k}}\)
Solution:
Let required unit vector be \(\hat{\mathrm{u}}\).
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 74
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 75

Question 60.
\(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{P}}\) = \(\hat{\mathbf{i}}+\mathbf{2} \hat{\mathbf{k}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{Q}}\) = \(2 \hat{\mathbf{i}}+\hat{\mathbf{j}}-2 \hat{\mathbf{k}}\) are two vectors, find the unit vector parallel to \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{P}} \times \overrightarrow{\mathbf{Q}}\). Also find the vector perpendicular to P and Q of magnitude 6 units.
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 76

Question 61.
Find the area of a triangle formed by \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A}}\) = \(\hat{3} \hat{\mathbf{i}}-4 \hat{\mathbf{j}}+2 \hat{\mathbf{k}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{B}}\) = \(\hat{\mathbf{i}}+\hat{\mathbf{j}}-\boldsymbol{2} \hat{\mathbf{k}}\) as adjacent sides measure in metre. Solution:
Given: Two adjacent sides of triangle,
\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) = \(3 \hat{\mathrm{i}}-4 \hat{\mathrm{j}}+2 \hat{\mathrm{k}}\), \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) = \(\hat{i}+\hat{j}-2 \hat{k}\)
To find: Area of triangle
Formula: Area of triangle =
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 77
Answer:
Area of the triangle is 6.1 m2.

Question 62.
Find the derivatives of the functions,
i. f(x) = x8
ii. f(x) = x3 + sin x
Solution:
i. Using \(\frac{\mathrm{dx}^{\mathrm{n}}}{\mathrm{dx}}\) = nxn-1,
\(\frac{d\left(x^{8}\right)}{d x}\) = 8x7

ii.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 78

Question 63.
Find derivatives of e2x – tan x
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 79

Question 64.
Find the derivatives of the functions.
f(x) = x3 sin x
Solution:
Using,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 80

Question 65.
Find derivatives of \(\frac{d}{d x}(x \times \ln x)\)
Solution:
Using,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 81

Question 66.
Evaluate the following integrals.

i. \(\int x^{8} d x\)
Solution:
Using formula \(\int x^{n} d x\) = \(\frac{x^{n+1}}{n+1}\),
\(\int x^{8} d x\) = \(\frac{x^{9}}{9}\)

ii. \(\int_{2}^{5} x^{2} d x\)
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 82

iii) \(\int(x+\sin x) d x\)
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 83

iv) \(\int\left(\frac{10}{x}+e^{x}\right) d x\)
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 84

v) \(\int_{1}^{4}\left(x^{3}-x\right) d x\)
Answer:
Using,
f1(x) – f2(x) = \(\int f_{1}(x)-\int f_{2}(x)\)
Here,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 85

Question 67.
A man applies a force of 10 N on a garbage crate. If another man applies a force of 8 N on the same crate at an angle of 60° with respect to previous, then what will be the resultant force and direction of the crate, if crate is stationary.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 86
Answer:
A resultant force of 15.62 N is applied on a crate at an angle of 26.56°.

Question 68.
A lady dropped her wallet in the parking lot of a super market. A boy picked the wallet up and ran towards the lady. He set off at 60° to the verge, heading towards the lady with a speed of 10 m s-1, as shown in the diagram.
Find the component of velocity of boy directly across the parking strip.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 87
Answer:
The angle between velocity vector and the direction of path is 60°.
∴ Component of velocity across the parking strip
= v × cos 60°
= 10-1 × cos 60°
= 5 m s-1

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods

Question 69.
On an open ground, a biker follows a track that turns to his left by an angle of 60° after every 600 m. Starting from a given turn, specify the displacement of the biker at the third and sixth turn. Compare the magnitude of the displacement with the total path length covered by the motorist in each case.
Answer:
The path followed by the biker will be a closed hexagonal path. Suppose the motorist starts his journey from the point O.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 88
= 1200 m
= 1.2 km
∴ Total path length = \(|\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OA}}|+|\overrightarrow{\mathrm{AB}}|+|\overrightarrow{\mathrm{BC}}|\)
= 600 + 600 + 600
= 1800 m
= 1.8 km
The ratio of the magnitude of displacement to the total path-length = \(\frac{1.2}{1.8}\) = \(\frac{2}{3}\) = 0.67

ii. The motorist will take the sixth turn at O.
Displacement is zero.
path-length is = 3600 m or 3.6 km.
Ration of magnitude of displacement and path-length is zero.

Question 70.
What is the resultant of vectors shown in the figure below?
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 89
Answer:
If number of vectors are represented by the various sides of a closed polygon taken in one order then, their resultant is always zero.

Question 71.
If \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{P}}\) is moving away from a point and \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{Q}}\) is moving towards a point then, can their resultant be found using parallelogram law of vector addition?
Answer:
No. Resultant cannot be found by parallelogram law of vector addition because to apply law of parallelogram of vectors the two vectors and should either act towards a point or away from a point.

Question 72.
Which of the throwing is a vector?
(A) speed
(B) displacement
(C) mass
(D) time
Answer:
(B) displacement

Question 73.
The equation \(\vec{a}+\vec{a}=\vec{a}\) is
(A) meaningless
(B) always truc
(C) may he possible for limited values of a’
(D) true only when \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{a}}=0\)
Answer:
(D) true only when \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{a}}=0\)

Question 74.
The minimum number of numerically equal vectors whose vector sum can be zero is
(A) 4
(B) 3
(C) 2
(D) 1
Answer:
(C) 2

Question 75.
If \(\vec{A}+\vec{B}=\vec{A}-\vec{B}\) then vector \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) must be
(A) zero vector
(B) unit vector
(C) Non zero vector
(D) equal to \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\)
Answer:
(A) zero vector

Question 76.
If \(\hat{\mathrm{n}}\) is the unit vector in the direction of \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\), then,
(A) \(\hat{n}=\frac{\vec{A}}{|\vec{A}|}\)
(B) \(\hat{\mathrm{n}}=\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}|\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}|\)
(C) \(\hat{\mathrm{n}}=\frac{|\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}|}{\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}}\)
(D) \(\hat{\mathrm{n}}=\hat{\mathrm{n}} \times \overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\)
Answer:
(A) \(\hat{n}=\frac{\vec{A}}{|\vec{A}|}\)

Question 77.
Two quantities of 5 and 12 unit when added gives a quantity 13 unit. This quantity is
(A) time
(B) mass
(C) linear momentum
(D) speed
Answer:
(C) linear momentum

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods

Question 78.
A force of 60 N acting perpendicular to a force of 80 N, magnitude of resultant force is
(A) 20N
(B) 70N
(C) 100 N
(D) 140 N
Answer:
(C) 100 N

Question 79.
A river is flowing at the rate of 6 km h-1. A man swims across it with a velocity of 9 km h-1. The resultant velocity of the man will be
(A) \(\sqrt{15} \mathrm{~km} \mathrm{~h}^{-1}\)
(B) \(\sqrt{45} \mathrm{~km} \mathrm{~h}^{-1}\)
(C) \(\sqrt{117} \mathrm{~km} \mathrm{~h}^{-1}\)
(D) \(\sqrt{225} \mathrm{~km} \mathrm{~h}^{-1}\)
Answer:
(C) \(\sqrt{117} \mathrm{~km} \mathrm{~h}^{-1}\)

Question 80.
If \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}=\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}+\overrightarrow{\mathrm{C}}\) and magnitudes of \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\), \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{C}}\) are 5, 4 and 3 unit respectively, then angle between \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) is
(A) sin-1 (3/4)
(B) cos-1 (4/5)
(C) tan-1 (5/3)
(D) cos-1 (3/5)
Answer:
(B) cos-1 (4/5)

Question 81.
If \(\vec{A}=\hat{i}+2 \hat{j}+3 \hat{k}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}=3 \hat{\mathrm{i}}-2 \hat{\mathrm{j}}+\hat{\mathrm{k}}\), then the area of parallelogram formed from these vectors as the adjacent sides will be
(A) 2\(\sqrt{3}\) square units
(B) 4\(\sqrt{3}\) square units
(C) 6\(\sqrt{3}\) square units
(D) 8\(\sqrt{3}\) square units
Answer:
(D) 8\(\sqrt{3}\) square units

Question 82.
A person moves from a point S and walks along the path which is a square of each side 50 m. He runs east, south, then west and finally north. Then the total displacement covered is
(A) 200m
(B) 100 m
(C) 50\(\sqrt{2}\) m
(D) zero
Answer:
(D) zero

Question 83.
The maximum value of magnitude of \((\vec{A}-\vec{B})\) is
(A) A – B
(B) A
(C) A + B
(D) \(\sqrt{\left(A^{2}+B^{2}\right)}\)
Answer:
(C) A + B

Question 84.
The magnitude of the X and Y components of \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) are 7 and 6. Also the magnitudes of the X and Y components of \(\vec{A}+\vec{B}\) are 11 and 9 respectively. What is the magnitude of
(A) 5
(B) 6
(C) 8
(D)
Answer:
(A) 5

Question 85.
What is the maximum n Limber of components into which a force can be resolved?
(A) Two
(B) Three
(C) Four
(D) Any number
Answer:
(D) Any number

Question 86.
The resultant of two vectors of magnitude \(|\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}|\) is also \(|\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}|\). They act at an angle
(A) 60°
(B) 90°
(C) 120°
(D) 180°
Answer:
(C) 120°

Question 87.
The vectors \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) are such that \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{C}}\) and A2 + B2 = C2. Angle θ between positive directions of \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) is
(A) \(\frac{\pi}{2}\)
(B) 0
(C) π
(D) \(\frac{2 \pi}{3}\)
Answer:
(A) \(\frac{\pi}{2}\)

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods

Question 88.
The expression \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}(\hat{\mathrm{i}}+\hat{\mathrm{j}})\) is a
(A) unit vector
(B) null vector
(C) vector of magnitude \(\sqrt{2}\)
(D) scalar
Answer:
(A) unit vector

Question 89.
What is the angle between \(\hat{i}+\hat{j}+\hat{k}\) and \(\hat{\mathrm{i}}\)?
(A) 0°
(B) \(\frac{\pi}{6}\)
(C) \(\frac{\pi}{3}\)
(D) None of the above
Answer:
(D) None of the above

Question 90.
\((\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}+\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}})\) is a unit vector along X-axis. If \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}=\hat{\mathrm{i}}-\hat{\mathrm{j}}+\hat{\mathrm{k}}\) then \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) is
(A) \(\hat{\mathrm{i}}+\hat{\mathrm{j}}-\hat{\mathrm{k}}\)
(B) \(\hat{\mathrm{j}}-\hat{\mathrm{k}}\)
(C) \(\hat{i}+\hat{j}+\hat{k}\)
(D) \(\hat{\mathrm{j}}+\hat{\mathrm{k}}\)
Answer:
(B) \(\hat{\mathrm{j}}-\hat{\mathrm{k}}\)

Question 91.
The magnitude of scalar product of the vectors \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}=2 \hat{\mathrm{i}}+5 \hat{\mathrm{k}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}=3 \hat{\mathrm{i}}+4 \hat{\mathrm{k}}\) is
(A) 20
(B) 22
(C) 26
(D) 29
Answer:
(C) 26

Question 92.
Three vectors \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\), \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{C}}\) satisfy the relation \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) . \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) = 0 and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\). \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{C}}\) = 0, then \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) is parallel to
(A) \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\)
(B) \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{C}}\)
(C) \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) × \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{C}}\)
(D) \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) . \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{C}}\)
Answer:
(C) \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) × \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{C}}\)

Question 93.
What vector must be added to the sum of two vectors \(2 \hat{\mathrm{i}}-\hat{\mathrm{j}}+3 \hat{\mathrm{k}}\) and \(3 \hat{\mathrm{i}}-2 \hat{\mathrm{j}}-2 \hat{\mathrm{k}}\) so that the resultant is a unit vector along Z axis?
(A) \(5 \hat{\hat{i}}+\hat{\mathrm{k}}\)
(B) \(-5 \hat{i}+3 \hat{j}\)
(C) \(3 \hat{j}+5 \hat{k}\)
(D) \(-3 \hat{\mathrm{j}}+2 \hat{\mathrm{k}}\)
Answer:
(B) \(-5 \hat{i}+3 \hat{j}\)

Question 94.
\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}=5 \overrightarrow{\mathrm{i}}-2 \overrightarrow{\mathrm{j}}+3 \overrightarrow{\mathrm{k}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}=2 \overrightarrow{\mathrm{i}}+\overrightarrow{\mathrm{j}}+2 \overrightarrow{\mathrm{k}}\), then component of \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) along \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) is
(A) \(\frac{\sqrt{28}}{38}\)
(B) \(\frac{28}{\sqrt{38}}\)
(C) \(\frac{\sqrt{28}}{48}\)
(D) \(\frac{14}{\sqrt{38}}\)
Answer:
(D) \(\frac{14}{\sqrt{38}}\)

Question 95.
Choose the WRONG statement
(A) The division of vector by scalar is valid.
(B) The multiplication of vector by scalar is valid.
(C) The multiplication of vector by another vector is valid by using vector algebra.
(D) The division of a vector by another vector is valid by using vector algebra.
Answer:
(D) The division of a vector by another vector is valid by using vector algebra.

Question 96.
The resultant of two forces of 3 N and 4 N is 5 N, the angle between the forces is
(A) 30°
(B) 60°
(C) 90°
(D) 120°
Answer:
(C) 90°

Question 97.
The unit vector along \(\hat{\mathrm{i}}+\hat{\mathrm{j}}\) is
(A) \(\hat{\mathrm{k}}\)
(B) \(\hat{\mathrm{i}}+\hat{\mathrm{j}}\)
(C) \(\frac{\hat{\mathrm{i}}+\hat{\mathrm{j}}}{\sqrt{2}}\)
(D) \(\frac{\hat{\mathrm{i}}+\hat{\mathrm{j}}}{2}\)
Answer:
(C) \(\frac{\hat{\mathrm{i}}+\hat{\mathrm{j}}}{\sqrt{2}}\)

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 11th Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 1.
Explain the term: Displacement.
Answer:
Displacement:

  1. Displacement of a particle for a time interval is the difference between the position vectors of the object in that time interval.
  2. Let \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{x}_{1}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{x}_{2}}\) be the position vectors of a particle at time t1 and t2 respectively. Then the displacement \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{S}}\) in time ∆t = (t2 – t\overrightarrow{\mathrm{s}}=\Delta \overrightarrow{\mathrm{x}}=\overrightarrow{\mathrm{x}}_{2}-\overrightarrow{\mathrm{x}}_{1}) is given by \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{s}}=\Delta \overrightarrow{\mathrm{x}}=\overrightarrow{\mathrm{x}}_{2}-\overrightarrow{\mathrm{x}}_{1}\)
  3. Dimensions of displacement are equal to that of length i.e.. [L1M0T0].
  4. Displacement is a vector quantity.
  5. Example:
    • For an object has travelled through 1 m from time t1 to t2 along the positive X-direction, the magnitude of its displacement is I m and its direction is along the positive X-axis.
    • On the other hand, for an object has travelled through I m from time t1 to t1 along the positive Y-direction, the magnitude of its displacement remains same i.e., I m but the direction of the displacement is along the positive Y-axis.

Question 2.
Explain the term: Path length.
Answer:

  1. Path length is the actual distance travelled by the particle during its motion.
  2. It is a scalar quantity.
  3. Dimensions of path length are equal to that of length i.e.. [L1M0T0]
  4. Example:
    • If an object travels along the X-axis from x = 3 m to x = 6 m then the distance travelled is 3 m. In this case the displacement is also 3 m and its direction is along the positive X-axis.
    • However, if the object now comes back to x 5, then the distance through which the object has moved increases to 3 + I = 4 m. Its initial position was x 3 m and the final position is now x = 5 m and thus, its displacement is ∆x = 5 – 3 = 2 m, i.e., the magnitude of the displacement is 2 m and its direction is along the positive X-axis.
    • If the object now moves to x =1, then the distance travelled, i.e., the path length increases to 4 + 4 = 8 m while the magnitude of displacement becomes 3 – 1 = 2 m and its direction is along the negative X-axis.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 3.
Explain the terms:
i. Average velocity
ii. Instantaneous velocity
iii. Average speed
iv. Instantaneous speed
Answer:
i) Average velocity:

  1. Average velocity (\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}_{\mathrm{av}}\)) of an object is the displacement (\(\Delta \overrightarrow{\mathrm{x}}\)) of the object during the time interval (∆t) over which average velocity is being calculated, divided by that time interval.
  2. Average velocity = (\(\frac{\text { Displacement }}{\text { Time interval }}\))
    \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{V}_{\mathrm{av}}}=\frac{\overrightarrow{\mathrm{x}}_{2}-\overrightarrow{\mathrm{x}}_{1}}{\mathrm{t}_{2}-\mathrm{t}_{1}}=\frac{\Delta \overrightarrow{\mathrm{x}}}{\Delta \mathrm{t}}\)
  3. Average velocity is a vector quantity.
  4. Its SI unit is m/s and dimensions are [M0L1T-1]
  5. For example, if the positions of an object are x +4 m and x = +6 m at times t = O and t = 1 minute respectively, the magnitude of its average velocity during that time is Vav = (6 – 4)1(1 – 0) = 2 m per minute and its direction will be along the positive X-axis.
    ∴ \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}_{\mathrm{av}}\) = 2 i m/min
    Where, i = unit vector along X-axis.

ii) Instantaneous velocity:

  1. The instantaneous velocity (\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{V}}\)) is the limiting value of ¡he average velocity of the object over a small time interval (∆t) around t when the value of lime interval goes to zero.
  2. It is the velocity of an object at a given instant of time.
  3. \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}=\lim _{\Delta t \rightarrow 0} \frac{\Delta \overrightarrow{\mathrm{x}}}{\Delta \mathrm{t}}=\frac{\mathrm{d} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{x}}}{\mathrm{dt}}\)
    where \(\frac{\mathrm{d} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{x}}}{\mathrm{dt}}\) derivative of \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{x}}\) with respect to t.

iii) Average speed:

  1. Average speed of an object is the total path length (distance) travelled by the object during the time interval over which average speed is being calculated, divided by that time interval.
  2. Average speed = \(\frac{\text { Total path length }}{\text { Total time interval }}\)
  3. Average speed is a scalar quantity.
  4. Its S.I. unit is m/s and dimensions are [M0V1T-1].
  5. In rectilinear motion;
    • If the motion of the object is only in one direction, then the magnitude of displacement will be equal to the path length and hence the magnitude of average velocity will be equal to the average speed.
    • If the motion of the object reverses its direction, then the magnitude of displacement will be less then the path length and hence the magnitude of average velocity will be less than the average speed.

iv) Instantaneous speed:
The instantaneous speed is the limiting value of the average speed of the object over a small time interval ‘∆t’ around t when the value of time interval goes to zero.

Question 4.
Distinguish between uniform rectilinear motion and non-uniform rectilinear motion.
Answer:

No. Uniformly rectilinear motion Non-uniform rectilinear motion
i. The object is moving with constant velocity. The object is moving with variable velocity.
ii. The average and instantaneous velocities are same. The average and instantaneous velocities are different.
iii. The average and instantaneous speeds are the same. The average and instantaneous speeds are different.
iv. The average and instantaneous speeds are equal to the magnitude of the velocity. The average speed will be different from the magnitude of average velocity.

Question 5.
Explain the terms:

  1. Acceleration
  2. Average acceleration
  3. Instantaneous acceleration

Answer:

  1. Acceleration:
    • Acceleration is the rate of change of velocity with respect to time.
    • It is a vector quantity.
    • Dimension: [M0L1T-2]
    • If a particle moves with constant velocity, its acceleration is zero.
  2. Average acceleration:
    • Average acceleration is the change in velocity divided by the total time required for the change.
    • If \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}_{\mathrm{1}}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}_{\mathrm{2}}}\) are the velocities of the T particle at time t1 and t2 respectively, then the change in velocity is \(\) and time required for this change is ∆t = t2 – t1
      ∴ \(\vec{a}_{a v}=\frac{\vec{v}_{2}-\vec{v}_{1}}{t_{2}-t_{1}}=\frac{\Delta \vec{v}}{\Delta t}\)
  3. Instantaneous acceleration:
    • The instantaneous acceleration a is the limiting value of the average acceleration of the object over a small time interval ‘∆t’ around t when the value of time interval goes to zero.
      \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{a}}_{\text {inst }}=\lim _{\Delta t \rightarrow 0} \frac{\Delta \overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}}{\Delta \mathrm{t}}=\frac{\mathrm{d} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}}{\mathrm{d} \mathrm{t}}\)
    • Instantaneous acceleration is the slope of the tangent to the velocity-time graph at a position corresponding to given instant of time.
      [Note: Generally, when the term acceleration is used, it is an instantaneous acceleration.]

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 6.
Draw and explain the position-time graph of:

  1. An object at rest.
  2. An object moving with uniform velocity along positive x-axis.
  3. An object moving with uniform velocity along negative x-axis.
  4. An object moving with non-uniform velocity.
  5. An object performing oscillatory motion with constant speed.

Answer:

  1. The position-time graph of an object at rest:
    • For an object at rest, the position-time graph is a horizontal straight line parallel to time axis.
    • The displacement of the object is zero as there is no change in the object’s position.
    • Slope of the graph is zero, which indicates that velocity of the particle is zero.
      Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 1
  2. The position-time graph of an object moving with uniform velocity along positive x-axis:
    • When an object moves, the position of the particle changes with respect to time.
    • Since velocity is constant, displacement is proportional to elapsed time.
    • The graph is a straight line with positive slope, showing that the velocity is along the positive x-axis.
    • In this case, as the motion is uniform, the average velocity and instantaneous velocity are equal at all times.
    • Speed is equal to the magnitude of the velocity.
      Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 2
  3. Position-time graph of an object moving with uniform velocity along negative x- axis:
    • The graph is a straight line with negative slope, showing that the velocity is along the negative x-axis.
    • Displacement decreases with increase in time.
      Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 3
  4. Position-time graph of a particle moving with non-uniform velocity;
    • When the velocity of an object changes with time, slope of the graph is different at different points. Therefore, the average and instantaneous velocities are different.
    • Average velocity over time interval from t1 to t4 around time t0 = slope of line AB.
    • Average velocity over time interval from t2 to t3 = slope of line CD
    • On further reducing the time interval around t0, it can be deduced that, instantaneous interval at t0 = the slope of the tangent PQ at t0.
      Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 4
  5. Position-time graph of an object performing oscillatory motion with constant speed:
    For an object performing oscillatory motion with constant speed, the direction of velocity changes from positive to negative and vice versa over fixed intervals of time.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 5

Question 7.
Explain the velocity-tune graphs of an object:
i) Moving with zero acceleration.
ii) Moving with constant positive acceleration.
iii) Moving with constant negative acceleration.
iv) Moving with non-uniform acceleration.
Answer:
i) Object is moving with zero acceleration:

  1. Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 6
  2. As the acceleration is zero, the graph will be a straight line parallel to time axis.
  3. Velocity of the particle is constant as the acceleration is zero.
  4. Magnitude of displacement of object from t1 to t2 = v0 × (t2 – t1) shaded area under velocity-time graph.

ii) Object is moving with constant positive acceleration:

  1. The velocity-time graph is linear.
  2. Velocity increases with increase in time. as acceleration is positive (along the direction of velocity).
  3. The area under the velocity-time graph between two instants of time t1 and t2 gives the displacement of the object during that time interval.
  4. Slope of the graph is \(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{v}}{\Delta \mathrm{t}}\) = positive acceleration
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 7

iii) Object is moving with constant negative acceleration:

  1. The velocity-time graph is linear.
  2. Velocity decreases with increase in time as acceleration is negative (opposite to the direction of velocities).
  3. The area tinder the velocity-time graph between two instants of time t1 and t2 gives the displacement 0f the object during that time interval.
  4. Slope of the graph is \(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{v}}{\Delta \mathrm{t}}\) negative acceleration
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 8

iv. Object is moving with non-uniform acceleration:

  1. Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 9
  2. Velocity-time graph is non-linear.
  3. The area under the velocity-time graph between two instants of time t1 and t2 gives the displacement of the object during that time interval area under the velocity-time curve =
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 10
    = x(t2) – x(t1)
    = displacement of the object from t1 to t2.

Question 8.
A ball thrown vertically upwards from a point P on earth reaches a point Q and returns back to earth striking at a point R. Draw speed-time graph to depict the motion of the ball (Neglect air resistance).
Answer:

  • Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 11
  • A ball which is thrown up with a certain initial speed goes up with decreasing speed to a certain height where its speed becomes zero.
  • Now, during its downward motion, the speed goes on increasing from zero and reaches its initial value when it strikes the ground.
  • The speed-time graph for the motion of a ball is as shown in the figure.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 9.
Figure shows velocity-time graph for various situations. What does each graph indicate?
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 12
Answer:

  1. Initial velocity, u > 0. Also, velocity is constant with time. Hence, acceleration is zero.
  2. As finite initial velocity is increasing with time, acceleration, a > 0 and is constant.
  3. Initial velocity, u = 0. Velocity is increasing with time so, acceleration a is positive. But it is decreasing in magnitude with time.
  4. Initial velocity, u = 0. Velocity is linearly increasing with time. Hence, starting from rest acceleration is constant.
  5. Initial velocity, u = 0. Acceleration and velocity is increasing with time.
  6. Initial velocity u > 0. Velocity decreases and ultimately comes to rest. Hence, acceleration a < 0.

Question 10.
‘The distances travelled by an object starting from rest and having a positive uniform acceleration in successive seconds are in the ratio 1:3:5:7….’ Prove it.
Answer:

  1. Consider an object under free fall, Initial velocity u = 0, acceleration a = g
  2. The distance travelled by the object in equal time intervals t0 can be given by the second law of motion as,
    s = ut0 + \(\frac{1}{2}\) gt02
  3. Distance travelled in the first time interval to,
    s1 = 0 + \(\frac{1}{2}\)gt02 = \(\frac{1}{2}\) gt02
    Substituting \(\frac{\mathrm{g}}{2}\) = A, we have s1 = At02
  4. Distance travelled in the time interval 2t0 = A (2t0)2
    ∴ The distance travelled in the second t0 interval, s2 = A(4t02 – t02) = 3At0\frac{\mathrm{g}}{2} = 3s1
  5. Distance travelled in the time interval 3t0 = A(3t0)2
    ∴ The distance travelled in the third to interval,
    s3 = A (9t02 – 4t02) = 5 At02 = 5s1
  6. On continuing, it can be seen that the distances travelled, (s1 : s2 : s3 ….) are in the ratio (1 : 3 : 5 :….)

Question 11.
Explain the concept of relative velocity along a straight line with the help of an example.
Answer:

  1. Consider two trains A and B moving on two parallel tracks in the same direction.
  2. Case 1: Train B overtakes train A.
    For a passenger in train A, train B appears to be moving slower than train A. This happens because the passenger in train A perceives the velocity of train B with respect to him/her i.e., the difference in the velocities of the two trains which is much smaller than the velocity of train A.
  3. Case 2: Train A overtakes train B.
    For a passenger in train A, train B appears to be moving faster than train A. This happens because the passenger in train A perceives the velocity of the train B w.r.t. to him/her i.e., the difference in the velocities of the two trains which is larger than the velocity of train A.
  4. If \(\vec{v}_{\mathrm{A}}\) and \(\vec{v}_{\mathrm{B}}\) be the velocities of two bodies then relative velocity of A with respect to B is given by \(\vec{v}_{A B}=\vec{v}_{A}-\vec{v}_{B}\).
  5. Similarly the velocity of B with respect to A is given by, \(\vec{v}_{A B}=\vec{v}_{B}-\vec{v}_{A}\).
    Thus, relative velocity of an object w.r.t. another object is the difference in their velocities
  6. If two objects start form the same point at t = 0, with different velocities, distance between them increases with time in direct proportion to the relative velocity between them.

Solved Problems

Question 12.
A person walks from point P to point Q along a straight road ¡n 10 minutes, then turns back and returns to point R which ¡s midway between P and Q after further 4 minutes. If PQ is 1 km, find the average speed and velocity of the person in going from P to R.
Solution:
Given: time taken (t) = 10 + 4 = 14 minutes,
distance (s) = PQ + QR = 1 + 0.5 = 1.5 km,
displacement = PQ – QR = 1 – 0.5 = 0.5km
To find: Average speed, average velocity (v)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 13
The average speed and average velocity of the person is 6.42 km/hr and 2.142 km/hr respectively.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 13.
A car moves at a constant speed of 60 km/hr for 1 km and 40 km/hr for next 1 km. What ¡s the average speed of the car?
Solution:
Given. v1 = 60 km/hr, x1 = 1 km,
v2 = 40 km/hr, x2 = 1 km
To find: Average speed of car (Vav)
Formula: vav = \(\frac{\text { total path length }}{\text { total time interval }}\)
Calculation: From given data,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 14
∴ Average speed of car = 48 km/hr
The average speed of the car is 48 km/hr

Question 14.
A stone is thrown vertically upwards from the ground with a velocity 15 m/s. At the same instant a ball is dropped from a point directly above the stone from a height of 30 m. At what height from the ground will the stone and the ball meet and after how much time? (Use g = 10 m/s2 for ease of calculation).
Solution:
Let the stone and the ball meet after time t0. From second equation of motion, the distances travelled by the stone and the ball in that time is given as,
Sstone = 15 t0 – \(\frac{1}{2}\) gt02
Sball = \(\frac{1}{2}\) gt02
When they meet. Sstone + Sball = 30
∴ 15t0 – \(\frac{1}{2}\) gt02 + \(\frac{1}{2}\) gt02 = 30
t0 = \(\frac{30}{15}\) = 2 s
∴ Sstone = 15 (2) – \(\frac{1}{2}\) (10) (2)2 = 30 – 20 = 10 m
The stone and the ball meet at a height of 10 m after time 2s.

Question 15.
A ball is dropped from the top of a building 122.5 m high. How long will it take to reach the ground? What wilt be its velocity when it strikes the ground?
Solution:
Given: s = h = 122.5 m, u = 0,
a = g = 9.8 ms2
To find: i) Time taken to reach the ground (t)
ii) Velocity of ball when it strikes ground (v)

Formulae: i) s = ut + \(\frac{1}{2}\) at2
ii) v = u + gt
Calculation: From formula (i),
122.5 = 0 + \(\frac{1}{2}\) × 9.8 t2
t2 = \(\frac{122.5}{4.9}\) = 25
t = \(\sqrt {25}\) = 5 second
From formula (ii),
v = u + gt
v = 0 + 9.8 × 5 = 49 m/s

i) Time taken to reach the ground is 5 s.
ii) Velocity of the ball when it strikes the ground is 49 m/s.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 16.
The position vectors of three particles are given by
\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{x}}_{1}=(5 \hat{\mathrm{i}}+5 \hat{\mathrm{j}}) \mathrm{m}\), \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{x}}_{2}=(5 \mathrm{t} \hat{\mathrm{i}}+5 \mathrm{t} \hat{\mathrm{j}}) \mathrm{m}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{x}}_{3}=\left(5 \mathrm{t} \hat{\mathrm{i}}+10 \mathrm{t}^{2} \hat{\mathrm{j}}\right) \mathrm{m}\) as a function of time t.
Determine the velocity and acceleration for each, in SI units.
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 15
v2 = \(\sqrt{5^{2}+5^{2}}\) = 5\(\sqrt{2}\) m/s
tan θ = \(\frac{5}{5}\) = 1
∴ θ = 45°
Direction of v2 makes an angle of 45° to the horizontal.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 16
Thus, third particle is getting accelerated along the y-axis at 20 m/s2.

Question 17.
The initial velocity of an object is \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{u}}=5 \hat{\mathrm{i}}+10 \hat{\mathrm{j}} \mathrm{m} / \mathrm{s}\). Its constant acceleration is \(\vec{a}=2 \hat{i}+3 \hat{j} \mathrm{~m} / \mathrm{s}^{2}\). Determine the velocity and the displacement after 5 s.
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 17
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 18

Question 18.
An aeroplane A, is travelling in a straight line with a velocity of 300 km/hr with respect to Earth. Another aeroplane B, is travelling in the opposite direction with a velocity of 350 km/hr with respect to Earth. What is the relative velocity of A with respect to B? What should be the velocity of a third aeroplane C moving parallel to A, relative to the Earth if it has a relative velocity of 100 km/hr with respect to A?
Solution:
Given: vA = 300 km/hr, vB = 350 km/hr,
vCA = 100 km/hr
To find: i) Velocity of plane A relative to B (vA – vB)
ii) Velocity of aeroplane C (vC)

Formula: i) vAB = vA – vB
ii) vCA = vC – vA

Calculations: From formula (i),
vAB = vA – vB = 300 – (-350)
∴ vAB = 650 km/hr
From formula (ii),
vC = vCA + vA = 100 + 300 = 400 km/hr

i) The relative velocity of A with respect to B is 650 km/hr.
ii) The velocity of plane C relative to Earth is 400 km/hr.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 19.
A car moving at a speed 10 m/s on a straight road is ahead of car B moving in the same direction at 6 m/s. Find the velocity of A relative to B and vice-versa.
Solution:
Given: vA = 10 m/s, vB = 6 m/s,
To find: i) Velocity of A relative to B (vA – vB)
ii) Velocity of B relative to A (vB – vA)

Formulae: i) vAB = vA – vB
ii) vBA = vB – vA

Calculation: From formula (i),
vAB = 10 – 6 = 4 m/s
From formula (ii),
vBA = 6 – 10 = -4 m/s
-ve sign indicates that driver of car A sees the car B lagging behind at the rate of 4 m/s.
∴ vAB = 4 m/s, vBA = -4 m/s

i) Velocity of A relative to B is 4 m/s.
ii) Velocity of B relative to A is -4 m/s.

Question 20.
Two trains 120 m and 80 m in length are running in opposite directions with velocities 42 km/h and 30 km/h respectively. In what time will they completely cross each other?
Solution:
Given: l1 = 120 m, l2 = 80 m,
vA = 42 km/h = 42 × \(\frac{5}{18}\) = \(\frac{35}{3}\) m/s,
vB = -30km/h= -30 × \(\frac{5}{18}\) = \(\frac{-25}{3}\) m/s
To find: Time taken by trains to cross each other (t)
Formula: Time = \(\frac{\text { Distance }}{\text { speed }}\)

Calculation :
Total distance to be travelled
= sum of lengths of two trains
= 120 + 80 = 200m
Relative velocity of A with respect to B is vAB,
vAB = vA – vB
= \(\frac{35}{3}\) – (\(\frac{-25}{3}\))
= \(\frac{60}{3}\)
∴ vAB = 20m/S
From formula,
∴ Time taken to cross each other (t) = \(\frac{\text { Distance }}{\text { speed }}\)
= \(\frac{200}{20}\)
= 10 s
Time taken by the two trains to cross each other is 10 s.

Question 21.
A jet aeroplane travelling at the speed of 500 km/hr ejects its products of combustion at speed of 1500 km/hr relative to jet plane. What is the relative velocity of the latter with respect to an observer on the ground?
Solution:
Let us consider the positive direction of motion towards the observer on the ground.
Suppose \(\vec{v}_{\mathrm{a}}\) and \(\vec{v}_{\mathrm{cj}}\) be the velocities of the aeroplane and relative velocity of combustion products w.r.t. aeroplane respectively.

∴ \(\vec{v}_{\mathrm{cj}}\) = 1,500 km/hr (towards the observer on the ground) and \(\vec{v}_{\mathrm{a}}\) = 500 km/hr (away from the observer on the ground)
∴ – \(\vec{v}_{\mathrm{a}}\) = -500 km/ hr (towards the observer on the ground)

Let \(\vec{v}_{\mathrm{c}}\) be the velocity of the combustion products towards the observer on ground then,
\(\vec{v}_{\mathrm{c} j}=\vec{v}_{\mathrm{c}}-\vec{v}_{\mathrm{a}}\)
∴ \(\vec{v}_{\mathrm{c} }=\vec{v}_{\mathrm{cj}}-\vec{v}_{\mathrm{a}}\)
= 1500 + (-500)
= 1000 km/hr
∴ \(\vec{v}_{\mathrm{c}}\) = 1000 km/hr
The relative velocity of the combustion products w.r.t. the observer is 1000 km/hr.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 22.
Derive the expression for average velocity and instantaneous velocity for the motion of an object in x-y plane.
Answer:
i) Consider an object to be at point A at time t1 in an x—y plane.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 19
ii) At time t1, the position vector of the object is given as,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 20
vii) The instantaneous velocity of the object at point A along the trajectory is along the tangent to the curve at A. This is shown by the vector AB.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 21
Equation (3) is the slope of the tangent to the curve at the point at which we are calculating the instantaneous velocity.

Question 23.
Derive the expression for average acceleration and instantaneous acceleration for the motion of an object in x-y plane.
Answer:
i) Consider an object moving in an x-y plane.
Let the velocity of the particle be \(\vec{v}_{1}\) and \(\vec{v}_{2}\) at time t1 and t2 respectively.
ii) The average acceleration (\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{a}}_{\mathrm{av}}\)) of the particle between t1 and t2 is given as,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 22
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 23
Equation (1) is the slope of the tangent to the curve at the point at which we are calculating the instantaneous acceleration.

Question 24.
Explain relative velocity between two objects moving in a plane.
Answer:

  1. If \(\vec{v}_{A}\) and \(\vec{v}_{B}\) be the velocities of two bodies then relative velocity of A with respect to B is given by, \(\vec{v}_{A B}=\vec{v}_{A}-\vec{v}_{B}\)
  2. Similarly, the velocity of B with respect to A is given by, \(\vec{v}_{\text {BA }}=\vec{v}_{\text {B }}-\overrightarrow{v_{A}}\)
  3. Thus, the magnitudes of the two relative velocities are equal and their directions are opposite.
  4. For a number of objects A, B, C, D—Y, Z, moving with respect to the other. The velocity of A relative to Z can be given as, \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}_{\mathrm{AZ}}=\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}_{\mathrm{AB}}+\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}_{\mathrm{BC}}+\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}_{\mathrm{CD}}+\ldots+\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}_{\mathrm{XY}}+\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}_{\mathrm{YZ}}\)
    The order of subscripts is: A → B → C → D → Z

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 25.
Write a note on projectile motion.
Answer:

  1. An object in flight after being thrown with some velocity is called a projectile and its motion is called projectile motion.
  2. Example: A bullet fired from a gun, football kicked in air, a stone thrown obliquely in air etc.
  3. In projectile motion, the object is moving freely under the influence of Earth’s gravitational field.
  4. The projectile has two components of velocity, one in the horizontal i.e., along the x- direction and the other in the vertical i.e., along the y-direction.
  5. As acceleration due to gravity acts only along the vertically downward direction, the vertical component changes in accordance with the laws of motion with ax = 0 and ay = -g.
  6. As no force is acting in the horizontal direction, the horizontal component of velocity remains unchanged.
    [Note: Retarding forces like air resistance etc. are neglected in projectile motion unless otherwise stated.]

Question 26.
Obtain an expression for the time of flight of a projectile.
Answer:
Expression for time of flight:

  1. Consider a body projected with velocity \(\vec{u}\), at an angle θ of projection from point O in the co-ordinate system of the X-Y plane, as shown in figure.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 24
  2. The initial velocity \(\vec{u}\) can be resolved into two rectangular components:
    ux = u cos θ (Horizontal component)
    uy = u sin θ (Vertical component)
  3. Thus, the horizontal component remains constant throughout the motion due to the absence of any force acting in that direction, while the vertical component changes according to, vy = uy + ay t with ay = – g and uy = u sin θ
  4. The components of velocity of the projectile at time t are given by, vx = ux = u cos θ
    vy = uy – gt = u sin θ – gt ………….. (1)
  5. At maximum height.
    vy = 0, t = tA = time of ascent = time taken to reach maximum height.
    ∴ 0 = u sin θ – gtA ……..[From(l)]
    u sin θ = gtA
    tA = \(\frac{\mathrm{u} \sin \theta}{\mathrm{g}}\) ………….. (2)
    This is time of ascent of projectile.
  6. The total time in air i.e., time of flight T is given as,
    T = 2tA ………… [From(2)]
    = \(\frac{2 \mathrm{u} \sin \theta}{\mathrm{g}}\) ………… (3)
    Equation (3) represents time of flight of projectile.

Question 27.
Define Horizontal range of projectile:
Answer:
The maximum horizontal distance travelled by the projectile is called the horizontal range (R) of the projectile.

Solved Examples

Question 28.
An aeroplane Is travelling northward with a velocity of 300 km/hr with respect to the Earth. Wind is blowing from east to west at a speed of 100 km/hr. What is the velocity of the aeroplane with respect to the wind?
Solution:
Given:
velocity of aeroplane w.r.t Earth,
\(\vec{v}_{A E}=300 \hat{j}\)
velocity of wind w.r.t Earth,
\(\vec{v}_{w E}=-100 \hat{i}\)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 25

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 29.
A hiker stands on the edge of a cliff 490 m above the ground and throws a stone horizontally with an initial speed of 15 ms-1. Neglecting air resistance, find the time taken by the stone to reach the ground, and the speed with which it hits the ground. Take = 9.8 m/s2.
Solution:
Given: h = 490m, ux = 15 ms-1, ay = 9.8 ms-1,
ax = 0
To find: i) Time taken (t)
ii) Velocity (v)

Formulae: i) t = \(\sqrt{\frac{2 \mathrm{~h}}{\mathrm{~g}}}\)
ii) v = \(\sqrt{v_{x}^{2}+v_{y}^{2}}\)

Calculation: t = \(\sqrt{\frac{2 \mathrm{~h}}{\mathrm{~g}}}=\sqrt{\frac{2 \times 490}{9.8}}\) = 10 s
vx = ux + axt= 15 + 0 × 10 = 15 m/s
uy = uy + ayt = 0 + 9.8 × 10 = 98 m/s
∴ v = \(\sqrt{\mathrm{v}_{\mathrm{x}}^{2}+\mathrm{v}_{\mathrm{y}}^{2}}=\sqrt{15^{2}+98^{2}}\)
= 99.1 m/s
The stone taken 10 s to reach the ground and hits the ground with 99.1 m/s.

Question 30.
A body is projected with a velocity of 40 ms-1. After 2 s it crosses a vertical pole of height 20.4 m. Find the angle of projection and horizontal range of projectile, (g = 9.8 ms-2).
Solution:
Given: u = 40 ms-1, t = 2 s, y = 20.4 m,
ay = -9.8 m/s2

To find: i) Angle of projection (θ)
ii) Horizontal range of projectile (R)

Formulae: i) y = uy t + \(\frac{1}{2}\) ay t2
ii) R = \(\frac{\mathrm{u}^{2} \sin 2 \theta}{\mathrm{g}}\)

Calculation: Taking vertical upward motion of the projectile from point of projection up to the top of vertical pole we have
uy = 40 sinθ,
From formula (i),
∴ 20.4 = 40 sinθ × 2 + \(\frac{1}{2}\) (-9.8) × 22
∴ 20.4 = 80 sinθ – 19.6
or sinθ = \(\frac{(20.4+19.6)}{80}=\frac{1}{2}\)
or θ = 30°.
From formula (ii),
Horizontal range = \(\frac{40^{2}}{9.8}\) sin 2 × 30°
= 141.4 m
The angle of projection is 30°. The horizontal range of projection is 141.4m

Question 31.
A stone is thrown with an initial velocity components of 20 m/s along the vertical, and 15 m/s along the horizontal direction. Determine the position and velocity of the stone after 3 s. Determine the maximum height that it will reach and the total distance travelled along the horizontal on reaching the ground. (Assume g = 10 m/s2)
Solution:
The initial velocity of the stone in x-direction = u cos θ = 15 m/s and in y-direction = u sin θ = 20 m/s
After 3 s, vx = u cos θ = 15 m/s
vy = u sin θ – gt
= 20 – 10(3)
= -10 m/s
10 m/s downwards.
∴ v = \(\sqrt{\mathrm{v}_{x}^{2}+\mathrm{v}_{\mathrm{y}}^{2}}=\sqrt{15^{2}+10^{2}}=\sqrt{225+100}=\sqrt{325}\)
∴ v = 18.03m/s
tan α = vy/vx = 10/15 = 2/3
∴ α = tan-1 (2/3) = 33° 41’ with the horizontal.
Sx = (u cos θ)t = 15 × 3 = 45m,
Sy = (u sin θ)t – \(\frac{1}{2}\)gt2 = 2o × 3 – 5(3)2
∴ Sy = 15m
The maximum vertical distance travelled is given by,
H = \(\frac{(\mathrm{u} \sin \theta)^{2}}{(2 \mathrm{~g})}=\frac{20^{2}}{(2 \times 10)}\)
∴ H = 20m
Maximum horizontal distance travelled
R = \(\frac{2 \cdot u_{x} \cdot u_{y}}{g}=\frac{2(15)(20)}{10}\) = 60 m

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 32.
A body is projected with a velocity of 30 ms-1 at an angle of 300 with the vertical.
Find
i) the maximum height
ii) time of flight and
iii) the horizontal range
Solution:
Given:
30 ms-1, θ = 90° – 30° = 60°

To find: i) The maximum height reached (H)
ii) Time of flight (T)
iii) The horizontal range (R)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 26
i) The maximum height reached by the body is 34.44 m.
ii) The time of flight of the body is 5.3 s.
iii) The horizontal range of the body is 79.53 m.

Question 33.
A projectile has a range of 50 m and reaches a maximum height of 10 m. What is the e1eation of the projectile?
Solution:
Given: R = 50m, H = 10 m
To find: Elevation of the projectile (θ)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 27
∴ θ = tan-1 (0.8)
∴ θ = 38.66°
The elevation of the projectile is 38.66°

Question 34.
A bullet fired at an angle of 300 with the horizontal hits the ground 3 km away. By adjusting the angle of projection, can one hope to hit a target 5 km away? Assume the muzzle speed to be fixed and neglect air resistance.
Solution:
R = 3km = 3000m, θ = 30°,
Distance of target R’ = 5km
Horizontal range, R = \(\frac{\mathrm{u}^{2} \sin 2 \theta}{\mathrm{g}}\)
∴ 3000 = \(\frac{\mathrm{u}^{2} \sin 60^{\circ}}{\mathrm{g}}\)
∴ \(\frac{\mathrm{u}^{2}}{\mathrm{~g}}=\frac{3000}{\sin 60^{\circ}}=\frac{3000 \times 2}{\sqrt{3}}\) = 2000\(\sqrt {3}\)
Maximum horizontal range,
Rmax = \(\frac{\mathrm{u}^{2}}{\mathrm{~g}}\) = 2000 \(\sqrt {3}\) m
= 2000 × 1.732 = 3464m = 3.46km
Since R’ > Rmax, Target cannot be hit.

Question 35.
Q.54. A ball is thrown at an angle θ and another ball ¡s thrown at an angle (90° – θ) with the horizontal direction from the same point with velocity 39.2 ms-1. The second ball reaches 50 m higher than the first balL find their individual heights. [Take g = 9.8 ms-2]
Solution:
For the first ball: Angle of projection = θ,
u = 39.2 ms-1
H = \(\frac{\mathrm{u}^{2} \sin ^{2} \theta}{2 \mathrm{~g}}\)
H = \(\frac{(39.2)^{2} \sin ^{2} \theta}{2 \times 9.8}\) …………… (i)
For the second ball: Angle of projection
= 90° – θ,
u = 39.2 ms-1,
maximum height reached = (H + 50) m
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 28
or 2H = 78.4 – 50 = 28.4
∴ H = 14.2 m
∴ Height of first ball = H = 14.2 m
Height of second ball = H + 50 = 14.2 + 50 = 64.2 m

i) Height reached by the first ball is 14.2 m.
ii) Height reached by the second ball is 64.2m.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 36.
A body is thrown with a velocity of 49 m/s at an angle of 30° with the horizontal. Find
i) the maximum height attained by it
ii) the time of flight and
iii) the horizontal range.
Solution:
Given: u = 49 m/s. θ = 30°
To find: i) The maximum height attained (H)
ii) The time of flight (T)
iii) The horizontal range (R)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 29
i) The maximum height attained by the body is 30.625 m
ii) The time of flight of the body is 5 s.
iii) The horizontal range of the body is 212.2 m.

Question 37.
A fighter plane flying horizontally at a altitude of 1.5 km with a speed of 720 km/h passes directly overhead an anti-aircraft gun. At what angle from the vertical should the gun be fired for the shell with a muzzle velocity of 600 m/s to hit the plane? At what minimum altitude should the pilot fly to avoid being hit? [Take g = 10 m /s2]
Solution:
Given: h = 1.5 km = 1500 m,
u = 600 m/s,
y = 720 km/h = 720 × \(\frac{5}{18}\) = 200 m/s

To find: i) Angle of firing (θ)
ii) Minimum altitude (H)

Formula: H = \(\frac{u^{2} \sin ^{2} \theta}{2 g}\)

Calculation:
Let the shell hit the plane t seconds after firing,
∴ 600 cos(90 – θ) × t = 200 t
∴ cos(90 – θ) = \(\frac{1}{6}\)
∴ 90° – θ = cos-1(\(\frac{1}{3}\))
cos -1(\(\frac{1}{3}\)) = 90° – θ
∴ 70°28’ = 90° – θ
∴ θ = 90° – cos-1 (\(\frac{1}{3}\))
∴ θ = 19°47’ with vertical
To avoid being hit, the plane must be at a minimum height, i.e., maximum height reached by the shell.
From formula,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 30
∴ H = 15.9 km

i) Angle made by gun with the vertical is 19°47′.
ii) Minimum altitude at which the pilot should fly is 15.9 km.

Question 38.
A both is thrown with a velocity of 40 m/s in a direction making an angle of 30° with the horizontal. Calculate
i) Horizontal range
ii) Maximum height and
iii) Time taken to reach the maximum height.
Solution:
Given: u = 40 m/s, θ = 30°
To find: i) Horizontal range (R)
ii) Maximum height (Hmax)
iii) Time to reach max. height (tA)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 31
i) Horizontal range of the body is 141.4 m.
ii) Maximum height reached by the body is 20.41 m.
iii) Time taken by the body to reach the maximum height is 2.041 s.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 39.
If a child launches paper plane with a velocity of 6 m/s2 at an angle θ with vertical.
i) What will be the maximum range of the projectile?
ii) What will be the maximum height of the projectile?
iii) Will the plane hit a lady standing at a distance of 6m?
Solution:
i) Range of projectile to given by.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 32
Hmax = 1.63 m
iii) As maximum range of projectile is 6.53 m and lady is standing 6m away, plane will hit the lady.

Question 40.
Explain the term uniform circular motion.
Answer:

  1. The motion of a body along the circumference of a circle with constant speed is called uniform circular motion.
  2. The magnitude of velocity remains constant and its direction is tangential to its circular path.
  3. The acceleration is of constant magnitude and it is perpendicular to the tangential velocity. It is always directed towards the centre of the circular path. This acceleration is called centripetal acceleration.
  4. The centripetal force provides the necessary centripetal acceleration.
  5. Examples of U.C.M:
    • Motion of the earth around the sun.
    • Motion of the moon around the earth.
    • Revolution of electron around the nucleus of atom.

Question 41.
What is meant by period of revolution of U.C.M. Obtain an expression for the period of revolution of a particle performing uniform circular motion.
Answer:
The time taken by a particle performing uniform circular motion to complete one revolution is called as period of revolution. It is denoted by T.

Expression for time period:
During period T, particle covers a distance equal to circumference 2πr of circle with uniform speed v.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 33

Question 42.
For a particle performing uniform circular motion, derive an expression for angular speed and state its unit.
Answer:

  1. Consider an object of mass m, moving with a uniform speed v, along a circle of radius r. Let T be the time period of revolution of the object, i.e., the time taken by the object to complete one revolution or to travel a distance of 2πr.
    Thus, T = 2πr/v
    ∴ Speed, v = \(\frac{\text { Distance }}{\text { Time }}=\frac{2 \pi \mathrm{r}}{\mathrm{T}}\) …………….. (1)
  2. During circular motion of a point object, the position vector of the object from centre of the circle is the radius vector r. Its magnitude is radius r and it is directed away from the centre to the particle, i.e., away from the centre of the circle.
  3. As the particle performs UCM, this radius vector describes equal angles in equal intervals of time.
  4. The angular speed gives the angle described by the radius vector.
  5. During one complete revolution, the angle described is 2π and the time taken is period T. Hence, the angular speed ω is given as, ….[From (1)]
    ω = \(\frac{\text { Angle }}{\text { time }}=\frac{2 \pi}{\mathrm{T}}=\frac{\left(\frac{2 \pi \mathrm{r}}{\mathrm{T}}\right)}{\mathrm{r}}\) …………….. [From (1)]
    = \(\frac{\mathrm{v}}{\mathrm{r}}\)
  6. The unit of angular speed is radian/second.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 43.
Derive an expression for centripetal acceleration of a particle performing uniform circular motion.
Answer:
Expression for centripetal acceleration by calculus method:
i) Suppose a particle is performing U.C.M in anticlockwise direction.
The co-ordinate axes are chosen as shown in the figure.
Let,
A = initial position of the particle which lies on positive X-axis
P = instantaneous position after time t
θ = angle made by radius vector
ω = constant angular speed
\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}}\) = instantaneous position vector at time t

ii) From the figure,
\(\vec{r}=\hat{i} x+\hat{j} y\)
where, \(\hat{i}\) and \(\hat{j}\) are unit vectors along X-axis and Y-axis respectively.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 34
iii) Also, x = r cos θ and y = r sin θ
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 35

iv) Velocity of the particle is given as rate of change of position vector.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 36

vi) From equation (1) and (2),
\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{a}}=-\omega^{2} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}}\) ……….. (3)
Negative sign shows that direction of acceleration is opposite to the direction of position vector. Equation (3) is the centripetal acceleration.

vii) Magnitude of centripetal acceleration is given by,
a = ω2r

viii) The force providing this acceleration should also be along the same direction, hence centripetal.
∴ \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}=\mathrm{m} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{a}}=-\mathrm{m} \omega^{2} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}}\)
This is the expression for the centripetal force on a particle undergoing uniform circular motion.

ix) Magnitude of F = mω2r = \(\frac{\mathrm{mv}^{2}}{\mathrm{r}}\) = mωv

Question 44.
Discuss the factors on which time period of conical pendulum depends.
Answer:
Time period of conical pendulum is given by,
T = 2π \(\sqrt{\frac{\cos \theta}{\mathrm{g}}}\) …………. (i)
where, l = length of the string
g = acceleration due to gravity
θ = angle of inclination
From equation (i), it is observed that period of conical pendulum depends on following factors.
i) Length of pendulum (l): Time period of conical pendulum increases with increase in length of pendulum, i.e., T ∝ \(\sqrt {l}\)
ii) Acceleration due to gravity (g): Time period of conical pendulum decreases with increase in g. i.e., T ∝ \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{g}}\)
iii) Angle of inclination (θ): As θ increases, cos θ decreases, hence, time period of conical pendulum decreases with increase in θ. (For 0 < θ < π) i.e., T ∝ \(\sqrt{\cos \theta}\)

Question 45.
Is there any limitation on semi vertical angle in conical pendulum? Give reason.
Answer:
Yes.

  1. For a conical pendulum, Period T ∝ \(\sqrt{\cos \theta}\)
    ∴ Tension F ∝ \(\frac{1}{\cos \theta}\)
    Speed v ∝ \(\sqrt{\tan \theta}\)
    With increase in angle θ, cos θ decreases and tan θ increases. For θ = 90°, T = 0, F = ∞ and v = ∞ which cannot be possible.
  2. Also, θ depends upon breaking tension of string, and a body tied to a string cannot be resolved in a horizontal circle such that the string is horizontal. Hence, there is limitation of semi vertical angle in conical pendulum.

Solved Examples

Question 46.
An object of mass 50 g moves uniformly along a circular orbit with an angular speed of 5 rad/s. If the linear speed of the particle is 25 m/s, ¡s the radius of the circle? Calculate the centripetal force acting on the particle.
Solution:
Given: ω = 5 rad/s, v = 25 m/s,
m = 50 g = 0.05 kg
To find: radius (r), centipetal force (F)
Formula: i) v = ωr
ii) F = \(\frac{\mathrm{mv}^{2}}{\mathrm{r}}\)

Calculation: From formula (i),
r = v/ω = 25/5 m = 5 m.
From formula (ii),
F = \(\frac{0.05 \times 25^{2}}{5}\) = 6.25 N.

i) Radius of the circle is 5 m.
ii) Centripetal force acting on the particle is 6.25 N.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 47.
An object is travelling in a horizontal circle with uniform speed. At t = 0, the velocity is given by \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{u}}=20 \hat{\mathbf{i}}+35 \hat{\mathbf{j}}\) km/s. After one minute the velocity becomes \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{v}}=-20 \hat{\mathbf{i}}-35 \hat{\mathbf{j}}\). What is the magnitude of the acceleration?
Solution:
Magnitude of initial and final velocities,
u= \(\sqrt{(20)^{2}+(35)^{2}}\) m/s
∴ u = \(\sqrt{1625}\) m/s
∴ u = 40.3 m/s
As the velocity reverses in 1 minute, the time period of revolution is 2 minutes.
T = \(\frac{2 \pi \mathrm{r}}{\mathrm{u}}\), giving r = \(\frac{\text { uT }}{2 \pi}\)
Now,
a = \(\frac{\mathrm{u}^{2}}{\mathrm{r}}=\frac{\mathrm{u}^{2} 2 \pi}{\mathrm{uT}}=\frac{2 \pi \mathrm{u}}{\mathrm{T}}=\frac{2 \times 3.142 \times 40.3}{2 \times 60}\)
= {antilog[log(3.142) + log(40.3) – log(60)]}
= {antilog(0.4972 + 1.6053 – 1.7782)}
= {antilog(0.3243)}
= 2.110.
∴ a = 2.11 m/s2
The magnitude of acceleration is 2.11 m/s2.

Question 48.
A racing car completes 5 rounds of a circular track in 2 minutes. Find the radius of the track if the car has uniform centripetal acceleration of π2/s2.
Solution:
Given: 5 rounds = 2πr(5),
t = 2minutes = 120s
To find: Radius (r)
Formula: acp = ω2r
Calculation: From formula,
acp = ω2r
∴ π2 = \(\frac{\mathrm{v}^{2}}{\mathrm{r}}\)
But v = \(\frac{2 \pi r(5)}{t}=\frac{10 \pi r}{t}\)
∴ π2 = \(\frac{100 \pi^{2} \mathrm{r}^{2}}{\mathrm{rt}^{2}}\)
∴ r = \(\frac{120 \times 120}{100}\) =144m
The radius of the track is 144 m.

Question 49.
A car of mass 1500 kg rounds a curve of radius 250m at 90 km/hour. Calculate the centripetal force acting on it.
Solution:
Given: m= 1500 kg, r = 250m,
v = 90 km/h = 90 × \(\frac{5}{18}\) = 25m/s
To find: Centripetal force (FCP)
Formula: FCP = \(\frac{\mathrm{mv}^{2}}{\mathrm{r}}\)
Calculation: From formula,
FCP = \(\frac{1500 \times(25)^{2}}{250}\)
∴ FCP = 3750 N
The centripetal force acting on the car is 3750 N.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 50.
A one kg mass tied at the end of the string 0.5 m long is whirled ¡n a horizontal circle, the other end of the string being fixed. The breaking tension in the string is 50 N. Find the greatest speed that can be given to the mass.
Solution:
Given: Breaking tension, F = 50 N,
m = 1 kg, r = 0.5m
To find: Maximum speed (vmax)
Formula: B.T (F) = max. C.F \(\frac{m v_{\max }^{2}}{r}\)
Calculation: From formula,
v2max = \(\frac{F \times r}{m}\)
∴ v2max = \(\frac{50 \times 0.5}{1}\)
∴ vmax = \(\sqrt{50 \times 0.5}\) = 5 m/s
The greatest speed that can be given to the mass is 5 m/s.

Question 51.
A mass of 5 kg is tied at the end of a string 1.2 m long revolving in a horizontal circle. If the breaking tension in the string is 300 N, find the maximum number of revolutions per minute the mass can make.
Solution:
Given: Length of the string, r = 1.2 m,
Mass attached. m = 5 kg,
Breaking tension, T = 300 N
To find: Maximum number of revolutions per minute (nmax)
Formula: Tmax = Fmax = mrω2max
Calculation: From formula,
∴ 5 × 1.2 × (2πn)2 = 300
∴ 5 × 1.2 × 4π2n2 = 300
∴ n2max = \(\frac{300}{4 \times(3.142)^{2} \times 6.0}\) = 1.26618
∴nmax = \(\sqrt{1.26618}\) = 1.125 rev/s
∴ nmax = 1.125 × 60
∴ nmax = 67.5 rev/min
The maximum number of revolutions per minute made by the mass is 67.5 rev /min.

Question 52.
A coin placed on a revolving disc, with its centre at a distance of 6 cm from the axis of rotation just slips off when the speed of the revolving disc exceeds 45 r.p.m. What should be the maximum angular speed of the disc, so that when the coin is at a distance of 12 cm from the axis of rotation, it does not slip?
Solution:
Given. r1 = 6cm, r2 = 12cm, n1 = 45 r.p.m
To Find: Maximum angular speed (n2)
Formula: Max. C.F = mrω2
Calculation: Since, mr1ω12 mr2ω22 [As mass is constant]
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 37
The maximum angular speed of the disc should be 31.8 r.p.m.

Question 53.
A stone of mass 0.25 kg tied to the end of a string is whirled in a circle of radius 1.5 m with a speed of 40 revolutions/min in a horizontal plane. What is the tension in the string? What is the maximum speed with which the stone can be whirled around if the string can withstand a maximum tension of 200 N?
Solution:
Given: m = 0.25 kg, r.= 1.5 m, Tmax = 200 N,
n = 40 rev. min-1 = \(\frac{40}{60}\) rev s-1
To find: i) Tension (T)
ii) Maximum speed (vmax)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 38
i) The tension in the string is 6.55 N.
ii) The maximum speed with which the stone can be whirled around is 34.64 m s-1.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 54.
In a conical pendulum, a string of length 120 cm is fixed at rigid support and carries a mass of 150 g at its free end. If the mass is revolved in a horizontal circle of radius 0.2 m around a vertical axis, calculate tension in the string. (g = 9.8 m/s2)
Solution:
Given: l = 120 cm = 1.2rn, r = 0.2m,
m = 150 g = 0.15 kg
To find: Tension in the string (T)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 39
∴ Substituting in formula,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 40
Tension in the string is 1.491 N.

Question 55.
A conical pendulum has length 50 cm. Its bob of mass 100 g performs uniform circular motion in horizontal plane, so as to have radius of path 30 cm. Find
i) The angle made by the string with vertical
ii) The tension in the supporting thread and
iii) The speed of bob.
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 41
Given: l = 150 cm = 0.5 m, r = 30 cm = 0.3 m,
m = 100 g = 100 × 10-3 kg = 0.1 kg
To find: i) Angle made by the string with vertical (θ)
ii) Tension in the supporting thread (T)
iii) Speed of bob (y)

Formulae: i) tan θ = –\(\frac{r}{\mathrm{~h}}\)
ii) tan θ = \(\frac{\mathrm{v}^{2}}{\mathrm{rg}}\)

Calculation: By Pythagoras theorem, l2 = r2 + h2
h2 = l2 – r2
h2 = 0.25 – 0.09 = 0.16
h = 0.4m
i) From formula (1),
tan θ = \(\frac{0.3}{0.4}\) = 0.75
∴ θ = tan-1 (0.75)
θ = 36°52’

ii) The weight of bob is balanced by vertical component of tension T
∴ T cos θ = mg
cos θ = \(\frac{\mathrm{h}}{l}=\frac{0.4}{0.5}\) = 0.8
∴ T = \(\frac{\mathrm{mg}}{\cos \theta}=\frac{0.1 \times 9.8}{0.8}\)
∴ T = 1.225 N

iii) From formula (2),
v2 = rg tan θ
∴ v2 = 0.3 × 9.8 × 0.75 = 2.205
∴ v = 1.485 m/s

i) Angle made by the string with vertical is 36°52′. ‘
ii) Tension in the supporting thread is 1.225 N.
iii) Speed of the bob is 1.485 m/s

Apply Your Knowledge

Question 56.
Explain the variation of acceleration, velocity and distance with time for an object under free fall.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 42
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 43

  1. For a free falling object, considering the downward direction as negative, the object is released from rest.
    ∴ initial velocity u = 0 and a = -g = -9.8 m/s2
    ∴ The kinematical equations become,
    v = u + at = 0 – gt = -gt = -9.8t
    s = ut + \(\frac{1}{2}\)at2 = o + \(\frac{1}{2}\)(-g)t2 = –\(\frac{1}{2}\) 9.8t2
    = -4.9t2
    v2 = u2 + 2as = 0 + 2(-g)s
    = -2gs = -2 × 9.8s
    = -19.6s
  2. These equations give the velocity and the distance travelled as a function of time and also the variation of velocity with distance.
  3. The variation of acceleration, velocity and distance with the time is as shown in figure a, b and c respectively.

Question 57.
The position-time (x – t) graphs for two children A and B returning from their school O to their homes P and Q respectively are shown in figure. Choose the correct entries in the brackets below.
i) (A/B) lives closer to the school than (B/A)
ii) (A/B) starts from the school earlier than (B/A)
iii) (A/B) walks faster than (B/A)
iv) A and B reach home at the (same/different) time
v) (A/B) overtakes (B/A) on the road (once/twice)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 44
Answer:

  1. A lives closer to the school than B. This is because, OQ > OP, hence B has to cover larger distance than A.
  2. A starts from the school earlier than B. This is because, A starts at t = 0 whereas B starts at some finite time greater than zero.
  3. As slope of B is greater than that of A, hence B walks faster than A. iv. A and B reach home at different times.
  4. This is because the value of ‘t’ corresponding to P and Q for A and B respectively is different.
  5. B overtakes A on the road once. This is because A and B meet each other only once on their way back home. As B starts from school later than A and walks faster than A, hence B overtakes A once on his way home.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 58.
A bowler throws the ball up to correct distance by controlling his velocity and angle of throw, as shown in the figure given below
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 45
i) What will be the range of the projectile?
ii) What will be the height of the projectile from ground?
Answer:

  1. Range of projectile is given by,
    R = \(\frac{u^{2} \sin 2 \theta}{g}=\frac{6^{2} \times \sin (2 \times 30)}{9.8}\)
    R = 3.18 m
  2. Height of projectile is given by,
    H = \(\frac{\mathrm{u}^{2} \sin ^{2} \theta}{2 \mathrm{~g}}=\frac{6^{2} \times \sin ^{2} 30}{2 \times 9.8}\) = 0.46m
    Height achieved by ball from ground is
    H = 0.46 + 1 = 1.46m

i) The range of the projectile is 3.18 m.
ii) The height of the projectile is 1.46 m.

Question 59.
A child takes reading of two cars running on highway, for his school project. He draws a position-time graph of the two cars as shown in the figure
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 46
i) What is the velocity of two cars when they meet together?
ii) What is the difference in velocities of the two cars when they cover their maximum distance?
iii) What will be acceleration of the two cars in first 20 s?
Solution:
i) According to graph, the velocity of two cars when they meet each other are,
x = 70m
t = 308
v = \(\frac{x}{t}=\frac{70}{30}\) = 2.33 m/s

ii) According to graph, for maximum distance.
For 1st car,
x1 = 120m
t1 = 50 s
v1 = \(\frac{x_{1}}{t_{1}}=\frac{120}{50}\)
v1 = 2.4 m/s

For 2nd car,
x2 = 90 m
t2 = 60 s
v2 = \(\frac{x_{2}}{t_{2}}=\frac{90}{60}\)
v2 = 1.5 m/s
Difference in velocities is given by,
v1 – v2 = 2.4 – 1.5 = 0.9 m/s

iii) According to graph,
Acceleration of 1st car in first 20 s
v1 = \(\frac{\mathrm{x}_{1}}{\mathrm{t}}\)
v1 = \(\frac{60}{20}\)
v1 = 3 m/s
a1 = \(\frac{\mathrm{v}_{1}}{\mathrm{t}}=\frac{3}{20}\)
a1 = 0.15 m/s2
Acceleration of 2nd car in first 20 s
v2 = \(\frac{\mathrm{x}_{2}}{\mathrm{t}}\)
v2 = \(\frac{40}{20}\)
v2 = 2 m/s
a2 = \(\frac{\mathrm{v}_{2}}{\mathrm{t}}=\frac{2}{20}\)
a2 = 0.1 m/s2
Now,
a1 – a2 = 0.15 – 0.1
= 0.05 m/s2

i) The velocity of two cars when they meet together is 2.33 m/s.
ii) The difference in velocities of two cars when they cover maximum distance is 0.9 m/s.
iii) The accelerator of two cars in 20 s is 0.05 m/s2.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 60.
The speed of a projectile u reduces by 50% on reaching maximum height. What is the range on the horizontal plane?
Solution:
If θ is the angle of projection, then velocity of projectile at height point = u cos θ
u cos θ = \(\frac{50}{100}\) u = \(\frac{1}{2}\) u
or cos θ = \(\frac{1}{2}\) cos 60°
or θ = 60°
Horizontal range,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 47

Question 61.
In projectile motion, vertical motion and horizontal motion are dependent of each other. Yes or No? Justify your answer.
Answer:
No. In projectile motion, the horizontal and vertical motion are independent of each other because both motions don’t affect each other.

Question 62.
In angular projection of a projectile, at highest point, what will be the components of horizontal and vertical velocities?
Answer:
At highest point of angular projection of a projectile, the horizontal component of its velocity is non zero and the vertical component of its velocity is momentarily zero.

Question 63.
What angle will be described between velocity and acceleration at highest point of projectile path?
Answer:
At highest point of projectile path, the angle between velocity and acceleration is 90°.

Quick Review

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 48
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 49
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 50

Multiple Choice Questions

Question 1.
The velocity-time relation of a particle starting from rest is given by v = kt where k = 2 m/s2. The distance travelled in 3 sec is
(A) 9 m
(B) 16 m
(C) 27 m
(D) 36 m
Answer:
(A) 9 m

Question 2.
If the particle is at rest, then the x – t graph can be only
(A) parallel to position – axis
(B) parallel to time – axis
(C) inclined with acute angle
(D) inclined with obtuse angle
Answer:
(B) parallel to time – axis

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 3.
A body is thrown vertically upwards, maximum height is reached, then it will have
(A) zero velocity and zero acceleration.
(B) zero velocity and finite acceleration.
(C) finite velocity and zero acceleration.
(D) finite velocity and finite acceleration.
Answer:
(B) zero velocity and finite acceleration.

Question 4.
Which of the following is NOT a projectile?
(A) A bullet fired from gun.
(B) A shell fired from cannon.
(C) A hammer thrown by athlete.
(D) An aeroplane in flight.
Answer:
(D) An aeroplane in flight.

Question 5.
The range of projectile is 1 .5 km when it is projected at an angle of 15° with horizontal. What will be its range when it is projected at an angle of 45° with the horizontal?
(A) 0.75 km
(B) 1.5 km
(C) 3 km
(D) 6 km
Answer:
(C) 3 km

Question 6.
Which of the following remains constant for a projectile fired from the earth?
(A) Momentum
(B) Kinetic energy
(C) Vertical component of velocity
(D) Horizontal component of velocity
Answer:
(D) Horizontal component of velocity

Question 7.
In case of a projectile, what is the angle between the instantaneous velocity and acceleration at the highest point?
(A) 45°
(B) 1800
(C) 90°
(D) 0°
Answer:
(C) 90°

Question 8.
A player kicks up a ball at an angle θ with the horizontal. The horizontal range is maximum when θ is equal to
(A) 30°
(B) 45°
(C) 60°
(D) 90°
Answer:
(B) 45°

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 9.
The greatest height to which a man can throw a stone is h. The greatest distance to which he can throw it will be
(A) h/2
(B) 2h
(C) h
(D) 3h
Answer:
(B) 2h

Question 10.
Two balls are projected at an angle θ and (90° – θ) to the horizontal with the same speed. The ratio of their maximum vertical
heights is
(A) 1 : 1
(B) tan θ : 1
(C) 1 : tan θ
(D) tan2 θ : 1
Answer:
(D) tan2 θ : 1

Question 11.
When air resistance is taken into account while dealing with the motion of the projectile, to achieve maximum horizontal range, the angle of projection should be,
(A) equal to 45°
(B) less than 45°
(C) greater than 90°
(D) greater than 45°
Answer:
(D) greater than 45°

Question 12.
The maximum height attained by projectile is found to be equal to 0.433 of the horizontal range. The angle of projection of this projectile is
(A) 30°
(B) 45°
(C) 60°
(D) 75°
Answer:
(C) 60°

Question 13.
A projectile is thrown with an initial velocity of 50 m/s. The maximum horizontal distance which this projectile can travel is
(A) 64m
(B) 128m
(C) 5m
(D) 255m
Answer:
(D) 255m

Question 14.
A jet airplane travelling at the speed of 500 kmh-1 ejects the burnt gases at the speed of 1400 kmh-1 relative to the jet airplane. The speed of burnt gases relative to stationary observer on the earth is
(A) 2.8 kmh-1
(B) 190 kmh-1
(C) 700 kmh-1
(D) 900 kmh-1
Answer:
(D) 900 kmh-1

Question 15.
A projectile projected with certain angle reaches ground with
(A) double angle
(B) same angle
(C) greater than 90°
(D) angle between 90° and 180°
Answer:
(B) same angle

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 16.
The time period of conical pendulum is _________.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 51
Answer:
(C) \(2 \pi \sqrt{\frac{l \cos \theta}{\mathrm{g}}}\)

Question 17.
A projectile projected with certain velocity reaches ground with (magnitude)
(A) zero velocity
(B) smaller velocity
(C) same velocity
(D) greater velocity
Answer:
(C) same velocity

Question 18.
The period of a conical pendulum in terms of its length (l), semivertical angle (θ) and acceleration due to gravity (g) is:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 52
Answer:
(C) \(4 \pi \sqrt{\frac{l \cos \theta}{4 \mathrm{~g}}}\)

Question 19.
Consider a simple pendulum of length 1 m. Its bob performs a circular motion in horizontal plane with its string making an angle 600 with the vertical. The period of rotation of the bob is(Take g = 10 m/s2)
(A) 2s
(B) 1.4s
(C) 1.98 s
(D) none of these
Answer:
(B) 1.4s

Question 20.
The period of a conical pendulum is
(A) equal to that of a simple pendulum of same length l.
(B) more than that of a simple pendulum of same length l.
(C) less than that of a simple pendulum of same length l.
(D) independent of length of pendulum.
Answer:
(C) less than that of a simple pendulum of same length l.

Competitive Corner

Question 1.
Two particles A and B are moving in uniform circular motion in concentric circles of radii rA and rB with speed vA and vB respectively. Their time period of rotation is the same. The ratio of angular speed of A to that of B will be:
(A) rB : rA
(B) 1 : 1
(C) rA : rB
(D) vA : vB
Answer:
(B) 1 : 1
Hint:
Time period of rotation (A and B) is same
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 53

Question 2.
When an object is shot from the bottom of a long smooth inclined plane kept at an angle 60° with horizontal, it can travel a distance x1 along the plane. But when the inclination is decreased to 30° and the same object is shot with the same velocity, it can travel x2 distance. Then x1 : x2 will be:
(A) 1 : \(\sqrt {3}\)
(B) 1 : 2\(\sqrt {3}\)
(C) 1 : \(\sqrt {2}\)
(D) \(\sqrt {3}\) : 1
Answer:
(A) 1 : \(\sqrt {3}\)
Hint:
v2 = u2 + 2as
∴ v2 = u2 + 2 g sin θ x
sin θ. x = constant
∴ x ∝ \(\frac{1}{\sin \theta}\)
∴ \(\frac{x_{1}}{x_{2}}=\frac{\sin \theta_{2}}{\sin \theta_{1}}=\frac{1 / 2}{\sqrt{3} / 2}\) = 1 : \(\sqrt {3}\)

Question 3.
A person travelling in a straight line moves with a constant velocity v1 for certain distance x’ and with a constant velocity v2 for next equal distance. The average velocity y is given by the relation
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 54
Answer:
(C) \(\frac{2}{v}=\frac{1}{v_{1}}+\frac{1}{v_{2}}\)
Hint:
Let, t’ be the time taken to travel distance ‘x’ with constant velocity ‘v1
∴ t1 = \(\frac{\mathrm{x}}{\mathrm{v}_{2}}\)
Let ‘t2’ be the time taken to travel equal distance ‘x’ with constant velocity ‘v2
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 55

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 4.
Two bullets are fired horizontally and simultaneously towards each other from roof tops of two buildings 100 m apart and of same height of 200 m, with the same velocity of 25 m/s. When and where will the two bullets collide? (g = 10 m/s2)
(A) They will not collide
(B) After 2 s at a height of 180 m
(C) After 2 s at a height of 20 m
(D) After 4 s at a height of 120 m
Answer:
(B) After 2 s at a height of 180 m
Hint:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 56
Let the bullets collide at time t
The horizontal displacement x1 and x2 is given by the equation
x1 = ut and x2 = ut
∴ x1 + x2 = 100
∴ 25t + 25t = 100
∴ t = 2s
Vertical displacement ‘y’ is given by
y = \(\frac{1}{2}\) gt2 = \(\frac{1}{2}\) × 10 × 22 = 20m
∴ h = 200 – 20= 180m

Question 5.
A toy car with charge q moves on a frictionless horizontal plane surface under the influence of a uniform electric field \(\vec{E}\). Due to the force q\(\vec{E}\), its velocity increases from 0 to 6 m/s in one second duration. At that instant the direction of the field is reversed. The car continues to move for two more seconds under the influence of this field. The average velocity and the average speed of the toy car between 0 to 3 seconds are respectively
(A) 2 m/s, 4 m/s
(B) 1 m/s, 3 m/s
(C) 1 m/s, 3.5 m/s
(D) 1.5 m/s, 3 m/s
Answer:
(B) 1 m/s, 3 m/s
Hint:
Car at rest attains velocity of 6 m/s in t1 = 1 s.
Now as direction of field is reversed, velocity of car will reduce to 0 m/s in next 1 s. i.e., at t2 = 2 s. But, it continues to move for next one second. This will give velocity of -6 m/s to car at t3 = 3 s.
Using this data, plot of velocity versus time will be
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 57

Question 6.
All the graphs below are intended to represent the same motion. One of them does it incorrectly. Pick it up.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 58
Answer:
(D)
Hint:
The graphs (A), (B) and (C) represent the uniformly retarded motion, i.e., velocity decreases uniformly. However, the slope of the curve in graph (D), indicates increasing velocity. Hence, graph (D) is incorrect.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 7.
A particle is moving with a uniform speed in a circular orbit of radius R in a central force inversely proportional to the nth power of R. If the period of rotation of the particle is T, then:
(A) T ∝ R(n+1)/2
(B) T ∝ Rn/2
(C) T ∝ R3/2 for any n
(D) T ∝ R\(\frac{n}{2}\)+1
Answer:
(A) T ∝ R(n+1)/2
Hint:
The centripetal force acting on the particle is provided by the central force,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 59

Question 8.
Preeti reached the metro station and found that the escalator was not working. She walked up the stationary escalator in time t1. On other days, if she remains stationary on the moving escalator, then the escalator takes her up in time t2. The time taken by her to walk up on the moving escalator will be:
(A) \(\frac{\mathrm{t}_{1}+\mathrm{t}_{2}}{2}\)
(B) \(\frac{t_{1} t_{2}}{t_{2}-t_{1}}\)
(C) \(\frac{\mathbf{t}_{1} t_{2}}{\mathbf{t}_{2}+t_{1}}\)
(D) t1 – t2
Answer:
(C) \(\frac{\mathbf{t}_{1} t_{2}}{\mathbf{t}_{2}+t_{1}}\)
Hint:
Let velocity of Preeti be v1, velocity of escalator be v2 and distance travelled be L.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 60

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 9.
A body is thrown vertically upwards. Which one of the following graphs correctly represent the velocity vs time?
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 61
Answer:
(A)
Hint:
If a body is projected in vertically upward direction, then its acceleration is constant and negative. If direction of motion is positive i.e.. vertically up) and initial position of body is taken as origin, then the velocity decreases uniformly. At highest point its velocity is equal to zero and then it accelerates uniformly downwards returning to its reference position.

Maharashtra Board 11th BK Important Questions Chapter 4 Ledger

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 11th Commerce Book Keeping & Accountancy Important Questions Chapter 4 Ledger Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Commerce BK Important Questions Chapter 4 Ledger

1. Answer in one sentence only.

Question 1.
State the meaning of ‘Debit Balance’.
Answer:
Excess of the debit total of an account over its credit total is called debit balance.

Question 2.
What do you mean by Credit Balance?
Answer:
Excess of credit total of an account over its debit total is called credit balance.

Maharashtra Board 11th BK Important Questions Chapter 4 Ledger

Question 3.
What is the balance of Outstanding Salary A/c?
Answer:
The balance of Outstanding Salary A/c is a credit balance.

Question 4.
What is the balance of Cash A/c?
Answer:
The balance of Cash A/c is always a debit balance.

Question 5.
Where is the balance of Salaries A/c transferred at the end of the year?
Answer:
At the end of the year, the balance of Salaries A/c is transferred to Profit and Loss A/c.

Question 6.
From which books of accounts posting is made in the Ledger?
Answer:
From Journal and Subsidiary books posting is made in the ledger.

Maharashtra Board 11th BK Important Questions Chapter 4 Ledger

Question 7.
What do you mean by the head of an Account?
Answer:
The name of the account which is written on the top of the ledger account in the middle is called “Head of an account”.

2. Write the word, term, phrase, which can substitute each of the statements.

Question 1.
A bound book of Account.
Answer:
Ledger

Question 2.
The credit balance of the Bank Account.
Answer:
Bank Overdraft

Question 3.
Recording of transactions from Journal to Ledger.
Answer:
Ledger Posting

Maharashtra Board 11th BK Important Questions Chapter 4 Ledger

Question 4.
Page number of Ledger.
Answer:
L.F. No.

Question 5.
The right-hand side of an account.
Answer:
Credit Side

Question 6.
The left-hand side of an account.
Answer:
Debit Side

Question 7.
Excess of a debit total of an account over its credit total.
Answer:
Debit Balance

Question 8.
Excess of credit total of an account over its debit total.
Answer:
Credit Balance

Maharashtra Board 11th BK Important Questions Chapter 4 Ledger

Question 9.
A secondary book of account in which entries are recorded from Journal or Subsidiary books.
Answer:
Ledger

Question 10.
Page of the account book.
Answer:
Folio

Question 11.
A book of accounts in which all ledger accounts are maintained.
Answer:
Ledger

Question 12.
Type of accounts that are not balanced but transferred to Trading Account or P/L A/c.
Answer:
Nominal Accounts

Question 13.
An account where the total purchase book is posted.
Answer:
Purchases Account

Maharashtra Board 11th BK Important Questions Chapter 4 Ledger

Question 14.
A statement of accounts’s prepared from the balances of the ledger account.
Answer:
Trial Balance

3. Select appropriate alternatives from those given below and rewrite the sentences.

Question 1.
_______________ is the act of transferring an entry from journal to ledger.
(a) Journalising
(b) Casting
(c) Balancing
(d) Posting
Answer:
(d) Posting

Question 2.
Cash account always shows _______________ balance.
(a) Credit
(b) Negative
(c) Minus
(d) Debit
Answer:
(d) Debit

Question 3.
Bank overdraft means _______________ balance of Bank A/c.
(a) Debit
(b) Credit
(c) Positive
(d) Nil
Answer:
(b) Credit

Maharashtra Board 11th BK Important Questions Chapter 4 Ledger

Question 4.
Real accounts generally shows _______________ balance.
(a) Debit
(b) Credit
(c) Negative
(d) Nil
Answer:
(a) Debit

Question 5.
Excess of debit total of an account over it’s credit total indicates _______________ balance.
(a) Negative
(b) Positive
(c) Debit
(d) Credit
Answer:
(c) Debit

Question 6.
When goods are sold on credit _______________ account is credited.
(a) Buyer’s A/c
(b) Cash A/c
(c) Sales A/c
(d) Seller’s A/c
Answer:
(c) Sales A/c

Question 7.
When the total of debit side of an account exceeds credit side, it is called _______________ balance.
(a) Debit
(b) Credit
(c) Nil
(d) Real
Answer:
(a) Debit

Question 8.
Machinery A/c shows _______________ balance.
(a) Credit
(b) Debit
(c) Positive
(d) Negative
Answer:
(b) Debit

Maharashtra Board 11th BK Important Questions Chapter 4 Ledger

Question 9.
Left hand side of an account is called _______________
(a) Credit
(b) Debit
(c) Middle
(d) Centre
Answer:
(b) Debit

Question 10.
_______________ is prepared from the balances in the ledger accounts.
(a) List
(b) Journal
(c) Book
(d) Trial Balance
Answer:
(d) Trial Balance

Question 11.
Total of Sales book is _______________ to sales account.
(a) entered
(b) moved
(c) posted
(d) given
Answer:
(c) posted

Question 12.
Wages A/c is transferred to _______________ A/c.
(a) Trading A/c
(b) Profit & Loss A/c
(c) Trial Balance
(d) Any
Answer:
(a) Trading A/c

Question 13.
All entries are posted from Journal to _______________
(a) Ledger
(b) Balance Sheet
(c) Trial Balance
(d) Cash A/c
Answer:
(a) Ledger

4. State whether the following statements are ‘True or False’ with reasons.

Question 1.
Ledger accounts are balanced every day.
Answer:
This statement is False.
Ledger accounts are balanced on a particular period of time or on the accounting year of the firm. They are not balanced every day.

Maharashtra Board 11th BK Important Questions Chapter 4 Ledger

Question 2.
Every account is divided into two sides.
Answer:
This statement is True.
Every account is divided into two sides i.e. Debit and Credit to do ledger pasting from a journal which follows the rules of double-entry book-keeping.

Question 3.
The discount allowed is a real account.
Answer:
This statement is False.
Discount allowed is an expense for the business. All expenses come under the Nominal account. So the discount allowed is a Nominal account.

Question 4.
The bank is a Nominal A/c.
Answer:
This statement is False.
A bank is an Artificial person created by law. The bank is personal accounts.

Question 5.
Accounts of expenses may show a credit balance.
Answer:
This statement is False.
Accounts of expenses always show debit balance. They fall under the nominal account and its Golden rule is to Debit all Expenses.

Question 6.
A Debtors A/c always show a credit balance.
Answer:
This statement is False.
A Debtor A/c always shows a Debit balance. The debtor is a personal account and as per the rule of personal account Debit the receiver.

Maharashtra Board 11th BK Important Questions Chapter 4 Ledger

Question 7.
When goods are sold for cash, the personal a/c of the buyer is debited.
Answer:
This statement is False.
In a cash transaction, there is no Personal A/c. The personal account comes in a credit transaction. So when goods are sold for cash, the cash account is debited. A cash account is a real account and as per rule debit what comes in.

Question 8.
Capital a/c is a nominal a/c.
Answer:
This statement is False.
Capital is a Personal account. Capital is the amount invested by the proprietor in his business. A proprietor is a person. Capital is also personal A/c.

Question 9.
Drawing a/c is a personal a/c.
Answer:
This statement is True.
Drawings mean cash or goods withdrawn by the proprietor for his personal or family use he is a person. So drawing is personal A/c.

Question 10.
Narration is not necessary for a ledger.
Answer:
This statement is False.
Narration is necessary for a Journal book and not in Ledger. Ledgers are self-narrative as every ledger has headed.

Question 11.
All a/c’s are closed down at the end of the accounting year.
Answer:
This statement is True.
All ledger accounts are closed an accounting year or Financial year to prepare the Trial balance and Financial statements of the year.

Question 12.
Recording of a transaction in the journal is called posting.
Answer:
This statement is False.
The process of recording a transaction in the Journal is called Journalising. Posting means transferring journal entries to respective ledger accounts.

Maharashtra Board 11th BK Important Questions Chapter 4 Ledger

Question 13.
Balance of personal a/c is brought down for the next year.
Answer:
This statement is True.
Personal accounts are the account of Debtors or Creditors. The business has to collect or pay amounts on personal accounts. Current year collections or payments are done in the following year. So balances of personal accounts are brought for the next year.

Question 14.
All transactions are recorded directly in the ledger.
Answer:
This statement is False.
First, every transaction is recorded in a Journal book or Subsidiary book and from there they are posted to respective ledger accounts. No transaction can be recorded directly in the ledger.

Question 15.
Ledger Folio and index are necessary for the ledger.
Answer:
This statement is True.
The index is necessary to final particular account on its page number and ledger folio number is also necessary for cross-checking with the journal book. This makes handling convenient and easier.

Question 16.
Ledger posting is not necessary for journal proper.
Answer:
This statement is False.
Ledger posting is necessary for journal proper. From Ledger trial balance and financial statements are prepared for the accounting year. Without posting of journal proper Trial balance and financial statements will not be tally and can’t give true and fair accounting.

Question 17.
Ledger Folio is recorded in the journal.
Answer:
This statement is True.
Ledger folio is a page of the ledger, where posting is made from a journal book. For cross-reference, the ledger folio is recorded in the journal.

Maharashtra Board 11th BK Important Questions Chapter 4 Ledger

Question 18.
Ledger posting is made before journal entry.
Answer:
This statement is False.
Ledger posting is made after journal entry. First, all transactions are recorded to Journal and from the journal, posting is made to Ledger.

5. Fill in the blanks.

Question 1.
Debtors A/c shows _______________ balance.
Answer:
Debit

Question 2.
Left hand side of an account is called _______________ side.
Answer:
Debit

Question 3.
_______________ is prepared from the balances in the Ledger A/c.
Answer:
Trial Balance

Question 4.
Total of salary A/c is transfered to _______________ A/c.
Answer:
Profit and loss A/c

Maharashtra Board 11th BK Important Questions Chapter 4 Ledger

Question 5.
b/d (brought down) balance indicates _______________ balance.
Answer:
Opening

Question 6.
_______________ Balance on Nominal Account shows Inconies or gains.
Answer:
Credit

Question 7.
Debtors A/c shows _______________ balance.
Answer:
Debit

Question 8.
Drawing A/c shows _______________ balance.
Answer:
Debit

Question 9.
Wages A/c balance transferred to _______________ A/c.
Answer:
Profit and Loss

Question 10.
Discount allowed shows _______________ Balance.
Answer:
Debit

Maharashtra Board 11th BK Important Questions Chapter 4 Ledger

Question 11.
Dividend received shows _______________ Balance.
Answer:
Credit

Question 12.
Ledger is the _______________ book of Accounts.
Answer:
Principal

6. Complete the following table.

Question 1.
Maharashtra Board 11th BK Important Questions Chapter 4 Ledger 6 Q1
Answer:
Credit balance

Question 2.
Maharashtra Board 11th BK Important Questions Chapter 4 Ledger 6 Q2
Answer:
Ledger

Question 3.
Maharashtra Board 11th BK Important Questions Chapter 4 Ledger 6 Q3
Answer:
Credit Balance

Maharashtra Board 11th BK Important Questions Chapter 4 Ledger

Question 4.
Maharashtra Board 11th BK Important Questions Chapter 4 Ledger 6 Q4
Answer:
Livestock A/c

Question 5.
Maharashtra Board 11th BK Important Questions Chapter 4 Ledger 6 Q5
Answer:
Output GST

7. Put ‘✓’ mark for the nature of balance for the following.

Question 1.

Account Dr. Balance Cr. Balance
1. Salary A/c
2. Purchase A/c
3. Sales Return A/c
4. Machinery A/c
5. Bank Balance A/c
6. Cash Balance A/c
7. Sale A/c
8. Purchase Return A/c
9. Bills Payable A/c
10. Debtors A/c
11. Creditors A/c
12. Stationery A/c
13. Furniture A/c
14. Amit’s Loan A/c

Answer:

Account Dr. Balance Cr. Balance
1. Salary A/c
2. Purchase A/c
3. Sales Return A/c
4. Machinery A/c
5. Bank Balance A/c
6. Cash Balance A/c
7. Sale A/c
8. Purchase Return A/c
9. Bills Payable A/c
10. Debtors A/c
11. Creditors A/c
12. Stationery A/c
13. Furniture A/c
14. Amit’s Loan A/c

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 6 Biomolecules

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 11th Biology Important Questions Chapter 6 Biomolecules Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Biology Important Questions Chapter 6 Biomolecules

Question 1.
How are living organisms classified? Give examples of each.
Answer:
1. Living organisms are classified as unicellular (consisting of single cell) and multicellular (having many cells).
2. Example of unicellular organisms: bacteria, yeast.
Example of multicellular organisms: plants, animals.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 6 Biomolecules

Question 2.
What is biochemistry?
Answer:
1. Biochemistry is biological chemistry that provides us the idea of the chemistry of living organisms and molecular basis for changes taking place in plants, animals and microbial cells.
2. It develops the foundation for understanding all biological processes and communication within and between cells as well as chemical basis of inheritance and diseases in animals and plants.

Question 3.
What does chemical analysis of living organisms indicate?
Answer:
Chemical analysis of all living organisms indicates the presence of the most common elements like carbon, hydrogen, nitrogen, oxygen, sulphur, calcium, phosphorus, magnesium and others with their respective content per unit mass of a living tissue.

Question 4.
Name the basic macromolecules present in the living organisms.
Answer:
Polysaccharides (carbohydrate) polymer of monosaccharide, polypeptides (proteins) polymer of amino acids and polynucleotides (nucleic acids) polymer of nucleotides are the three basic macromolecule present in the living organisms.

Question 5.
Draw a flowchart showing classification of carbohydrates.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 6 Biomolecules 1

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 6 Biomolecules

Question 6.
Write a short note on
1. Glucose
2. Galactose and
3. Fructose.
Answer:
1. Glucose:
a. It is the most important fuel in living cells.
b. Its concentration in the human blood is about 90mg per 100ml of blood.
c. The small size and solubility in water of glucose molecules allows them to pass through the cell membrane into the cell.
d. Energy is released when the molecules are metabolized by cellular respiration.

2. Galactose:
a. It looks very similar to glucose molecules.
b. They can also exist in a and p forms.
c. Galactose react with glucose to form the disaccharide lactose.
d. However, glucose and galactose cannot be easily converted into one another.
e. Galactose cannot play the same role in respiration as glucose.

3. Fructose:
a. It is the fruit sugar and chemically it is ketohexose but it has a five-atom ring rather than a six-atom ring.
b. Fructose reacts with glucose to form the sucrose, a disaccharide.

Question 7.
How are disaccharides absorbed through the cell membrane?
Answer:
1. Disaccharides are soluble in water but they are too big to pass through the cell membrane by diffusion.
2. They are broken down in the small intestine during digestion.
3. Thus, formed monosaccharides then pas into the blood and through cell membranes into the cells.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 6 Biomolecules 2

Question 8.
Identify the X and Y in the following structure of a disaccharide.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 6 Biomolecules 3
X: Glycosidic bond Y: Glucose

Question 9.
Distinguish between monosaccharides and disaccharides.
Answer:

Monosaccharides Disaccharides
1. They are composed of 3-6 carbon atoms. They are composed of two monosaccharide units covalently linked to each other.
2. They cannot be hydrolyzed into smaller units. They can be hydrolysed into monosaccharides.
3. Glucose, Fructose Sucrose and Lactose

Question 10.
Which macromolecules are too big to escape from the cell?
Answer:
Polysaccharides are too big to escape from the cell.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 6 Biomolecules

Question 11.
Write a short note on
1. Starch
2. Glycogen
3. Cellulose.
Answer:
1. Starch:
a. Starch is a stored food in the plants.
b. Starch contains two types of glucose polymer: amylose and amylopectin.
c. Both are made from a-glucose.
d. Amylose is an unbranched polymer of a-glucose.
e. The molecules coil into a helical structure.
f. It foims a colloidal suspension in hot water.
g. Amylopectin is a branched polymer of a-glucose.
h. It is completely insoluble in water.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 6 Biomolecules 4

2. Glycogen:
a. It is amylopectin with very short distances between the branching side-chains.
b. Glycogen is stored in animal body particularly in liver and muscles from where it is hydrolyzed as per need to produce glucose.

3. Cellulose:
a. It is a polymer made from P-glucosc molecules and the polymer molecules are ‘straight’.
b. Cellulose serves to form the cell walls in plant cells.
c. These are much tougher than cell membranes.
d. This toughness is due to the arrangement of glucose units in the polymer chain and the hydrogen-bonding between neighbouring chains.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 6 Biomolecules

Question 12.
Why plant fats are liquid at room temperature while animal fats are solid?
Answer:

  1. Plant fats are unsaturated fatty acids, whereas animal fats are saturated fatty acids.
  2. Fats having unsaturated fatty acids are liquid at room temperature.
  3. Saturated fatty acids are solid at room temperature. Hence, plant fats are liquid at room temperature, while animal fats are solid.

Question 13.
Draw the structure of triglyceride.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 6 Biomolecules 5

Question 14.
Observe the following diagram and answer the questions based on it.
1. Identify the part ‘X’ in the given diagram.
2. What is the chemical property of the part ‘X’.
Answer:
1. The part labelled as ‘X’ is non-polar tail.
2. Non-polar tails are hydrophobic in nature.

Question 15.
Give two examples of unsaturated fatty acids.
Answer:
Oleic acid and linoleic acid are the examples of unsaturated fatty acids.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 6 Biomolecules

Question 16.
Explain primary structure of protein.
Answer:
The linear sequence of amino acids in polypeptide chain of a protein forms the primary structure of a protein.

Question 17.
Explain the secondary structure of protein with examples.
Answer:

  1. There are two types of secondary structure of protein: a-helix and P-pleated sheets.
  2. The polypeptide chain is arranged in a spiral helix. These spiral helices are of two types: a-helix (right handed) and P-helix (left handed).
  3. This spiral configuration is held together by hydrogen bonds.
  4. The sequence of amino acids in the polypeptide chain determines the location of its bend or fold and the position of formation of hydrogen bonds between different portions of the chain or between different chains. Thus, peptide chains form an a-helix structure.
  5. Example of a-helix structure is keratin.
  6. In some proteins two or more peptide chains are linked together by intermolecular hydrogen bonds. Such structures are called P-pleated sheets.
  7. Example of P-pleated sheet is silk fibres.
  8. Due to formation of hydrogen bonds peptide chains assume a secondary structure.

Question 18.
Explain the tertiary and quaternary structure of protein with example.
Answer:
Tertiary structure:

  1. In tertiary structure the peptide chains are much looped, twisted and folded back on themselves due to formation of disulphide bonds.
  2. Such loops and bends give the protein a tertiary structure.
  3. E.g. Myoglobin, enzymes.

Quaternary structure:
1. When a protein has more than two polypeptide subunits their arrangement in space is called quaternary structure.
2. E.g. Haemoglobin.

Question 19.
Write a note on properties of protein.
Answer:
Properties of proteins are as follows:

  1. Proteins are extremely reactive and highly specific in behaviour.
  2. Proteins are amphoteric in nature i.e. they act as both acids and bases.
  3. The behaviour of proteins is strongly influenced by pH.
  4. Like amino acids, proteins are dipolar ions at the isoelectric point i.e. the sum of the positive charges is equal to the sum of the negative charges and the net charge is zero.
  5. The ionic groups of a protein are contributed by the side chains of the polyfunctional amino acids.
  6. A protein consists of more basic amino acids such as lysine and arginine exist as a cation at the physiological pH of 7.4. Such proteins are called basic proteins.
  7. Histones of nucleoproteins are basic proteins.
  8. A protein rich in acidic amino acids exists as an anion at the physiological pH. Such proteins are called acidic proteins.
  9. Most of the blood proteins are acidic proteins.

Question 20.
Mention the findings of Feulgen.
Answer:
1. In 1924, Feulgen showed that chromosomes contain DNA.
2. He found that nucleic acids contain two pyrimidine (cytosine and thymine) and two purine (adenine and guanine) bases.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 6 Biomolecules

Question 21.
What were the findings of Wilkins and coworkers?
Answer:
The findings of Wilkins and coworkers were as follows:

  1. Purine and pyrimidine bases are placed regularly along the DNA molecules at a distance of 3.4 A.
  2. DNA (Deoxyribonucleotide) is composed of sugar molecule (a pentose sugar of deoxyribose type), phosphoric acid (phosphates when in chemical combination), nitrogen containing bases (nitrogen containing organic ring compounds).
  3. Bases are of two types: Pyrimidine bases and purine bases.
  4. Pyrimidine bases are single ring (monocyclic) nitrogenous bases. Cytosine, Thymine and uracil are pyrimidines.
  5. Purine are double ring (dicyclic) nitrogenous bases. Adenine and guanine are purines.

Question 22.
Chargaff analyzed the composition of DNA from various sources. Mention what were his implications from all his experiments.
Answer:
Implications proposed by Erwin Chargaff:
1. Purine and pyrimidine always occur in equal amount in DNA.
2. The base ratio i.e. A+T/G+C may vary in the DNA of different groups of animals and plants but the ratio remains constant for particular species.

Question 23.
Describe the structure of DNA.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 6 Biomolecules 6

  1. DNA is a long chain made up of alternate sugar and phosphate groups. The sugar present in DNA is always a deoxyribose attached to a phosphate group. So, it forms a regular, repeating phosphate sugar sequence.
  2. A base is attached to sugar -phosphate chain. Together this unit which consist of sugar, phosphate and a base is called nucleotide.
  3. The nitrogenous base and a sugar of a nucleotide form a molecule called nucleoside. It lacks phosphate group. Four types of nucleoside are found in DNA molecule.
  4. In a nucleoside, nitrogenous base is attached to the first carbon atom (C-1) of the sugar and when a phosphate group gets attached with that of the carbon (C-5) atom of the sugar molecule a nucleotide molecule is formed.
  5. A single strand of DNA consists of several thousands of nucleotides one above the other.
  6. The phosphate group of the lower nucleotide attached with the 5th carbon atom of the deoxyribose sugar forms phospho-di-ester bond with that of the 3rd carbon atom of the deoxyribose sugar of the nucleotide placed just above it.
  7. Single long chain of polynucleotides of DNA consists of one end with sugar molecules not connected with another nucleotide having C-3 carbon which is not connected with phosphate group, similarly the other end having C-5 of the sugar is not connected with any phosphate group. These two ends of the polynucleotide chain are called as 3′ and 5′ ends respectively.
  8. The single polynucleotide strand of DNA is not straight but helical in shape.
  9. The DNA molecule consists of such two helical polynucleotide chains which are complementary to each other.
  10. The two complementary polynucleotide chains of DNA are held together by the weak hydrogen bonds.
  11. Adenine always pairs with thymine, and guanine with cytosine (a pyrimidine with a purine).
  12. Adenine-thymine pair consists of two hydrogen bonds and guanine-cytosine pair consists of three hydrogen bonds (Thus, if the sequence of bases of a polynucleotide chain is known, that of the other can be determined).

Question 24.
Draw the structures of nitrogen bases in nucleic acid.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 6 Biomolecules 7

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 6 Biomolecules

Question 25.
Describe the structure of RNA.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 6 Biomolecules 8

  1. The other nucleic acid found in living organisms is Ribose nucleic acid.
  2. In most of the organisms it is not found to be hereditary material but in certain organisms like tobacco mosaic virus, it is the hereditary material.
  3. Like DNA, ribose nucleic acid also consists of polynucleotide chain with the difference that it consists of single strand. Exceptions are Reovirus and wound tumor virus where RNA is double stranded.
  4. The nucleotides of RNA have ribose sugar instead of the deoxyribose sugar as in the case of DNA.
  5. In case of RNA, Uracil substitutes thymine of DNA.
  6. Purine, pyrimidine equality is not found in RNA molecule because of its single stranded structure.
  7. RNA strand is usually found folded upon itself in certain regions or entirely. These folding helps in stability of the RNA molecule.
  8. Most of the RNA polynucleotide chains start either with adenine or guanine.
  9. Three types of cellular RNAs have been distinguished:
    1. messenger RNA (mRNA) or template RNA,
    2. ribosomal RNA (rRNA),
    3. transfer RNA (tRNA) or soluble RNA.

Question 26.
Observe the following figure and name the type of bond shown by arrow in the structure.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 6 Biomolecules 9
Answer:
The type of bond shown in the diagram is hydrogen bond.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 6 Biomolecules

Question 27.
What would have happened if there were no enzymes in the body?
Answer:
If enzymes were absent in the body, either the reactions would not occur or if they occur they would occur at a very slow rate.

Question 28.
How many reactions are catalyzed by an enzyme?
Answer:
Each enzyme catalyzes only one reaction.

Question 29.
What is a substrate?
Answer:
The substance upon which an enzyme acts is termed as the substrate.

Question 30.
What is endo-enzyines? Give examples.
Answer:
The enzymes which act within the cell in which they are synthesized are known as endo-enzymes E.g., enzymes produced in the chloroplast and mitochondria.

Question 31.
What are exo-enzymes?
Answer:
1. The enzymes which act outside the cell of which they are synthesized are known as exo-enzymes. E.g. enzymes released by many fungi.
2. These enzymes, synthesized by living cell, retain their catalytic property even when extracted from cells.

Question 32.
How are enzymes categorised?
Answer:
On basis of chemical composition enzymes are categorised:
1. Purely proteinaceous enzymes: e.g. Proteases that spilt protein
2. Conjugated enzymes: enzymes are made up of a protein to which a non-protein prosthetic group is attached.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 6 Biomolecules

Question 33.
What is a prosthetic group ? What w ill happen if it is removed?
Answer:
1. Prosthetic group is non-protein in nature and is attached to the protein component of enzyme by chemical bonds.
2. It is not removed by hydrolysis.
3. If the prosthetic group is removed the protein part of the enzyme becomes inactive.

Question 34.
What are coenzymes?
Answer:
1. Enzymes require certain organic compounds for their activity.
2. The organic compounds that are tightly attached to the protein part are called coenzymes.
3. E.g. Nicotinamaide adenine dinucleotide (NAD), Flavin mononucleotide (FMN).

Question 35.
What are co-factors?
Answer:
1. Enzymes require certain inorganic ions for their activity.
2. The inorganic ions which are loosely attached to the protein part are called co-factors.
E.g. Magnesium, copper, zinc, iron, manganese etc.
[Note: Apoenzyme (protein part) and co-factor together form a complete catalytically active enzyme which is known as holoenzyme. The co-factors are of two types; metal ions and coenzymes. A coenzyme or metal ion that is very tightly or even covalently bound to the enzyme protein is known as a prosthetic group.]

Question 36.
Complete the analogy.
Iron (Fe): Catalase: Manganese (Mn):
Answer:
Peptidase

Question 37.
Give examples of coenzymes and cofactors.
Answer:
1. Nicotinamaide adenine dinucleotide (NAD), Flavin mononucleotide (FMN).
2. Magnesium, copper, zinc, iron, manganese etc.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 6 Biomolecules

Question 38.
How are enzymes named?
Answer:

  1. Enzymes are named by adding the suffix- ‘ase’ to the name of the substrate on which they act e.g. protease, sucrase, nuclease etc. which break up proteins, sucrose and nucleic acids respectively.
  2. The enzymes can be named according to the type of function they perform.
    For e.g., dehydrogenase remove hydrogen, carboxylase add CO; decarboxylases remove C02, oxidases helping in oxidation.
  3. Some enzymes are named according to the source from which they are obtained.
    For e.g., papain from papaya, bromelain from the member of Bromeliaceae family, pineapple.
  4. According to international code of enzyme nomenclature, the name of each enzyme ends with an -ase and consists of double name!
  5. The first name indicates the nature of substrate upon which the enzyme acts and the second name indicates the reaction catalyzed.

For e.g., pyruvic decarboxylase catalyses the removal of C02 from the substrate pyruvic acid.
Similarly, the enzyme glutamate pyruvate transaminase catalyses the transfer of an amino group from the substrate glutamate to another substrate pyruvate.

Question 39.
Explain in detail the mechanism of enzyme action. Write a note on model proposed by Emil Fischer for mechanism of enzyme action.
Answer:
1. The basic mechanism by which enzymes catalyze chemical reactions begins with the binding of the substrate (or substrates) to the active site on the enzyme.
2. The active site is the specific region of the enzyme which combines with the substrate.
3. The binding of the substrate to the enzyme causes changes in the distribution of electrons in the chemical bonds of the substrate and ultimately causes the reactions that lead to the formation of products.
4. The products are released from the enzyme surface to regenerate the enzyme for another reaction cycle.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 6 Biomolecules 10
5. Lock and Key model proposed by Emil Fischer: i. Proteinaceous Nature:
All enzymes are basically made up of protein.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 6 Biomolecules

Question 40.
Describe the concept of metabolism.
Answer:

  1. Metabolism is the sum of the chemical reactions that take place within each cell of a living organism and provide energy for vital processes and for synthesizing new organic material.
  2. It involves continuous process of breakdown and synthesis of biomolecules through chemical reactions.
  3. Each of the metabolic reaction results in a transformation of biomolecules.
  4. Most of these metabolic reactions do not occur in isolation but are always linked with some other reactions.
  5. In cells, metabolism involves two following types of pathways:

a. Catabolic pathways
This involves formation of simpler structure from a complex biomolecule.
For e.g. when we eat wheat, bread or chapati, our gastrointestinal tract digests (hydrolyses) the starch to glucose units with help of enzymes and releases energy in form of ATP (Adenosine triphosphate).

b. Anabolic pathway
It is also called as biosynthetic pathway that involves formation of a more complex biomolecules from a simpler structure
Fone.g., synthesis of glycogen from glucose and protein from amino acids. These pathways consume energy.

Question 41.
Draw a flowchart showing catabolic and anabolic reactions.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 6 Biomolecules 11

Question 42.
Write a short note on secondary metabolites.
Answer:

  1. Secondary metabolites are small organic molecules produced by organisms that are not essential for their growth, development and reproduction.
  2. Several types of bacteria, fungi and plants produce secondary metabolites.
  3. Secondary metabolites can be classified on the basis of chemical structure (e.g. SMs containing rings, sugar), composition (with or without nitrogen), their solubility in various solvents, or the pathway by which they are synthesized (e.g. phenylpropanoid produces tannins).
  4. A simple way of classifying secondary metabolites includes three main groups such as:
    • Terpenes: Made from mevalonic acid that is composed mainly of carbon and hydrogen
    • Phenolics: Made from simple sugars containing benzene rings, hydrogen and oxygen.
    • Nitrogen-containing compounds: Extremely diverse class may also contain sulphur.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 6 Biomolecules

Question 43.
Fill in the blanks.

  1. Living organism have _________ as the basic structural and functional unit.
  2. The cells have _______ containing numerous chemical molecules, the biomolecules.
  3. ________ are used very quickly by cells but if a cell is not in need of all the energy released immediately then it may get stored.
  4. By ________ reaction monosaccharide is converted to disaccharide.
  5. The balance between catabolism and anabolism maintain _______ in the cell as well as in the whole body.

Answer:

  1. Cell
  2. Protoplasm
  3. monosaccharides
  4. Condensation reaction
  5. Homeostasis

Question 44.
Apply Your Knowledge:

Question 1.
While performing an experiment, to understand effect of pH on enzyme activity, a student prepared
solution of varied pH. He observed that enzyme activity is maximum at a particular range of pH.
What is the reason for its maximum activity at a particular range of pH? What would be the effect on enzyme activity if strong acid or strong base is added?
Answer:
The enzymes are highly specific to pH and remain active within particular range of pH only. Hence, exhibit maximum activity only at particular range of pH. When strong acid or strong base is added in the reaction the enzyme activity is inhibited as most of the enzymes are denatured.

Question 2.
When a compound ‘x’ is added to a chemical solution containing enzyme and substrate, the enzymatic activity stops. What could be the nature of compound ‘x’?
Answer:
Compound ‘x’ could be either competitive or non-competitive inhibitor.

Question 45.
Quick Review

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 6 Biomolecules 12
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 6 Biomolecules 13

Question 46.
Exercise:

Question 1.
Draw a flow chart of biomolecules in living system.
Answer:
Refer Quick Review

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 6 Biomolecules

Question 2.
Explain what is biochemistry?
Answer:
1. Biochemistry is biological chemistry that provides us the idea of the chemistry of living organisms and molecular basis for changes taking place in plants, animals and microbial cells.
2. It develops the foundation for understanding all biological processes and communication within and between cells as well as chemical basis of inheritance and diseases in animals and plants.

Question 3.
Mention the basic macromolecules present in the living organism.
Answer:
Polysaccharides (carbohydrate) polymer of monosaccharide, polypeptides (proteins) polymer of amino acids and polynucleotides (nucleic acids) polymer of nucleotides are the three basic macromolecule present in the living organisms.

Question 4.
Write a note on monosaccharides.
Answer:
Monosaccharides:
a. Monosaccharides are the simplest sugars having crystalline structure, sweet taste and soluble in water.
b. They cannot be further hydrolyzed into smaller molecules.
c. They are the building blocks or monomers of complex carbohydrates.
d. They have the general molecular formula (CH20)n, where n can be 3, 4, 5, 6 and 7.
e. They can be classified as triose, tetrose, pentose, etc.
f. Monosaccharides containing the aldehyde (-CHO) group are classified as aldoses e.g. glucose, xylose, and those with a ketone(-C=0) group are classified as ketoses. E.g. ribulose, fructose.

Question 5.
Explain the absorption of disaccharides through the cell membrane.
Answer:
1. Disaccharides are soluble in water but they are too big to pass through the cell membrane by diffusion.
2. They are broken down in the small intestine during digestion.
3. Thus, formed monosaccharides then pass into the blood and through cell membranes into the cells.

Question 6.
Draw the structure of amylose.
Answer:
Starch:
a. Starch is a stored food in the plants.
b. Starch contains two types of glucose polymer: amylose and amylopectin.
c. Both are made from a-glucose.
d. Amylose is an unbranched polymer of a-glucose.
e. The molecules coil into a helical structure.
f. It foims a colloidal suspension in hot water.
g. Amylopectin is a branched polymer of a-glucose.
h. It is completely insoluble in water.

Question 7.
Write the significance of carbohydrates.
Answer:
Significances of carbohydrates are as follows:

  1. Carbohydrates provide energy for metabolism.
  2. Glucose is the main substrate for ATP synthesis.
  3. Lactose, a disaccharide present in the milk provides energy to babies.
  4. Polysaccharide serves as a structural component of cell membrane, cell wall and reserved food as starch and glycogen.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 6 Biomolecules

Question 8.
What is glycosidic bond?
Answer:
Oligosaccharides:
a. A carbohydrate polymer comprising of two to six monosaccharide molecules is called oligosaccharide.
b. They are linked together by glycosidic bond.
c. They are classified on the basis of monosaccharide units:
Disaccharides: These are the sugars containing two monosaccharide units and can be further hydrolysed into smaller components. E.g.: Sucrose, maltose, lactose, etc.
Trisaccharides: These contain three monomers. E.g. Raffmose.
Tetrasaccharides: These contain four monomers. E.g.: Stachyose.

Glycosidic bond:
a. Glycosidic bond is a covalent bond that forms a linkage between two monosaccharides by a dehydration reaction.
b. It is formed when a hydroxyl group of one sugar reacts with the anomeric carbon of the other.
c. Glycosidic bonds are readily hydrolyzed by acid but resist cleavage by base.
d. There are two types of glycosidic bonds: a-glycosidic bond and P-glycosidic bond.

Question 9.
What are saturated fatty acids?
Answer:
1. Saturated fatty acids: They contain single chain of carbon atoms with single bonds.
E.g. Palmitic acid, stearic acid
2. Unsaturated fatty acids: They contain one or more double bonds between the carbon atoms of the hydrocarbon chain.
a. Simple lipids: These are esters of fatty acids with various alcohols.
E.g. Fats, wax.
b. Compound lipids: These are ester of fatty acids containing other groups like phosphate (Phospholipids), sugar (glycolipids), etc.
E.g. Lecithin
c. Sterols: They are derived lipids. They are composed of fused hydrocarbon rings (steroid nucleus) and a long hydrocarbon side chain.
E.g. Cholesterol, phytosterols.

Question 10.
Write a note on simple lipids.
Answer:
Lipids are classified into three main types:
Simple lipids:
a. These are esters of fatty acids with various alcohols. Fats and waxes are simple lipids.
b. Fats are esters of fatty acids with glycerol (CH2OH-CHOH-CH2OH).
c. Triglycerides are three molecules of fatty acids and one molecule of glycerol.
d. Unsaturated fats are liquid at room temperature and are called oils. Unsaturated fatty acids are hydrogenated to produce fats e.g. Vanaspati ghee.

Question 11.
Write a note on derived lipids.
Answer:
Derived Lipids:
a. They are composed of fused hydrocarbon rings (steroid nucleus) and a long hydrocarbon side chain.
b. One of the most common sterols is cholesterol.
Biological significance:
a. It is widely distributed in all cells of the animal body, but particularly in nervous tissue.
b. Cholesterol exists either free or as cholesterol ester.
c. Adrenocorticoids, sex hormones (progesterone, testosterone) and vitamin D are synthesized from cholesterol.
d. Cholesterol is not found in plants.
e. Sterols exist as phytosterols in plants.
f. Yam Plant (Dioscorea) produces a steroid compound called diosgenin. It is used in the manufacture of antifertility pills, i.e. birth control pills.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 6 Biomolecules

Question 12.
What are compound lipids? Mention their biological significance.
Answer:
Compound lipids:
a. These are ester of fatty acids containing other groups like phosphate (Phospholipids), sugar (glycolipids), etc.
b. They contain a molecule of glycerol, two molecules of fatty acids and a phosphate group or simple sugar.
c. Some phospholipids such as lecithin also have a nitrogenous compound attached to the phosphate group.
d. Phospholipids have both hydrophilic polar groups (phosphate and nitrogenous group) and hydrophobic non-polar groups (hydrocarbon chains of fatty acids).
e. Glycolipids contain glycerol, fatty acids, simple sugars such as galactose. They are also called cerebrosides.
Biological significance:
a. Phospholipids contribute in the formation of cell membrane.
b. Large amounts of glycolipids are found in the brain white matter and myelin sheath.

Question 13.
Explain the classification of proteins based on their chemical composition.
Answer:
On the basis of structure, proteins are classified into three categories:
1. Simple proteins:
a. Simple proteins on hydrolysis yield only amino acids.
b. These are soluble in one or more solvents.
c. Simple proteins may be soluble in water.
d. Histones of nucleoproteins are soluble in water.
e. Globular molecules of histones are not coagulated by heat.
f. Albumins are also soluble in water but they get coagulated on heating.
g. Albumins are widely distributed e.g. egg albumin, serum albumin and legumelin of pulses are albumins.
Importance: They are involved in structural components; they also act as a storage kind of protein.
Some are associated with nucleic acids in nucleoproteins of cell.

2. Conjugated proteins:
a. Conjugated proteins consist of a simple protein united with some non-protein substance.
b. The non-protein group is called prosthetic group e.g. haemoglobin.
c. Globin is the protein and the iron containing pigment haem is the prosthetic group.
d. Similarly, nucleoproteins have nucleic acids.
e. Proteins are classified as glycoproteins and mucoproteins.
f. Mucoproteins are carbohydrate-protein complexes e.g. mucin of saliva and heparin of blood.
g. Lipoproteins are lipid-protein complexes e.g. conjugate protein found in brain, plasma membrane, milk etc. Importance: They are involved in structural components of cell membranes and organelles.
They also act as a transporter.
Some conjugated proteins are important in electron transport chain in respiration.

3. Derived proteins:
a. These proteins are not found in nature as such.
b. These proteins are derived from native protein molecules on hydrolysis.
c. Metaproteins, peptones are derived proteins.
Importance: They act as a precursor for many molecules which are essential for life.

Question 14.
What is peptide bond? Explain its formation.
Answer:
1. The covalent bond that links the two amino acids is called a peptide bond.
2. Peptide bond is formed by condensation reaction.

Question 15.
Mention the examples of simple proteins and write their significance.
Answer:
Examples of simple proteins are: E.g.: Albumins and histones.
Significance:
1. Albumin:
a. % It is the main protein in the blood.
b. It maintains the pressure in the blood vessels.
c. It helps in transportation of substances like hormone and drugs in the body.
2. Histones:
a. It is the chief protein of chromatin.
b. They are involved in packaging of DNA into structural units called nucleosomes.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 6 Biomolecules

Question 16.
What is nucleotide?
Answer:
Nucleotide is a unit which consists of a sugar, phosphate and a base. Nucleotides are basic units of nucleic acids.

Question 17.
Write a note on structure of DNA molecule proposed by Watson and Crick.
Answer:
1. DNA is a long chain made up of alternate sugar and phosphate groups. The sugar present in DNA is always a deoxyribose attached to a phosphate group. So, it forms a regular, repeating phosphate sugar sequence.
2. A base is attached to sugar -phosphate chain. Together this unit which consist of sugar, phosphate and a base is called nucleotide.
3. The nitrogenous base and a sugar of a nucleotide form a molecule called nucleoside. It lacks phosphate group. Four types of nucleoside are found in DNA molecule.
4. In a nucleoside, nitrogenous base is attached to the first carbon atom (C-1) of the sugar and when a phosphate group gets attached with that of the carbon (C-5) atom of the sugar molecule a nucleotide molecule is formed.
5. A single strand of DNA consists of several thousands of nucleotides one above the other.
6. The phosphate group of the lower nucleotide attached with the 5th carbon atom of the deoxyribose sugar forms phospho-di-ester bond with that of the 3rd carbon atom of the deoxyribose sugar of the nucleotide placed just above it.
7. Single long chain of polynucleotides of DNA consists of one end with sugar molecules not connected with another nucleotide having C-3 carbon which is not connected with phosphate group, similarly the other end having C-5 of the sugar is not connected with any phosphate group. These two ends of the polynucleotide chain are called as 3′ and 5′ ends respectively.
8. The single polynucleotide strand of DNA is not straight but helical in shape.
9. The DNA molecule consists of such two helical polynucleotide chains which are complementary to each other.
10. The two complementary polynucleotide chains of DNA are held together by the weak hydrogen bonds.
11. Adenine always pairs with thymine, and guanine with cytosine (a pyrimidine with a purine).
12. Adenine-thymine pair consists of two hydrogen bonds and guanine-cytosine pair consists of three hydrogen bonds (Thus, if the sequence of bases of a polynucleotide chain is known, that of the other can be determined).

  1. According to Watson and Crick, DNA molecule consists of two strands twisted around each other in the form of a double helix.
  2. The two strands i.e. polynucleotide chains are supposed to be in opposite direction so end of one chain having 3′ lies beside the 5′ end of the other.
  3. One turn of the double helix of the DNA measures about 34A.
  4. It consists paired nucleotides and the distance between two neighboring pair nucleotides is 3.4A.
  5. The diameter of the DNA molecule has been found be 20A.

Question 18.
What is the function of ribosomal RNA?
Answer:
Ribosomal RNA (rRNA):
a. rRNA was discovered by Kurland in 1960.
b. It forms 50-60% part of ribosomes.
c. It accounts 80-90% of the cellular RNA.
d. It is synthesized in nucleus.
e. It gets coiled at various places due to intrachain complementary base pairing.
Role of ribosomal RNA: It provides proper binding site for m-RNA during protein synthesis.

Question 19.
Write a short note on m-RNA.
Answer:
Messenger RNA (mRNA):
a. It is a linear polynucleotide.
b. It accounts 3% of cellular RNA.
c. Its molecular weight is several million. , d. mRNA molecule carrying information to form a complete polypeptide chain is called cistron.
e. Size of mRNA is related to the size of message it contains.
f. Synthesis of mRNA begins at 5’ end of DNA strand and terminates at 3’ end.

Role of messenger RNA:
It carries genetic information from DNA to ribosomes, which are the sites of protein synthesis.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 6 Biomolecules 14

Question 20.
Write a note on types of non-genetic RNA.
Answer:
There are three types of cellular RNAs:
1. messenger RNA (mRNA),
2. ribosomal RNA (rRNA),
3. transfer RNA (tRNA). ‘

1. Messenger RNA (mRNA):
a. It is a linear polynucleotide.
b. It accounts 3% of cellular RNA.
c. Its molecular weight is several million. , d. mRNA molecule carrying information to form a complete polypeptide chain is called cistron.
e. Size of mRNA is related to the size of message it contains.
f. Synthesis of mRNA begins at 5’ end of DNA strand and terminates at 3’ end.

Role of messenger RNA:
It carries genetic information from DNA to ribosomes, which are the sites of protein synthesis.

2. Ribosomal RNA (rRNA):
a. rRNA was discovered by Kurland in 1960.
b. It forms 50-60% part of ribosomes.
c. It accounts 80-90% of the cellular RNA.
d. It is synthesized in nucleus.
e. It gets coiled at various places due to intrachain complementary base pairing.
Role of ribosomal RNA: It provides proper binding site for m-RNA during protein synthesis.

3. Transfer RNA (tRNA):
a. These molecules are much smaller consisting of 70-80 nucleotides.
b. Due to presence of complementary base pairing at various places, it is shaped like clover-leaf.
c. Each tRNA can pick up particular amino acid.
d. Following four parts can be recognized on tRNA
1. DHU arm (Dihydroxyuracil loop/ amino acid recognition site
2. Amino acid binding site
3. Anticodon loop / codon recognition site
4. Ribosome recognition site.
e. In the anticodon loop of tRNA, three unpaired nucleotides are present called as anticodon which pair with codon present on mRNA.
f. The specific amino acids are attached at the 3’ end in acceptor stem of clover leaf of tRNA.
Role of transfer RNA: It helps in elongation of polypeptide chain during the process called translation.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 6 Biomolecules

Question 21.
What are co-factors? Give examples.
Answer:

  1. Enzymes require certain inorganic ions for their activity.
  2. The inorganic ions which are loosely attached to the protein part are called co-factors.
  3. E.g. Magnesium, copper, zinc, iron, manganese etc.

[Note: Apoenzyme (protein part) and co-factor together form a complete catalytically active enzyme which is known as holoenzyme. The co-factors are of two types; metal ions and coenzymes. A coenzyme or metal ion that is very tightly or even covalently bound to the enzyme protein is known as a prosthetic group.]

Question 22.
Describe the important properties of enzymes.
Answer:
1. Proteinaceous Nature:
All enzymes are basically made up of protein.

2. Three-Dimensional conformation:
a. All enzymes have specific 3-dimensional conformation.
b. They have one or more active sites to which substrate (reactant) combines.
c. The points of active site where the substrate joins with the enzyme is called substrate binding site.

3. Catalytic property:
a. Enzymes are like inorganic catalysts and influence the speed of biochemical reactions but themselves remain unchanged.
b. After completion of the reaction and release of the product they remain active to catalyze again.
c. A small quantity of enzymes can catalyze the transformation of a very large quantity of the substrate
into an end product.
d. For example, sucrase can hydrolyze 100000 times of sucrose as compared with its own weight.

4. Specificity of action:
a. The ability of an enzyme to catalyze one specific reaction and essentially no other is perhaps its most significant property. Each enzyme acts upon a specific substrate or a specific group of substrates.
b. Enzymes are very sensitive to temperature and pH.
c. Each enzyme exhibits its highest activity at a specific pH i.e. optimum pH.
d. Any increase or decrease in pH causes decline in enzyme activity e.g. enzyme pepsin (secreted in stomach)shows highest activity at an optimum pH of 2 (acidic)

5. Temperature:
a. Enzymes are destroyed at higher temperature of 60-70°C or below, they are not destroyed but become inactive.
b. This inactive state is temporary and the enzyme can become active at suitable temperature.
c. Most of the enzymes work at an optimum temperature between 20°C and 35°C.

There are two types of models:
1. Lock and Key model:
a. Lock and Key model was first postulated in 1894 by Emil Fischer.
b. This model explains the specific action of an enzyme with a single substrate.
c. In this model, lock is the enzyme and key is the substrate.
d. The correctly sized key (substrate) fits into the key hole (active site) of the lock (enzyme).

2. Induced Fit model (Flexible Model):
a. Induced Fit model was first proposed in 1959 by Koshland.
b. This model states that approach of a substrate induces a conformational change in the enzyme.
c. It is the more accepted model to understand mode of action of enzyme.
d. The induced fit model shows that enzymes are rather flexible structures in which the active site continually reshapes by its interactions with the substrate until the time the substrate is completely bound to it.
e. It is also the point at which the final form and shape of the enzyme is determined.
[Note: Temperature is a factor affecting enzyme activity and not a property of enzyme.]

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 6 Biomolecules

Question 23.
Explain the classification enzymes and mention the example of each class.
Answer:
1. Enzymes are biological macromolecules which act as a catalyst and accelerates the reaction in the body.
2. Enzymes are classified into six classes:
a. Oxidoreductases: These enzymes catalyze oxidation and reduction reactions by the transfer of hydrogen and/or oxygen, e.g. alcohol dehydrogenase
b. Transferases: These enzymes catalyse the transfer of certain groups between two molecules, e.g. glucokinase
c. Hydrolases: These enzymes catalyse hydrolytic reactions. This class includes amylases, proteases, lipases etc. e.g. Sucrase
d. Lyases: These enzymes are involved in elimination reactions resulting in the removal of a group of atoms from substrate molecule to leave a double bond. It includes aldolases, decarboxylases, and dehydratases, e.g. fumarate hydratase.
e. Isomerases: These enzymes catalyze structural rearrangements within a molecule. Their nomenclature is based on the type of isomerism. Thus, these enzymes are identified as racemases, epimerases, isomerases, mutases, e.g. xylose isomerase.
f. Ligases or Synthetases: These are the enzymes which catalyze the covalent linkage of the molecules utilizing the energy obtained from hydrolysis of an energy-rich compound like ATP, GTP e.g. glutathione synthetase, Pyruvate carboxylase.

Question 24.
Enlist the factors affecting the activity of enzymes.
Answer:
The factors affecting the enzyme activity are as follows:
1. Concentration of substrate:
a. Increase in the substrate concentration gradually increases the velocity of enzyme activity within the limited range of substrate levels.
b. A rectangular hyperbola is obtained when velocity is plotted against the substrate concentration.
c. Three distinct phases (A, B and C) of the reaction are observed in the graph.
Where V = Measured velocity, Vmax = Maximum velocity, S = Substrate concentration,
Km = Michaelis-Menten constant.
d. Km or the Michaelis-Menten constant is defined as the substrate concentration (expressed in moles/lit) to produce half of maximum velocity in an enzyme catalyzed reaction.
e. It indicates that half of the enzyme molecules (i.e. 50%) are bound with the substrate molecules when the substrate concentration equals the Km value.
f. Km value is a constant and a characteristic feature of a given enzyme.
g. It is a representative for measuring the strength of ES complex.
h. A low Km value indicates a strong affinity between enzyme and substrate, whereas a high Km value reflects a weak affinity between them.
i. For majority of enzymes, the Km values are in the range of 10-5 to 10-2 moles.

2. Enzyme Concentration:
a. The rate of an enzymatic reaction is directly proportional to the concentration of the substrate.
b. The rate of reaction is also directly proportional to the square root of the concentration of enzymes.
c. It means that the rate of reaction also increases with the increasing concentration of enzyme and the rate of reaction can also decrease by decreasing the concentration of enzyme.

3. Temperature:
a. The temperature at which the enzymes show maximum activity is called Optimum temperature.
b. The rate of chemical reaction is increased by a rise in temperature but this is true only over a limited range of temperature.
c. Enzymes rapidly denature at temperature above 40°C.
d. The activity of enzymes is reduced at low temperature.
e. The enzymatic reaction occurs best at or around 37°C which is the average normal body temperature in homeotherms.

4. Effect of pH:
a. The pH at which an enzyme catalyzes the reaction at the maximum rate is known as optimum pH.
b. The enzyme cannot perform its function beyond the range of its pH value.

5. Other substances:
a. The enzyme action is also increased or decreased in the presence of some other substances such as co-enzymes, activators and inhibitors.
b. Most of the enzymes are combination of a co-enzyme and an apo-enzyme.
c. Activators are the inorganic substances which increase the enzyme activity.
d. Inhibitor is the substance which reduces the enzyme activity.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 6 Biomolecules

Question 25.
With the help of lock and key theory explain the mechanism of enzyme action.
Answer:
1. Proteinaceous Nature:
All enzymes are basically made up of protein.

2. Three-Dimensional conformation:
a. All enzymes have specific 3-dimensional conformation.
b. They have one or more active sites to which substrate (reactant) combines.
c. The points of active site where the substrate joins with the enzyme is called substrate binding site.

3. Catalytic property:
a. Enzymes are like inorganic catalysts and influence the speed of biochemical reactions but themselves remain unchanged.
b. After completion of the reaction and release of the product they remain active to catalyze again.
c. A small quantity of enzymes can catalyze the transformation of a very large quantity of the substrate
into an end product.
d. For example, sucrase can hydrolyze 100000 times of sucrose as compared with its own weight.

4. Specificity of action:
a. The ability of an enzyme to catalyze one specific reaction and essentially no other is perhaps its most significant property. Each enzyme acts upon a specific substrate or a specific group of substrates.
b. Enzymes are very sensitive to temperature and pH.
c. Each enzyme exhibits its highest activity at a specific pH i.e. optimum pH.
d. Any increase or decrease in pH causes decline in enzyme activity e.g. enzyme pepsin (secreted in stomach)shows highest activity at an optimum pH of 2 (acidic)

5. Temperature:
a. Enzymes are destroyed at higher temperature of 60-70°C or below, they are not destroyed but become inactive.
b. This inactive state is temporary and the enzyme can become active at suitable temperature.
c. Most of the enzymes work at an optimum temperature between 20°C and 35°C.

There are two types of models:
1. Lock and Key model:
a. Lock and Key model was first postulated in 1894 by Emil Fischer.
b. This model explains the specific action of an enzyme with a single substrate.
c. In this model, lock is the enzyme and key is the substrate.
d. The correctly sized key (substrate) fits into the key hole (active site) of the lock (enzyme).

Question 26.
With the help of suitable examples give any three classes of enzymes.
Answer:
a. Oxidoreductases: These enzymes catalyze oxidation and reduction reactions by the transfer of hydrogen and/or oxygen, e.g. alcohol dehydrogenase
b. Transferases: These enzymes catalyse the transfer of certain groups between two molecules, e.g. glucokinase
c. Hydrolases: These enzymes catalyse hydrolytic reactions. This class includes amylases, proteases, lipases etc. e.g. Sucrase

Question 27.
Following graph represents the effect of substrate concentration on enzyme activity. Identify ‘X’ and ‘Y’ Write proper explanation of the process.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 6 Biomolecules 17
Answer:
The factors affecting the enzyme activity are as follows:
1. Concentration of substrate:
a. Increase in the substrate concentration gradually increases the velocity of enzyme activity within the limited range of substrate levels.
b. A rectangular hyperbola is obtained when velocity is plotted against the substrate concentration.
c. Three distinct phases (A, B and C) of the reaction are observed in the graph.
Where V = Measured velocity, Vmax = Maximum velocity, S = Substrate concentration,
Km = Michaelis-Menten constant.
d. Km or the Michaelis-Menten constant is defined as the substrate concentration (expressed in moles/lit) to produce half of maximum velocity in an enzyme catalyzed reaction.
e. It indicates that half of the enzyme molecules (i.e. 50%) are bound with the substrate molecules when the substrate concentration equals the Km value.
f. Km value is a constant and a characteristic feature of a given enzyme.
g. It is a representative for measuring the strength of ES complex.
h. A low Km value indicates a strong affinity between enzyme and substrate, whereas a high Km value reflects a weak affinity between them.
i. For majority of enzymes, the Km values are in the range of 10-5 to 10-2 moles.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 6 Biomolecules

Question 28.
Explain the concept of metabolism.
Answer:

  1. Metabolism is the sum of the chemical reactions that take place within each cell of a living organism and provide energy for vital processes and for synthesizing new organic material.
  2. It involves continuous process of breakdown and synthesis of biomolecules through chemical reactions.
  3. Each of the metabolic reaction results in a transformation of biomolecules.
  4. Most of these metabolic reactions do not occur in isolation but are always linked with some other reactions.
  5. In cells, metabolism involves two following types of pathways:

a. Catabolic pathways
This involves formation of simpler structure from a complex biomolecule.
For e.g. when we eat wheat, bread or chapati, our gastrointestinal tract digests (hydrolyses) the starch to glucose units with help of enzymes and releases energy in form of ATP (Adenosine triphosphate).

b. Anabolic pathway
It is also called as biosynthetic pathway that involves formation of a more complex biomolecules from a simpler structure
Fone.g., synthesis of glycogen from glucose and protein from amino acids. These pathways consume energy.

Question 29.
Distinguish between Catabolic pathways and anabolic pathways.
Answer:
In cells, metabolism involves two following types of pathways:

a. Catabolic pathways
This involves formation of simpler structure from a complex biomolecule.
For e.g. when we eat wheat, bread or chapati, our gastrointestinal tract digests (hydrolyses) the starch to glucose units with help of enzymes and releases energy in form of ATP (Adenosine triphosphate).

b. Anabolic pathway
It is also called as biosynthetic pathway that involves formation of a more complex biomolecules from a simpler structure
Fone.g., synthesis of glycogen from glucose and protein from amino acids. These pathways consume energy.

Question 30.
Write the application of secondary metabolites.
Answer:

  1. Drugs developed from secondary metabolites have been used to treat infectious diseases, cancer, hypertension and inflammation.
  2. Morphine, the first alkaloid isolated from Papaver somniferum is used as pain reliver and cough suppressant.
  3. Secondary metabolites like alkaloids, nicotine, cocaine and the terpenes, cannabinol are widely used for recreation and stimulation.
  4. Flavours of secondary metabolites improve our food preferences.
  5. Tannins are added to wines and chocolate for improving astringency.
  6. Since most secondary metabolites have antibiotic property, they are also used as food preservatives.
  7. Glucosinolates is a secondary metabolite which is naturally present in cabbage imparts a characteristic flavour and aroma because of nitrogen and sulphur-containing chemicals. It also offers protection to these plants from many pests.

Question 31.
Explain the formation of metabolic pool.
Answer:

  1. Metabolism is the sum of the chemical reactions that take place within each cell of a living organism and provide energy for vital processes and for synthesizing new’ organic material.
  2. Metabolic pool in the cell is formed due to glycolysis and Krebs cycle.
  3. The catabolic chemical reaction of glycolysis and Krebs cycle provides ATP and biomolecules. These biomolecules form the metabolic pool of the cell.
  4. These biomolecules can be utilized for synthesis of many important cellular components.
  5. The metabolites can be added or withdrawn from the pool according to the need of the cell.

Question 32.
Explain the concept of metabolic pool.
Answer:
1. Metabolic pool is the reservoir of biomolecules in the cell on which enzymes can act to produce useful products as per the need of the cell.
2. The concept of metabolic pool is significant in cell biology because it allows one type of molecule to change into another type E.g. Carbohydrates can be converted to fats and vice-versa.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 6 Biomolecules

Question 33.
Multiple Choice Questions:

Question 1.
Most common constituents of organic compounds found in organims are
(A) C, H, O, P
(B) C, H, O
(C) C, H, N, P
(D) C, H, O, N, P
Answer:
(B) C, H, O

Question 2.
Carbohydrates are composed of
(A) carbon
(B) hydrogen
(C) oxygen
(D) all of these
Answer:
(D) all of these

Question 3.
In which of the following, the ratio of hydrogen and oxygen atoms is 2:1?
(A) proteins
(B) fats
(C) oil
(D) carbohydrates
Answer:
(D) carbohydrates

Question 4.
Which of the following do not give smaller sugar units on hydrolysis?
(A) Monosaccharides
(B) Disaccharides
(C) Polysaccharides
(D) Glycogen
Answer:
(A) Monosaccharides

Question 5.
The simplest monosaccharide made up of three carbons amongst the following is
(A) erythrose
(B) glucose
(C) glyceraldehyde
(D) ribose
Answer:
(C) glyceraldehyde

Question 6.
Deoxyribose sugar is an example of
(A) monosaccharide
(B) disaccharide
(C) polysaccharide
(D) simple protein
Answer:
(A) monosaccharide

Question 7.
Common examples of hexose sugar is/are
(A) glucose
(B) fructose
(C) erythrose
(D) both (A) and (B)
Answer:
(D) both (A) and (B)

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 6 Biomolecules

Question 8.
If a compound contains 2 monosaccharides, then it is described as
(A) derived monosaccharide
(B) disaccharide
(C) polysaccharide
(D) pentose sugar
Answer:
(B) disaccharide

Question 9.
In a disaccharide, monomers are linked with each other through ________ bonds.
(A) peptide
(B) hydrogen
(C) glycosidic
(D) ester
Answer:
(C) glycosidic

Question 10.
A disaccharide that gives two molecules of glucose on hydrolysis is
(A) sucrose
(B) maltose
(C) lactose
(D) none of these
Answer:
(B) maltose

Question 11.
Sugar present in milk is
(A) fructose
(B) lactose
(C) galactose
(D) sucrose
Answer:
(B) lactose

Question 12.
Polysaccharides consist of
(A) two monosaccharide units
(B) eight monosaccharide units
(C) many monosaccharide units
(D) amino acids
Answer:
(C) many monosaccharide units

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 6 Biomolecules

Question 13.
________ are water insoluble and small molecular weight compounds as compared to macromolecules.
(A) Lipids
(B) proteins
(C) carbohydrates
(D) nucleic acids.
Answer:
(A) Lipids

Question 14.
Simple lipids are esters of
(A) amino acids
(B) proteins
(C) phosphorus
(D) fatty acids with glycerol
Answer:
(D) fatty acids with glycerol

Question 15.
Fatty acids which do not contain double bond between carbon atoms are
(A) saturated fatty acids
(B) unsaturated fatty acids
(C) oleic and linoleic acids
(D) linoleic and linolenic acids
Answer:
(A) saturated fatty acids

Question 16.
Proteins are linear polymers of
(A) amino acids
(B) fatty acids
(C) monosaccharides
(D) nucleic acids
Answer:
(A) amino acids

Question 17.
Proteins are formed by the condensation of
(A) nucleic acids
(B) amino acids
(C) fatty acids
(D) carbohydrates
Answer:
(B) amino acids

Question 18.
Protein is
(A) micromolecule
(B) macromolecule
(C) soluble
(D) specific
Answer:
(B) macromolecule

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 6 Biomolecules

Question 19.
Keratin is a ________ protein.
(A) transport
(B) protective
(C) structural
(D) storage
Answer:
(C) structural

Question 20.
A nucleotide contains
(A) sugar + phosphate
(B) N-base + phosphate
(C) sugar + nitrogenous base
(D) sugar + N-base + phosphate
Answer:
(D) sugar + N-base + phosphate

Question 21.
Nucleotides, the polymers of nucleic acid are joined together by __________ bond.
(A) Peptide
(B) Ester
(C) Phosphodiester
(D) Glycosidic
Answer:
(C) Phosphodiester

Question 22.
Find the odd one.
(A) Adenine
(B) Cytosine
(C) Thymine
(D) Uracil
Answer:
(D) Uracil

Question 23.
The two strands of DNA are
(A) similar in nature and complementary
(B) anti-parallel and complementary
(C) parallel and complementary
(D) basically, different in nature
Answer:
(B) anti-parallel and complementary

Question 24.
RNA is genetic material in
(A) bacteria
(B) cyanobacteria
(C) bacteriophages
(D) plant viruses
Answer:
(D) plant viruses

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 6 Biomolecules

Question 25.
Which RNA is present in more amount in the cell?
(A) m-RNA
(B) t-RNA
(C) r-RNA
(D) not certain
Answer:
(C) r-RNA

Question 26.
Smallest RNA is
(A) t-RNA
(B) m-RNA
(C) r-RNA
(D) not specific
Answer:
(A) t-RNA

Question 27.
________ catalyze hydrolysis of ester, ether etc.
(A) Lyases
(B) Ligases
(C) Hydrolases
(D) Transferases
Answer:
(C) Hydrolases

Question 28.
_______ catalyze interconversions of geometric, optical and positional isomers.
(A) Transferases
(B) Ligases
(C) Oxidoreductase
(D) Isomerases
Answer:
(D) Isomerases

Question 29.
Metal cofactors are also known as?
(A) prosthetic group
(B) coenzyme
(C) activators
(D) inhibitors
Answer:
(C) activators

Question 30.
________ are also known as dehydrogenases.
(A) Oxidoreductases
(B) Ligases
(C) Lyases
(D) Transferases
Answer:
(A) Oxidoreductases

Question 31.
The enzyme functions best at temperature
(A) 30°C to 50°C
(B) 15°C to 25°C
(C) 20°C to 35°C
(D) 40°C to 50°C
Answer:
(C) 20°C to 35°C

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 6 Biomolecules

Question 32.
As temperature changes from 30° to 45° C, the rate of enzyme activity will
(A) decrease
(B) increase
(C) first increase and then decrease
(D) first decrease and then increase
Answer:
(C) first increase and then decrease

Question 33.
Out of the following, which is not a property of enzymes?
(A) Specific in nature
(B) Proteinaceous
(C) Used up in reaction
(D) Increased rate of biochemical reaction
Answer:
(C) Used up in reaction

Question 34.
Majority of cellular enzymes function best at _______ PH.
(A) acidic
(B) basic
(C) neutral
(D) strong base
Answer:
(B) basic

Question 35.
The _______ action of enzyme with a substrate is explained by lock and key theory.
(A) relative
(B) specific
(C) random
(D) abstract
Answer:
(B) specific

Question 36.
Morphine, the first alkaloid isolated from ________
(A) Pisum sativum
(B) Hibiscus rosa sinensis
(C) Papaver somniferum
(D) Azadirachta indica
Answer:
(C) Papaver somniferum

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 6 Biomolecules

Question 34.
Competitive Corner:

Question 1.
Prosthetic groups differ from co-enzymes in that –
(A) They can serve as co-factors in a number of enzyme – catalyzed reactions
(B) They require metal ions for their activity
(C) They (prosthetic groups) are tightly bound to apoenzymes
(D) Their association with apoenzymes is transient
Hint: Apoenzyme (protein part) and co-factor together form a complete catalytically active enzyme which is known as holoenzyme. The co-factors are of two types; metal ions and coenzymes. A coenzyme or metal ion that is very tightly or even covalently bound to the enzyme protein is known as a prosthetic group.
Answer:
(C) They (prosthetic groups) are tightly bound to apoenzymes

Question 2.
Consider the following statements:
1. Coenzyme or metal ion that is tightly bound to enzyme protein is called prosthetic group.
2. A complete catalytic active enzyme with its bound prosthetic group is called apoenzyme. Select the correct option.
(A) Both (i) and (ii) are false.
(B) (i) is false but (ii) is true.
(C) Both (i) and (ii) are true.
(D) (i) is true but (ii) is false.
Answer:
(D) (i) is true but (ii) is false.

Question 3.
Concanavalin A is:
(A) a lectin
(B) a pigment
(C) an alkaloid
(D) an essential oil
Answer:
(A) a lectin

Question 4.
Which one of the following carbohydrates is a heteropolysaccharide?
(A) Cellulose
(B) Starch
(C) Glycogen
(D) Hyaluronic acid
Answer:
(D) Hyaluronic acid

Question 5.
The two functional groups characteristic of sugars are
(A) Carbonyl and phosphate
(B) Carbonyl and methyl
(C) Hydroxyl and methyl
(D) Carbonyl and hydroxyl
Answer:
(D) Carbonyl and hydroxyl

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 6 Biomolecules

Question 6.
Which one of the following statements is correct with reference to enzymes?
(A) Apoenzyme = Holoenzyme + coenzyme
(B) Holoenzyme = Apoenzyme + Coenzyme
(C) Coenzyme = Apoenzyme + Holoenzyme
(D) Holoenzyme = Coenzyme + Co-factor
Answer:
(B) Holoenzyme = Apoenzyme + Coenzyme

Question 7.
Which of the following are NOT polymeric?
(A) Nucleic acids
(B) Proteins
(C) Polysaccharides
(D) Lipids
Answer:
(D) Lipids

Maharashtra Board 11th BK Important Questions Chapter 3 Journal

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 11th Commerce Book Keeping & Accountancy Important Questions Chapter 3 Journal Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Commerce BK Important Questions Chapter 3 Journal

1A. Answer in One Sentence:

Question 1.
What do you mean by Journalising?
Answer:
Journalisation means a process of recording two-fold effects of business transactions in the summarized form of debit and credit in the journal.

Question 2.
Which column in a journal is not filled in at the time of journalising?
Answer:
Ledger Folio column in a journal is not filled in at the time of journalising.

Maharashtra Board 11th BK Important Questions Chapter 3 Journal

Question 3.
Which account is credited when Salary is paid by cheque?
Answer:
Bank Account is credited when salary is paid by cheque.

Question 4.
Why is a journal called the book of prime entry?
Answer:
Journal is called a book of prime entry because all the business transactions are recorded first in the journal in a chronological order i.e. in the order of their occurrence.

Question 5.
In which order the transactions are recorded in a journal.
Answer:
The transactions are recorded in a journal in chronological order i.e. in the order of their occurrence or taking place.

Maharashtra Board 11th BK Important Questions Chapter 3 Journal

Question 6.
Which account is debited, when goods are destroyed by fire?
Answer:
When goods are destroyed by fire, the Loss by Fire Account is debited.

2. Correct the following statements and rewrite the statements.

Question 1.
Transactions can be recorded in any order in the Journal.
Answer:
Transactions must be recorded in chronological order in the Journal.

Question 2.
Trade discount is recorded in the books of accounts.
Answer:
A cash discount is recorded in the books of accounts.

Question 3.
Trade discount is calculated after cash discount while calculating discount on purchase or sales.
Answer:
Trade discount is calculated before cash discount while calculating discount on purchase or sales.

Maharashtra Board 11th BK Important Questions Chapter 3 Journal

Question 4.
Trade discount is allowed for prompt payments.
Answer:
A cash discount is allowed for prompt payments.

Question 5.
The process of entering or recording the transactions in the Journal is called posting.
Answer:
The process of entering or recording the transaction in a Journal is called Journalising.

3. Do you agree or disagree with the following statements

Question 1.
Purchase of Assets should be debited to purchase A/c.
Answer:
Disagree

Question 2.
A cash discount is recorded in the books of Accounts.
Answer:
Agree

Question 3.
GST is imposed by the local body.
Answer:
Disagree

Maharashtra Board 11th BK Important Questions Chapter 3 Journal

Question 4.
Capital is an asset for business organisations.
Answer:
Disagree

Question 5.
With NEFT, RTGS Transaction Cash A/c is affected.
Answer:
Disagree

Question 6.
On purchase of goods or assets output, GST A/c is credited.
Answer:
Disagree

Question 7.
5% GST Charge on luxury cars.
Answer:
Disagree

Maharashtra Board 11th BK Important Questions Chapter 3 Journal

Question 8.
GST Generates income to Central Government only.
Answer:
Disagree

Question 9.
Ledger Folio column in Journal filled while passing Journal entry only.
Answer:
Disagree

Question 10.
Purchase of shares of TATA Ltd should be debited to TATA Ltd’s A/c.
Answer:
Disagree

Maharashtra Board 11th BK Important Questions Chapter 2 Meaning and Fundamentals of Double Entry Book-Keeping

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 11th Commerce Book Keeping & Accountancy Important Questions Chapter 2 Meaning and Fundamentals of Double Entry Book-Keeping Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Commerce BK Important Questions Chapter 2 Meaning and Fundamentals of Double Entry Book-Keeping

1. Answer in one sentence only.

Question 1.
State the meaning of the accounting equation.
Answer:
An equation that indicates or shows that the total assets of a business are always equal to the total liabilities of a business plus capital is called the accounting equation.

Question 2.
What do you mean by debt?
Answer:
To debit an account means to enter the entry or write on the left-hand side of an account.

Maharashtra Board 11th BK Important Questions Chapter 2 Meaning and Fundamentals of Double Entry Book-Keeping

Question 3.
Give two examples of personal accounts.
Answer:
Two examples of personal accounts are stated below:

  1. Mr. Raghuvir Sharma’s Account
  2. The Bank of India’s Account.

Question 4.
What is a Nominal Account?
Answer:
The account relating to business expenses, incomes, and gains is called a nominal account.
e.g. Rent A/c.

Question 5.
Give two examples of real accounts.
Answer:
Two examples of real accounts are:

  1. Cash A/c
  2. Goodwill A/c

Question 6.
State whether drawings increase or decrease owner’s equity.
Answer:
Drawings made by the owner of the business decrease its equity.

Question 7.
What is a conventional cash book?
Answer:
A cash book that is prepared to record not only cash transactions but all types of transactions such as credit purchase or sale, banking transactions, opening, and closing entries, adjustments entries is called a conventional cash book.

Maharashtra Board 11th BK Important Questions Chapter 2 Meaning and Fundamentals of Double Entry Book-Keeping

Question 8.
Explain the term dual aspect.
Answer:
Every transaction has two aspects i.e. for every debit there is corresponding and equal credit.

Question 9.
State the meaning of impersonal account.
Answer:
The account which is not of a person is called an impersonal account.

Question 10.
Write the rule of Real account.
Answer:
The rule of real account states that Debit what comes in and Credit what goes out.

Question 11.
Which account will be debited when goods are sold to Ram on credit?
Answer:
When goods are sold to Ram, Ram’s A/c will be debited.

Question 12.
Which account will be debited when Mr. Shyam has paid cash to you?
Answer:
Cash A/c will be debited when Mr. Shyam has paid cash to us.

2. Write one word/term or phrase which can substitute each of the following statements.

Question 1.
Expenses are paid before it is due.
Answer:
Prepaid Expenses

Question 2.
Income due but not yet received.
Answer:
Accrued Income

Maharashtra Board 11th BK Important Questions Chapter 2 Meaning and Fundamentals of Double Entry Book-Keeping

Question 3.
Carriage paid on the sale of goods.
Answer:
Carriage Outward

Question 4.
Statement of Assets & Liabilities.
Answer:
Balance Sheet

Question 5.
Account prepared to know Net Profit or Net Loss.
Answer:
Profit & Loss Account

Question 6.
Value of goods remaining unsold at the end of the year.
Answer:
Closing Stock

Question 7.
The provision was made to compensate the loss on account of likely debts.
Answer:
Provision for Bad & Doubtful Debts

Question 8.
The accounts are prepared at the end of the accounting year to know the profit or loss and financial position of the business.
Answer:
Final Accounts

Maharashtra Board 11th BK Important Questions Chapter 2 Meaning and Fundamentals of Double Entry Book-Keeping

Question 9.
An amount spent on promoting the sale of goods.
Answer:
Selling Expenses

Question 10.
Additional information is provided below the Trial Balance.
Answer:
Adjustments

3. Select the most appropriate alternatives from those given below and rewrite the statements.

Question 1.
___________ is excess of assets over liabilities.
(a) Goodwill
(b) Capital
(c) Investments
(d) Drawings
Answer:
(b) Capital

Question 2.
Discount earned is transferred to credit side of ___________ account.
(a) Current A/c
(b) Profit & Loss Account
(c) Trading
(d) Capital
Answer:
(b) Profit & Loss Account

Question 3.
___________ is a statement that shows the financial position of a business on a specific date.
(a) Trading account
(b) Trial Balance
(c) Profit & Loss A/c
(d) Balance Sheet
Answer:
(d) Balance Sheet

Maharashtra Board 11th BK Important Questions Chapter 2 Meaning and Fundamentals of Double Entry Book-Keeping

Question 4.
Outstanding expenses are shown on the ___________ side of Balance Sheet.
(a) Assets
(b) Liability
(c) Both
(d) None of these
Answer:
(b) Liability

Question 5.
Interest on Drawing is credited to ___________ Account.
(a) Trading
(b) Profit & Loss Account
(c) Capital
(d) All
Answer:
(b) Profit & Loss Account

Question 6.
Debit balance of Trading Account means ___________
(a) Gross Loss
(b) Net Loss
(c) Net Profit
(d) Gross Profit
Answer:
(a) Gross Loss

Question 7.
Carriage Inward is debited to ___________ Account.
(a) Trading A/c
(b) Profit & Loss
(c) Capital
(d) Bank
Answer:
(a) Trading A/c

Question 8.
Excess of credit over to debit in Profit & Loss Account indicates ___________
(a) Net Profit
(b) Gross Profit
(c) Gross Loss
(d) Net Loss
Answer:
(a) Net Profit

Maharashtra Board 11th BK Important Questions Chapter 2 Meaning and Fundamentals of Double Entry Book-Keeping

Question 9.
Closing stock is always valued at cost or market price which is ___________
(a) more
(b) less
(c) zero
(d) equal
Answer:
(b) less

Question 10.
When a specific date is not given, in that case, interest on the drawing is charged for ___________ month.
(a) Four
(b) Six
(c) Eight
(d) Nine
Answer:
(b) Six

4. Fill in the blanks.

Question 1.
Gross Profit is transferred to ___________ account.
Answer:
Profit & Loss Account

Question 2.
Debit Balance of Trading Account indicates ___________
Answer:
Gross Loss

Question 3.
Income Receivable appears on ___________ side of Balance Sheet.
Answer:
Asset

Question 4.
Interest on Bank Loan is debited to ___________ A/c.
Answer:
Profit & Loss Account

Maharashtra Board 11th BK Important Questions Chapter 2 Meaning and Fundamentals of Double Entry Book-Keeping

Question 5.
Profit and Loss Account is prepared to find out ___________ results of the business.
Answer:
Networking

Question 6.
All indirect/operating expenses are transferred to ___________ account.
Answer:
Profit and Loss Account

Question 7.
Interest of proprietor’s drawing is credited to ___________ account.
Answer:
Profit & Loss Account

Question 8.
An excess of debit over credit in the Profit & Loss A/c represents the ___________
Answer:
Net Loss

Question 9.
All direct expenses are transferred to ___________ account.
Answer:
Trading A/c

Maharashtra Board 11th BK Important Questions Chapter 2 Meaning and Fundamentals of Double Entry Book-Keeping

Question 10.
Balance Sheet is ___________ of assets & liabilities.
Answer:
Statement

5. Classify the following accounts under the types of Personal, Real, and Nominal accounts.

Question 1.
Investments A/c
Answer:
Real Account

Question 2.
Creditors A/c
Answer:
Personal Account

Question 3.
Land A/c
Answer:
Real Account

Question 4.
Purchase Returns A/c
Answer:
Personal Account

Question 5.
Cash A/c
Answer:
Real Account

Question 6.
Building A/c
Answer:
Real Account

Maharashtra Board 11th BK Important Questions Chapter 2 Meaning and Fundamentals of Double Entry Book-Keeping

Question 7.
Capital A/c
Answer:
Personal Account

Question 8.
Goodwill A/c
Answer:
Real Account

Question 9.
Interest received A/c
Answer:
Nominal Account

Question 10.
Depreciation A/c
Answer:
Nominal Account

Question 11.
Stationery A/c
Answer:
Nominal Account

Question 12.
Salary A/c
Answer:
Nominal Account

Maharashtra Board 11th BK Important Questions Chapter 2 Meaning and Fundamentals of Double Entry Book-Keeping

Question 13.
Excise duty A/c
Answer:
Nominal Account

Question 14.
Bank Loan A/c
Answer:
Personal Account

Question 15.
Bank Overdraft A/c
Answer:
Personal Account

Question 16.
Sales A/c
Answer:
Nominal Account

Question 17.
Return Inwards A/c
Answer:
Personal Account

Question 18.
Rent received A/c
Answer:
Nominal Account

Maharashtra Board 11th BK Important Questions Chapter 2 Meaning and Fundamentals of Double Entry Book-Keeping

Question 19.
Wages A/c
Answer:
Nominal Account

Question 20.
Discount received A/c
Answer:
Nominal Account

Question 21.
Debtors A/c
Answer:
Personal Account

Question 22.
Furniture & Fixtures A/c
Answer:
Nominal Account

Question 23.
Purchases A/c
Answer:
Nominal Account

Maharashtra Board 11th BK Important Questions Chapter 2 Meaning and Fundamentals of Double Entry Book-Keeping

Question 24.
Bad Debts A/c
Answer:
Nominal Account

Question 25.
Dadar Library A/c
Answer:
Personal Account

Question 26.
Rent paid A/c
Answer:
Nominal Account

Question 27.
Prepaid Insurance A/c
Answer:
Personal Account

Question 28.
Carriage Outwards A/c
Answer:
Nominal Account

Question 29.
Rent Receivable A/c
Answer:
Personal Account

Maharashtra Board 11th BK Important Questions Chapter 2 Meaning and Fundamentals of Double Entry Book-Keeping

Question 30.
Profit on sale of machinery A/c
Answer:
Nominal Account

Question 31.
Bills Payable A/c
Answer:
Personal Account

Question 32.
Bank of India A/c
Answer:
Personal Account

Question 33.
Carriage Inwards A/c
Answer:
Nominal Account

Question 34.
Stock A/c
Answer:
Real Account

Question 35.
Accrued Interest A/c
Answer:
Personal Account

Maharashtra Board 11th BK Important Questions Chapter 2 Meaning and Fundamentals of Double Entry Book-Keeping

Question 36.
Bank A/c
Answer:
Personal Account

Question 37.
12% Government Bonds A/c
Answer:
Real Account

Question 38.
Carriage A/c
Answer:
Nominal Account

Question 39.
Advertisement A/c
Answer:
Nominal Account

Question 40.
Conveyance A/c
Answer:
Nominal Account

Maharashtra Board 11th BK Important Questions Chapter 2 Meaning and Fundamentals of Double Entry Book-Keeping

Question 41.
Premises A/c
Answer:
Real Account

Question 42.
Octroi A/c
Answer:
Nominal Account

Question 43.
Postage A/c
Answer:
Nominal Account

Question 44.
Electricity Charges A/c
Answer:
Nominal Account